MSC - Patran MSC - Nastran Preference Guide. Struct

C O N T E N T S
MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide

Volume 1: Structural Analysis
MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide, Volume 1: Structural

Analysis
CHAPTER
1
Overview
Purpose, 2
MSC.Nastran Product Information, 3
Introduction to Building a Model, 6
Currently Supported MSC.Nastran Input Options, 8
Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran

Preference, 11
Coordinate Frames, 15
Finite Elements, 16
Nodes, 17
Elements, 18
Multi-point Constraints, 19
- Degrees of Freedom, 22
Superelements, 34
- Select Boundary Nodes, 35
Material Library, 36
Materials Form, 37
- Isotropic, 42
- 2D Orthotropic,
- 3D Orthotropic,
- 2D Anisotropic,
- 3D Anisotropic,
- Composite, 61
- Laminated, 62
2
Building A Model
54
58
59
60
Element Properties, 63
Element Properties Form, 64
- Coupled Point Mass (CONM1), 67
- Grounded Scalar Mass (CMASS1), 69
- Lumped Point Mass (CONM2), 70
- Grounded Scalar Spring (CELAS1), 72
- Grounded Scalar Damper (CDAMP1), 73
- Bush, 74
- General Section Beam (CBAR), 77
- P-Formulation General Beam (CBEAM), 80
- Curved General Section Beam (CBEND), 84
- Curved Pipe Section Beam (CBEND), 86
Lumped Area Beam (CBEAM/PBCOMP), 88

Tapered Beam (CBEAM), 90
General Section (CBEAM), 93
General Section Rod (CROD), 98
General Section Rod (CONROD), 99
Pipe Section Rod (CTUBE), 100
Scalar Spring (CELAS1), 101
Scalar Damper (CDAMP1), 102
Viscous Damper (CVISC), 103
Gap (CGAP), 104
Scalar Mass (CMASS1), 106
PLOTEL, 107
Scalar Bush, 108
Standard Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4), 111
Revised Homogeneous Plate (CQUADR), 113
P-Formulation Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4), 114
Standard Laminate Plate (CQUAD4/PCOMP), 116
Revised Laminate Plate (CQUADR/PCOMP), 117
Standard Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4), 118
Revised Equivalent Section Plate (CQUADR), 120
P-Formulation Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4), 122
Standard Bending Panel (CQUAD4), 125
Revised Bending Panel (CQUADR), 127
P-Formulation Bending Panel (CQUAD4), 128
Axisymmetric Solid (CTRIAX6), 130
Standard Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4), 131
Revised Plane Strain Solid (CQUADR), 132
P-Formulation Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4), 133
Standard Membrane (CQUAD4), 135
Revised Membrane (CQUADR), 136
P-Formulation Membrane (CQUAD4), 137
Shear Panel (CSHEAR), 139
Solid (CHEXA), 140
P-Formulation Solid (CHEXA), 141
Hyperelastic Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4), 143
Hyperelastic Axisym Solid (CTRIAX6), 144
Hyperelastic Solid (CHEXA), 145
Beam Modeling, 146

Cross Section Definition, 146
Cross Section Orientation, 150
Cross Section End Offsets, 151
Stiffened Cylinder Example, 152
Loads and Boundary Conditions, 153

Loads & Boundary Conditions Form, 154
- Object Tables, 158
Load Cases, 167
Defining Contact Regions, 168

Contact, 169
3
Running an
Analysis
Review of the Analysis Form, 172

Analysis Form, 173
Overview of Analysis Job Definition and Submittal, 175
Translation Parameters, 176

Translation Parameters, 177
Numbering Options, 178
Select File, 179
Solution Types, 180
Direct Text Input, 182
Solution Parameters, 183

Linear Static, 183
Nonlinear Static, 186
Normal Modes, 188
Buckling, 194
Complex Eigenvalue, 198
Frequency Response, 203
Transient Response, 206
Nonlinear Transient, 209
Subcases, 211
Deleting Subcases, 212
Editing Subcases, 213
Subcase Parameters, 214

Linear Static Subcase Parameters, 215
Nonlinear Static Subcase Parameters, 216
Arc-Length Method Parameters, 218
Subcases Nonlinear Transient Subcase Parameters, 219
Normal Modes Subcase Parameters, 221
Transient Response Subcase Parameters, 223
Frequency Response Subcase Parameters, 226
Output Requests, 231

Basic Output Requests, 232
Advanced Output Requests, 233
Edit Output Requests Form, 242
Default Output Request Information, 244
- Subcases Direct Text Input, 247
Select Superelements, 248
Select Explicit MPCs..., 249
Subcase Select, 250
Restart Parameters, 251
Optimize, 254
Optimization Parameters, 255
Subcases, 256
- Subcase Parameters, 257
Subcase Select Optimize, 258
Interactive Analysis, 259
Analysis Form, 261

Select Modal Results .DBALL, 262
Loading Form, 263
Create a Field Form, 265
Output Selection Form, 266
Define Frequencies Form, 267
4
Read Results
Overview of Reading Results, 270
Read Output2, 271
Attach XDB, 274
Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities, 277
Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities, 285
Review of Read Input File Form, 312

Read Input File Form, 313
Entity Selection Form, 314
Define Offsets Form, 316
Selection of Input File, 317
Summary Data Form, 318
Reject Card Form, 319
Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File, 320

Coordinate Systems, 321
Grids and SPOINTs, 322
Elements and Element Properties, 323
Materials, 327
MPCs, 328
Load Sets, 329
TABLES, 331
Conflict Resolution, 332

Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by IDs, 332
Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by Names, 332
Review of Delete Form, 334
Deleting an MSC.Nastran Job, 335
Files, 338
5
Read Input File
6
Delete
7
Files
8
Errors/Warnings
Errors/Warnings, 342
Software Components in MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran, 344
MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Components, 345
Configuring the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Execute File, 348
MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide, 349

A
Preference
Configuration and
Implementation
INDEX
MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide, Volume 1: Structural Analysis
CHAPTER
Overview
Purpose
MSC.Nastran Product Information
1.1
Purpose
MSC.Patran is an analysis software system developed and maintained by MSC.Software
Corporation. The core of the system is a finite element analysis pre and postprocessor. Several
optional products are available including; advanced postprocessing programs, tightly coupled
solvers, and interfaces to third party solvers. This document describes one of these interfaces.
The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface provides a communication link between MSC.Patran
and MSC.Nastran. It also provides for the customization of certain features in MSC.Patran. The
interface is a fully integrated part of the MSC.Patran system.
Selecting MSC.Nastran as the analysis code preference in MSC.Patran, activates the
customization process. These customizations ensure that sufficient and appropriate data is
generated for the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface. Specifically, the MSC.Patran forms in
these main areas are modified:
Materials
Element Properties
Finite Elements/MPCs and Meshing
Loads and Boundary Conditions
Analysis Forms
More information on these topics is contained in Preference Configuration and
Implementation (App. A).
CHAPTER 1
Overview
1.2
MSC.Nastran Product Information

MSC.Nastran is a general-purpose finite element computer program for engineering analyses. It
is developed, supported, and maintained by MSC.Software Corporation, 815 West Colorado
Boulevard, Los Angeles, California 90041, (323) 258-9111. See the MSC.Nastran Users Manual,
Volume 1, for a general description of MSC.Nastrans capabilities.
MSC/PATRAN MSC/NASTRAN Preference Guide, Volume 1: Structural Analysis
CHAPTER
Building A Model
Introduction to Building a Model

Currently Supported MSC.Nastran Input Options
Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran
Preference
Coordinate Frames
Finite Elements
Material Library
Element Properties
Beam Modeling
Load Cases
Defining Contact Regions
2.1
Introduction to Building a Model

There are many aspects to building a finite element analysis model. In several cases, the forms
used to create the finite element data are dependent on the selected analysis code and analysis
type. Other parts of the model are created using standard forms.
The Analysis option on the Preferences menu brings up a form where the user can select the
analysis code (e.g., MSC .Nastran) and analysis type (e.g., Structural).
MSC.Patran
File Group Viewport Viewing Display Preferences Tools Insight Control Help
Preferences
Geometry FEM LBCs Matls Properties Load
CasesFields Analysis Results Insight XYPlot
$# Session file patran.ses.01 started recording at 25

$# Recorded by MSC.Patran 03:36:58 PM
$# FLEXlm Initialization complete. Acquiring license(s)...
hp, 2
Analysis...
Global...
Graphics...
Mouse...
Key Map...
Picking...
Report...
Geometry...
Finite Element...
Insight...
Hide Icon Help
Main Form...
The analysis code may be changed at any time during model creation.This is especially useful if
the model is to be used for different analyses in different analysis codes. As much data as
possible will be converted if the analysis code is changed after the modeling process has begun.
The analysis option defines what will be presented to the user in several areas during the
subsequent modeling steps.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
These areas include the material and element libraries, including multi-point constraints, the
applicable loads and boundary conditions, and the analysis forms. The selected Analysis Type
may also affect the allowable selections in these same areas. For more details, see The Analysis
Form (Ch. 2) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Analysis Application.
Analysis Preference
Analysis Code:
To use the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Application

Preference, this should be set to MSC.Nastran.
MSC.Nastran
Analysis Type:
Structural
Input File Suffix:
The only currently supported Analysis Type for

MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran is Structural.
.bdf
Output File Suffix:
.op2
OK
Indicates the file suffixes used in creating file

names for MSC.Nastran input and output files.
2.2
Currently Supported MSC.Nastran Input Options

The following tables summarize all the various MSC. Nastran commands supported by the
MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Application Preference. The tables indicate where to find more
information in this manual on how the commands are supported.
Supported MSC.Nastran File Management Commands
Description
Command
An ASSIGN command is used to assign a particular name (job name + user

specified MSC .Nastran results suffix) to the MSC .Nastran OUTPUT2 file to be
created during the analysis.
ASSIGN
Supported MSC.Nastran Executive Control Commands

Pages
Command
ECHO
183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206, 209
SOL
180
TIME
183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206, 209
Supported MSC.Nastran Case Control Commands
Pages
Command
ACCELERATION
203, 206
ADACT
13, 215
ADAPT
12, 141
DATAREC
13
DISPLACEMENT
183, 194, 203, 206
ELSDCON
183
ESE
183
FORCE
183, 188, 194, 201, 203,

206
Pages
Command
OLOAD
183, 194, 203, 206
SPCFORCES
183, 188, 194, 201, 203,

206
STRAIN
183, 188, 194, 201, 203,

206
STRESS
183, 188, 194, 201, 203,

206
VECTOR
188, 194
VELOCITY
203, 206
GPSDCON
183
FREQUENCY
203
GPFORCE
183
GPSTRESS
233
NLLOAD
233
MAXLINES
183, 186, 188, 194, 198,

203, 206, 209
SET
234
SURFACE
234
VOLUME
234
MPCFORCES
233
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Supported MSC.Nastran Bulk Data Entries
Command
Pages
ADAPT
12, 141, 180, 186
BCONP
169
BFRIC
169
BFRIC
169
CBARAO
77
CBAR
77
CBEAM
88, 90
CBEND
84, 86
CDAMP1
73
CDAMP2
177, 326
CELAS1
72
CELAS2
177, 326
CGAP
104
CHEXA
140
CMASS1
106
CMASS2
177, 326
CONM1
67
CONM2
70
CONROD
99
CPENTA
140
CQUAD4
111, 118, 125, 131, 135
CQUAD8
111, 118, 125, 131, 135
CQUADR
113, 120, 127, 132, 136
CROD
98
CSHEAR
139
CTETRA
140
CTRIAX6
130
CTUBE
100
Command
Pages
CVISC
103
DYNRED
193
EIGB
196, 191
EIGC
201
EIGR
191
EIGRL
191
FEFACE
11
FEEDGE
11
FORCE
159
FREQ1
203
GMBC
158
GRAV
163
MOMENT
159
MAT1
312
MAT2
312
MAT3
312
MAT8
312
MAT9
312
MPC
23
NLPARM
216
OUTPUT
13, 233
PARAM,
AUTOSPC
183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206,

209
PARAM,
INREL
183
PARAM,
ALTRED
183
PARAM,
COUPMASS
183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206,

209
PARAM,
K6ROT
183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206,

209
Pages
Command
Pages
Command
PSHEAR
139
PSHELL
183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206,

209
111, 113, 118, 120, 125, 127, 131,

132, 135, 136
PSOLID
140
PARAM,
LGDISP
186, 209
PTUBE
100
PARAM,G
198, 203, 206, 209
PBEAM
90
PARAM,W3
206, 209
PVAL
11, 141
PARAM,W4
206, 209
PVISC
103
PARAM,
POST
176
RBAR
25
RBE1
26
PBAR
77
RBE2
27
PBCOMP
88
RBE3
28
PBEAM
90
RFORCE
163
PBEND
84, 86
RROD
29
PCOMP
116, 117
RSPLINE
30
PDAMP
73
RTRPLT
31
PELAS
72
SESET
34
PGAP
104
SPC1
158
PLOAD1
165
SPCD
158
PLOAD2
159
TEMP
161
PLOAD4
159
TEMPF
146
PLOADX1
159, 149
TEMPRB
161
PLOTEL
107
TEMPP1
161
PMASS
106
TIC
164, 164
POINT
11, 141
TSTEP
206
PROD
98
TSTEPNL
209, 219
PARAM,
WTMASS
183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206,

209
PARAM,
GRDPNT
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
2.3
Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the

MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference
In Version 68 of MSC .Nastran, MSC introduced p-adaptive analysis using solid elements. The
MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference provides support for this new capability. There are some
fundamental differences in approach to model building and results import for p-element
analyses; this section will serve as a guide to these.
MSC .Nastran Version 69 extends the Version 68 capabilities for p-adaptive analysis in two
areas. Shell and beam elements have been added and p-shells and p-beams can be used for linear
dynamic solution sequences. MSC.Patran Version 6.0 supports both of these capabilities.
Element Creation. MSC . Nastran supports adaptive, p-element analyses with the 3D-solid
CTETRA, CPENTA, and CHEXA elements; 2D-solid TRIA, and QUAD elements; shells TRIA,
and QUAD elements; beams BAR elements. MSC.Patran and MSC .Nastran allow TET4, TET10,
TET16, TET40, WEDGE6, WEDGE15, WEDGE52, HEX8, HEX20, and HEX64 for p-adaptive
analysis for 3D-solids; TRIA3, TRIA6, TRIA7, TRIA9, TRIA13, QUAD4, QUAD8, QUAD9,
QUAD12, and QUAD16 for p-adaptive analysis for 2D-solids and membranes; TRIA3, TRIA6,
TRIA7, TRIA9, TRIA13, QUAD4, QUAD8, QUAD9, QUAD12, and QUAD16 for p-adaptive
analysis for shells; BAR2, BAR3, and BAR4 for p-adaptive analysis for beams. The preferred
approach, when beginning a new model, is to use the higher-order elements--HEX64,
WEDGE52, TET40, and TET16, or TRIA13 and QUAD16, or BAR4. The support for lower-order
elements is provided primarily to support existing models. The higher-order cubic elements
allow more accurate definition of the geometry and more accurate postprocessing of results
from the MSC .Nastran analysis.The translator generates the appropriate MSC .Nastran
FEEDGE and POINT entities for all curved edges on the p-elements. Models with HEX64 and
WEDGE52 elements are easily created with the MSC.Patran Iso Mesher; models with TET16
elements can be created with the Tet Mesher. Models with QUAD16 and TRIA13 elements can
be created using the Iso Mesher or the Paver.
For p-elements, MSC.Patran generates cubic edges to fit the underlying geometry. The cubic
edge consists of two vertex grid points and two points in between. Adjacent cubic edges are not
necessarily C1 continuous. If the original geometry is smooth, the cubic edges may introduce
kinks which cause false stress concentrations. Then, the p-element produces unrealistic results
especially for thin curved shells.
In Version 7 of MSC.Patran, for cubic elements, the two midside nodes on each edge are adjusted
so that the edges of adjacent elements are C1 continuous. The adjustment is done in the Pat3Nas
translator. After the Pat3Nas translator is executed, the location of the two midside nodes in the
MSC.Patran database has changed. The user is informed with a warning message. The user can
turn the adjustment of midside nodes ON and OFF with the environment variable
PEDGE_MOVE. By default, the midside nodes are adjusted to make the adjacent elements C1
continuous. For PEDGE_MOVE set to OFF, the points on a cubic edge are not adjusted.
MSC.Patran generates the input for MSC .Nastran. For cubic edges, FEEDGE bulk data entries
with POINTs are written. By default, the location of the two POINTs is moved to 1/3 and 2/3 of
the edge in MSC.Nastran. The points generated by MSC.Patran must not be moved. Therefore,
a parameter entry PARAM, PEDGEP, 1 is written by MSC.Patran. PEDGEP=1 indicates that
incoming POINTs are not moved in MSC .Nastran. The default is PEDGEP= 0, MSC . Nastran
will move the two POINTs to 1/3 and 2/3 of the edge. The C1 continuous cubic edges improve
the accuracy of p-element results.
In the Version 69 Release Guide, a cylinder under internal pressure was tested to determine the
quality of shell p-elements for curved geometry. The accuracy of the results was very good when
exact geometry was used. With C1 continuous edges we recover the same quality of results
within single precision accuracy.
Element and p-Formulation Properties. Both element and p-formulation properties are
defined using the Element Properties application by choosing Action: Create, Dimension:
1D/2D/ or 3D, Type: Beam/Shell/Bending Panel/2D Solid/Membrane/ or Solid, and pFormulation on the main form. The details of the property form for this case are described on
(p. 141). Most of the properties are optional and have defaults; the material property name is
required.
Two properties that may need to be defined are Starting P-orders and Maximum P-orders. These
properties specify the polynomial orders for the element interpolation functions in the three
spatial directions. Although these are integer values, in MSC.Patran, each property is defined
using the MSC.Patran vector definition. At first, this may seem peculiar, but it gives the user
access to many useful tools in the MSC.Patran system for defining and manipulating these
properties. Typically, a user would define these properties with a syntax like <3 4 2> to prescribe
polynomial orders of 3, 4, and 2 in the X, Y, and Z directions. MSC.Patran will convert these
values to floating point <3. 4. 2.>, but the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference will interpret
them. This vector syntax is convenient primarily because it allows these properties to be defined
using the Fields application. In a case where the material properties are constant over the model,
but it is desirable to prescribe a distribution of p-orders, vector fields can be defined and
specified in a single property definition. The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference will provide
additional help for this modeling function. At the end of an adaptive analysis, when results are
imported, vector, spatial fields will optionally be created containing the p-orders used for each
element for each adaptive cycle. To repeat a single adaptive cycle, it is necessary only to modify
the element properties by selecting the appropriate field.
A common use of the Maximum P-orders property is in dealing with elements in the vicinity of
stress singularities. These singularities may be caused by the modeling of the geometry (e.g.,
sharp corners), boundary conditions (e.g., point constraints), or applied forces (e.g., point
forces). Sometimes it is easier to tell the adaptive analysis to ignore these singular regions than
it is to change the model. This can be done by setting the Maximum P-orders property for
elements in this region to low values (e.g., <1 1 1> or <2 2 2>. These elements are sometimes
called sacrificial elements.
Loads and Boundary Conditions. It is well known in solid mechanics that point forces and
constraints cause the stress field in the body to become infinite. In p-adaptive analyses, care must
be taken in finite element creation and loads application to ensure that these artificial high-stress
regions dont dominate the analysis.
Generally, the best results are obtained with distributed loads (pressures) or distributed
displacements. There are two options under Loads/BCs for applying distributed displacements.
The Element Uniform and Element Variable types under Displacements allow displacement
constraints to be applied to the faces of solid elements. If the elements are p-elements, the
appropriate FEFACE and GMBC entries are produced. If applied to non-p-elements, the
appropriate SPC1 or SPCD entries are produced.
Several new loads and boundary conditions support the p-shell and p-beam elements.
Distributed loads can be applied to beam elements or to the edge of shell elements. Pressure
loads can be applied to the faces of p-shell elements. Temperature loads can be applied to either
the nodes or the elements.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Analysis Definition. Adaptive linear static and normal modes analyses are supported in
Version 68 of MSC. Nastran; both solution types are supported by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran
Preference. Only a few parameters on the Analysis forms may need to be changed for p-element
analyses. If running a version of MSC .Nastran prior to Version 68.2 (i.e., Version 68, or 68.1), the
OUTPUT2 Request option on the Translation Parameters form must be set to Alter File in order
to process the results in MSC.Patran. The Solution Parameters forms for the linear static and
normal modes analyses contain a Max p-Adaptive Cycles option, which is defaulted to 3. The
Subcase Parameters form under Subcase Create has options to limit the participation of this
subcase in the adaptive error analysis. Finally, the Advanced Output Requests form under
Subcase Create has an option to define whether results are to be produced for all adaptive cycles
or only every nth adaptive cycle.
Results Import and Postprocessing. Two different approaches are provided for
postprocessing results from MSC .Nastran p-element analyses. Both approaches rely on
MSC . Nastran creating results for a VU mesh where each p-element is automatically
subdivided into a number of smaller elements. In the standard approach with the default
MSC .Nastran VU mesh (3 x 3 x 3 elements) for solids, (3 x 3 elements) for shells and (3 elements)
for beams, the results will automatically be mapped onto the MSC.Patran nodes and elements
during import. This mapping will occur for all 10, MSC.Patran solid element topologies
mentioned above. The most accurate mapping and postprocessing takes place when results are
mapped to the higher-order MSC.Patran elements.
When the adaptive analysis process increases the p-orders in one or more elements beyond 3,
the 3 x 3 x 3 VU mesh, mapping, and postprocessing may not be sufficiently accurate. The
MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference provides a second approach to handle this situation. In
this case, a user can specify a higher-order VU mesh (e.g. 5 x 5 x 5) on the MSC .Nastran
OUTRCV entry and then import both model data and results entities into a new, empty
MSC.Patran database. In this case, the VU mesh and results are imported directly, rather than
mapped and can be post-processed with greater accuracy. The OUTRCV entry is currently
supported only with the Bulk Data Include File option on the Translation Parameters form.
It should be noted that, with this import mode, displays of element results (e.g., fringe plots)
may be discontinuous across parent, p-element boundaries. This occurs because the VU grids
generated by MSC .Nastran are different in each p-element. Along element boundaries there are
coincident nodes and a result associated with each one. The user should not try to perform an
Equivalence operation to remove these coincident nodes. If this is done, subsequent
postprocessing operations will likely be incorrect.
For both postprocessing options, a result case is created for each adaptive cycle in the analysis.
The result types in this result case will depend on specific options selected on the Output
Request form. By default, the Adaptive Cycle Output Interval option is equal to zero. This means
that output quantities specific to p-elements will be written only for the last cycle. If
postprocessing of results from intermediate cycles is desired, the Adaptive Cycle Output
Interval option should be set equal to one.
One of the key uses of output from intermediate adaptive cycles is in examining the convergence
of selected quantities (e.g., stresses). This can be done using the X-Y plotting capability under the
Results application.
Potential Pitfalls. There are several areas where a user can encounter problems producing
correct p-element models for MSC .Nastran. One is the incorrect usage of the midside nodes in
the MSC.Patran higher order-elements. These nodes are used in p-element analysis only for
defining the element geometry; analysis degrees of freedom are not associated with these nodes.
Therefore it is illegal, for example, to attach non p-elements to assign loads or boundary
conditions to these nodes. One way this can occur inadvertently is if a nodal force is applied to
the face of a MSC.Patran solid. This force is interpreted as a point force at every node (including
the midside nodes) on the face of the solid. For the p-elements, this is not valid. This type of load
should instead be applied as an element uniform or element variable pressure.
Adaptive Analysis of Existing Models. Modifying an existing solid model for adaptive, pelement analysis is relatively straightforward. The first step is to read the NASTRAN input file
into MSC.Patran using the Analysis/Read Input File option. The model may contain any
combination of linear or quadratic tetra, penta, or hexa elements. The second step is to use the
Element Props/Modify function to change the Option for all solid properties from Standard
Formulation to P-Formulation. The element properties form for p-formulation solids has many
options specific to p-element analysis; but they all have appropriate defaults. This property
modification step is the only change that must be made before submitting the model for analysis.
Often, however, as discussed in Potential Pitfalls (p. 13), it is appropriate to modify the types
of loads and boundary conditions applied to the model. For example, in non p-element models,
displacement constraints are applied using MSC .Nastran SPC entries at grid points. In pelement analyses, element-oriented displacement constraints are more appropriate. Existing
displacement LBCs can be modified using the Loads/BCs/Modify/Displacement option. For an
SPC type of displacement constraint, the LBC type is nodal. For a p-element analysis, Element
Uniform or Element Variable displacement constraints are more appropriate. The application
region must be changed from a selection of nodes to a selection of element faces. As described
above, nodal forces can be troublesome in p-element analyses. If possible, it is beneficial to
redefine point forces as pressures acting on an element face. If this is not possible, an alternative
is to limit the p-orders in the elements connected to the node with the point force; this can be
done by defining a new element property for these elements and defining the Maximum Porders vector appropriately. Element pressures, inertial loads, and nodal temperatures defined
in the original model need not be changed for the p-element analysis.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
2.4
Coordinate Frames
Coordinate frames will generate a unique CORD2R, CORD2C, or CORD2S Bulk Data entry,
depending on the specified coordinate frame type. The CID field is defined by the Coord ID
assigned in MSC.Patran. The RID field may or may not be defined, depending on the coordinate
frame construction method used in MSC.Patran. The A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3, C1, C2, and C3 fields
are derived from the coordinate frame definition in MSC.Patran.
MSC.Patran
Geometry FEM LBCs Matls Properties Load CasesFields Analysis Results Insight XYPlot

hp, 2
Only Coordinate Frames that are referenced by nodes, element properties, or loads and
boundary conditions can be translated. For more information on creating coordinate frames see
Creating Coordinate Frames (p. 350) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry
Modeling.
To output all the coordinate frames defined in the model whether referenced or not, set the
environment variable WRITE_ALL_COORDS to ON.
2.5
Finite Elements
The Finite Elements Application in MSC.Patran allows the definition of basic finite element
construction. Created under Finite Elements are the nodes, element topology, multi-point
constraints, and Superelement.
MSC.Patran

hp, 2
For more information on how to create finite element meshes, see Mesh Seed and Mesh Forms
(p. 29) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Nodes
Nodes in MSC.Patran will generate unique GRID Bulk Data entries in MSC .Nastran. Nodes can
be created either directly using the Node object, or indirectly using the Mesh object. Each node
has associated Reference (CP) and Analysis (CD) coordinate frames. The ID is taken directly
from the assigned node ID. The X1, X2, and X3 fields are defined in the specified CP coordinate
frame. If no reference frame is assigned, the global system is used. The PS and SEID fields on the
GRID entry are left blank.
Finite Elements
Action:
Create
Object:
Node
Method:
Edit
Node Id List
1
Analysis Coordinate Frame

Coord 0
Refer. Coordinate Frame
Coord 0
Associate with Geometry

Auto Execute
Node Location List
[0 0 0]
-Apply-
The analysis frame (CD of the GRID) is the coordinate system in

which the displacements, degrees of freedom, constraints, and
solution vector are defined.
The coordinate system in which the node location is defined (CP
of the GRID) can be either the reference coordinate frame, the
analysis coordinate frame, or a global reference (blank),
depending on the value of the forward translation parameter
Node Coordinates.
Elements
The Finite Elements Application in MSC.Patran assigns element connectivity, such as Quad4, for
standard finite elements. The type of MSC . Nastran element to be created is not determined until
the element properties are assigned. See the Element Properties Form (p. 64) for details
concerning the MSC.Nastran element types. Elements can be created either directly using the
Element object, or indirectly using the Mesh object.
Finite Elements
Action:
Create
Object:
Mesh
Type:
Surface
Output Ids
Node Id List
1
Element Id List
1
Global Edge Length
0.1
Element Topology
Quad4
Quad5
Quad8
Mesher
IsoMesh
Paver
IsoMesh Parameters...
Node Coordinate Frames...
Surface List
-Apply-
Elements not referenced by an element property

region that is understood by the MSC.Patran
MSC.Nastran forward translator will not be translated.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Multi-point Constraints
Multi-point constraints (MPCs) can also be created from the Finite Elements Application. These
are special element types that define a rigorous behavior between several specified nodes. The
forms for creating MPCs are found by selecting MPC as the Object on the Finite Elements form.
The full functionality of the MPC forms are defined in The Create Action (FEM Entities).
Finite Elements
Elements
Finite
Action:
Action:
Create
Create
Object:
Object:
MPC
MPC
Explicit
Explicit
Type:
Type:
MPC ID
ID
MPC
Used to specify the ID to associate to the

MPC when it is created.
11
Constant Term
Define Terms...
Terms...
Define
MPC Types. To create an MPC, first select the type of MPC to be created from the option menu.
The MPC types that appear in the option menu are dependent on the current settings of the
Analysis Code and Analysis Type preferences. The following table describes the MPC types
which are supported for MSC .Nastran.
MPC Type
Analysis
Type
Description
Explicit
Structural
Creates an explicit MPC between a dependent degree of

freedom and one or more independent degrees of freedom. The
dependent term consists of a node ID and a degree of freedom,
while an independent term consists of a coefficient, a node ID,
and a degree of freedom. An unlimited number of independent
terms can be specified, while only one dependent term can be
specified. The constant term is not allowed in MSC . Nastran.
Linear SurfVol
Structural
Creates an RSSCON type MPC between a dependent node on a

linear 2D plate element and two independent nodes on a linear
3D solid element to connect the plate element to the solid
element. One dependent and two independent terms can be
specified. Each term consists of a single node.
MPC Type
Analysis
Type
Description
Rigid
(Fixed)
Structural
Creates a rigid MPC between one independent node and one or

more dependent nodes in which all six structural degrees of
freedom are rigidly attached to each other. An unlimited
number of dependent terms can be specified, while only one
independent term can be specified. Each term consists of a
single node. There is no constant term for this MPC type.
RBAR
Structural
Creates an RBAR element, which defines a rigid bar between

two nodes. Up to two dependent and two independent terms
can be specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of
degrees of freedom. The nodes specified in the two dependent
terms must be the same as the nodes specified in the two
independent terms. Any combination of the degrees of freedom
of the two nodes can be specified as independent as long as the
total number of independent degrees of freedom adds up to six.
There is no constant term for this MPC type.
RBE1
Structural
Creates an RBE1 element, which defines a rigid body connected

to an arbitrary number of nodes. An arbitrary number of
dependent terms can be specified. Each term consists of a node
and a list of degrees of freedom. Any number of independent
terms can be specified as long as the total number of degrees of
freedom specified in all of the independent terms adds up to
six. Since at least one degree of freedom must be specified for
each term there is no way the user can create more that six
independent terms. There is no constant term for this MPC
type.
RBE2
Structural
Creates an RBE2 element, which defines a rigid body between

an arbitrary number of nodes. Although the user can only
specify one dependent term, an arbitrary number of nodes can
be associated to this term. The user is also prompted to
associate a list of degrees of freedom to this term. A single
independent term can be specified, which consists of a single
node. There is no constant term for this MPC type.
RBE3
Structural
Creates an RBE3 element, which defines the motion of a

reference node as the weighted average of the motions of a set
of nodes. An arbitrary number of dependent terms can be
specified, each term consisting of a node and a list of degrees of
freedom. The first dependent term is used to define the
reference node. The other dependent terms define additional
node/degrees of freedom, which are added to the m-set. An
arbitrary number of independent terms can also be specified.
Each independent term consists of a constant coefficient
(weighting factor), a node, and a list of degrees of freedom.
There is no constant term for this MPC type.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
MPC Type
Analysis
Type
Description
RROD
Structural
Creates an RROD element, which defines a pinned rod between

two nodes that is rigid in extension. One dependent term is
specified, which consists of a node and a single translational
degree of freedom. One independent term is specified, which
consists of a single node. There is no constant term for this MPC
type.
RSPLINE
Structural
Creates an RSPLINE element, which interpolates the

displacements of a set of independent nodes to define the
displacements at a set of dependent nodes using elastic beam
equations. An arbitrary number of dependent terms can be
specified. Each dependent term consists of a node, a list of
degrees of freedom, and a sequence number. An arbitrary
number of independent nodes (minimum of two) can be
specified. Each independent term consists of a node and a
sequence number. The sequence number is used to order the
dependent and independent terms with respect to each other.
The only restriction is that the first and the last terms in the
sequence must be independent terms. A constant term, called
D/L Ratio, must also be specified.
RTRPLT
Structural
Creates an RTRPLT element, which defines a rigid triangular

plate between three nodes. Up to three dependent and three
independent terms can be specified. Each term consists of a
node and a list of degrees of freedom. The nodes specified in the
three dependent terms must be the same as the nodes specified
in the three independent terms. Any combination of the degrees
of freedom of the three nodes can be specified as independent
as long as the total number of independent degrees of freedom
adds up to six. There is no constant term for this MPC type.
Cyclic
Symmetry
Structural
Describes cyclic symmetry boundary conditions for a segment

of the model. If a cyclic symmetry solution sequence is chosen,
such as SOL 114, then CYJOIN, CYAX and CYSYM entries are
created. If a solution sequence that is not explicitly cyclic
symmetric is chosen, such as SOL 101, MPC and SPC cards
are created. Be careful, for this option automatically alters the
analysis coordinate references of the nodes involved. This could
erroneously change the meaning of previously applied load
and boundary conditions, as well as element properties.
Sliding
Surface
Structural
Describes the boundary conditions of sliding surfaces, such as

pipe sleeves. These boundary conditions are written to the
NASTRAN input file as explicit MPCs. Be careful, for this
option automatically redefines the analysis coordinate
references of all affected nodes. This could erroneously alter the
meaning of previously applied load and boundary conditions,
as well as element properties.
Degrees of Freedom
Whenever a list of degrees of freedom is expected for an MPC term, a listbox containing the valid
degrees of freedom is displayed on the form.
The following degrees of freedom are supported by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran MPCs for the
various analysis types:
Degree of freedom
Analysis Type
UX
Structural
UY
Structural
UZ
Structural
RX
Structural
RY
Structural
RZ
Structural
Note: Care must be taken to make sure that a degree of freedom that is selected for an MPC
actually exists at the nodes. For example, a node that is attached only to solid structural
elements will not have any rotational degrees of freedom. However, MSC.Patran will
allow you to select rotational degrees of freedom at this node when defining an MPC.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Explicit MPCs
This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite
Elements form and Explicit is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC . Nastran
MPC Bulk Data entry. The difference in explicit MPC equations between MSC.Patran and
MSC . Nastran will result in the A1 field of the MSC .Nastran entry being set to -1.0.
Define Terms
Dependent Terms (1)
Nodes (1)
Holds the dependent term information.

This term will define the fields for G1
and C1 on the MPC entry. Only one
node and DOF combination may be
defined for any given explicit MPC. The
A1 field on the MPC entry is
automatically set to -1.0.
DOFs (1)
14
UX
Independent Terms (No Max)

Coefficient
Nodes (1)
DOF (1)
1.
UY
-3.4000>
12
UZ
Create Dependent
Create Independent
Coefficient =
Holds the independent term

information. These terms define the
Gi, Ci, and Ai fields on the MPC entry,
where i is greater than one. As many
coefficient, node, and DOF
combinations as desired may be
defined.
Modify
Delete
-3.4
Auto Execute
Node List
Node 12
DOFs
UX
UY
UZ
Apply
Clear
Cancel
Rigid (Fixed)
Elements form and Rigid (Fixed) is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC. Nastran
RBE2 Bulk Data entry. The CM field on the RBE2 entry will always be 123456.
Define Terms
Dependent Terms (No Max)
Nodes (1)
Holds the dependent term

information. This term defines the
GMi fields on the RBE2 entry. As
many nodes as desired may be
selected as dependent terms.
14
10
6
Independent Terms (1)

Nodes (1)

information. This term defines the
GN field on the RBE2 entry. Only
one node may be selected.
Create Dependent
Create Independent
Modify
Delete
Auto Execute
Node List
Node 4
Apply
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
RBAR MPCs
Elements form and RBAR is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC .Nastran RBAR
Bulk Data entry and defines a rigid bar with six degrees of freedom at each end. Both the
Dependent Terms and the Independent Terms lists can have either 1 or 2 node references. The
total number of referenced nodes, however, must be 2. If either or both of these lists references 2
nodes, then there must be an overlap in the list of referenced nodes.
Define Terms
Dependent Terms (Min =1, Max = 2)
Nodes
(1)
DOFs (Max=6)
UX

information. Either one or two
nodes may be defined as having
dependent terms. The Nodes
define the GA and GB fields on the
RBAR entry. The DOFs define the
CMA and CMB fields.
Independent Terms (Min = 1, Max = 2)

Nodes
(1)
DOFs (Max =6)
UY UZ RX
UX UY UZ
Create Dependent
Create Independent

information. Either one or two
nodes may be defined as having
independent terms.The Nodes
define the GA and GB fields on the
RBAR entry.The DOFs define the
CNA and CNB fields.
Modify
Delete
Auto Execute
Node List
Node 2
DOFs
UX
UY
UZ
Apply
Clear
Cancel
RBE1 MPCs
Elements form and RBE1 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC .Nastran RBE1
Bulk Data entry.
Define Terms
Nodes
(1)
DOFs (Max=6)
UX UZ
UY RY RZ
12
UX

information. Defines the GMi and
CMi fields on the RBE1 entry. An
unlimited number of nodes and
DOFs may be defined here.
Independent Terms (Min = 1, Max = 6)

Nodes
(1)
DOFs (Max =6)
UY UZ RX
UX UY UZ
Create Dependent
Modify
Create Independent
Delete

information. Defines the GNi and
CNi fields on the RBE1 entry.
The total number of Node/DOF
pairs defined must equal 6, and
be capable of representing any
general rigid body motion.
Auto Execute
Node List
Node 2
DOFs
UX
UY
UZ
Apply
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
RBE2 MPCs
Elements form and RBE2 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC .Nastran RBE2
Bulk Data entry.
Define Terms
Dependent Terms (1)
Nodes (No Max)
DOFs (Max=6)
1,10,:14:2,15>

information. This term defines
the GMi and CM fields on the
RBE2 entry. As many nodes as
desired may be selected as
dependent terms.
UX UZ

Nodes (1)
8

information. This term defines
the GN field on the RBE2 entry.
Only one node may be selected.
Create Dependent
Modify
Create Independent
Delete
Auto Execute
Node List
Node 1,10:14:2,15,16
DOFs
UX
UY
UZ
Apply
Clear
Cancel
RBE3 MPCs
Elements form and RBE3 is the selected type. This form is used to create a MSC .Nastran RBE3
Bulk Data entry.
Define Terms
Nodes
(1)
DOFs (Max=6)
10
UX UY UZ RX
11
UX UY UZ RX

information. Defines the GMi and
CMi fields on the RBE3 entry. The
first dependent term will be treated
as the reference node, REFGRID
and REFC. The rest of the
dependent terms become the GMi
and CMi components.

Coefficient
Nodes (No Max)
DOF (Max=6)
1.
1:5:2
UX UY UZ
4.69999>
2:6:2
UX
5.19999>
7,8
UY
Create Dependent
Create Independent
Coefficient =

information. Defines the Gi, j, Ci, and
WTi fields on the RBE3 entry.
Modify
Delete
5.2
Auto Execute
Node List
Node 7 8
DOFs
UX
UY
UZ
Apply
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
RROD MPCs
Elements form and RROD is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC .Nastran
RROD Bulk Data entry.
Define Terms
Dependent Terms (1)
Nodes
(1)
DOFs (1)
UY

information. Defines the GB and
CMB on the RROD entry. Only one
translational DOF may be
referenced for this entry.

Nodes (1)
2
information. Defines the GA field on
the RROD entry. The CMA field is
left blank.
Create Dependent
Modify
Create Independent
Delete
Auto Execute
Node List
Node 1
DOFs
UX
UY
UZ
Apply
Clear
Cancel
RSPLINE MPCs
Elements form and RSPLINE is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC. Nastran
RSPLINE Bulk Data entry. The D/L field for this entry is defined on the main MPC form. This
MPC type is typically used to tie together two dissimilar meshes.
Define Terms
Sequence
Nodes (1)
DOFs (MAX=6)
UX UY U>
UX UY U>
UX UY U>

information.

Sequence
Nodes (1)
information. Terms with the
highest and lowest sequence
numbers must be
independent.
1
3
Create Dependent
Modify
Create Independent
Delete
Sequence =
Determines what sequence the

independent and dependent
terms will be written to the
RSPLINE entry.
Auto Execute
Node List
Node 5
DOFs
UX
UY
UZ
Apply
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
RTRPLT MPCs
Elements form and RTRPLT is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC. Nastran
RTRPLT Bulk Data entry.
Define Terms
Dependent Terms (Min= 1, Max= 3)
Nodes(1)
DOFs (MAX=6)
RX RY
UX UY
UX UY

information. Defines the GA, GB, GC,
CMA, CMB, and CMC fields of the
RTRPLT entry.
Independent Terms (Min= 1, Max= 3))

Nodes (1)
DOFs (MAX=6)
UX UY UZ RZ
UZ
UZ
Create Dependent
Create Independent

information. The total number of nodes
referenced in both the dependent terms
and the independent terms must equal
three. There must be exactly six
independent degrees of freedom, and
they must be capable of describing rigid
body motion. Defines the GA, GB, GC,
CNA, CNB, and CNC fields of the
RTRPLT entry.
Modify
Delete
Auto Execute
Node List
Node 3
DOFs
UX
UY
UZ
Apply
Clear
Cancel
Cyclic Symmetry MPCs

The Cyclic Symmetry MPC created by this form will be translated into CYJOIN, CYAX, and
CYSYM entries if cyclic symmetric is the selected type, see Solution Parameters (p. 183), or into
SPC and MPC entries if the requested type is not explicitly cyclic symmetric.
Finite Elements
Action:
Create
Object:
MPC
Type:
Cyclic Symmetry
MPC ID
1
Node Comparison Tolerance
0.005
If the type selected is Cyclic Symmetry, the type of

symmetry will always be rotational.
NOTE: MPC option will automatically overwrite the
analysis coordinate references on all the nodes belonging
to the Dependent and Independent Regions. Be careful
that this does not erroneously change the meaning of
previously applied loads and boundary conditions, or
element properties.
Cylindrical Coord. Frame

Any node lying on the Z axis will be automatically written to
the CYAX entry.
Auto Execute
Dependent Region
Side 2 of the CYJOIN entries.
Independent Region
Side 1 of the CYJOIN entries.
-Apply-
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Sliding Surface MPCs

The Sliding Surface MPC created by this form will be translated into explicit MPCs in the
NASTRAN input file.
Finite Elements
Action:
Create
Object:
MPC
Type:
Sliding Surface
MPC ID
1
Node Comparison Tolerance
0.005
Normal Coord. Frame Option
Automatic
User Specified
Coordinate Frame
Normal Axis
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 3
Auto Execute
Dependent Region
Independent Region
-Apply-
If a Sliding Surface type is used, note that this MPC

option will automatically overwrite the analysis
coordinate references on all the nodes belonging to
the Dependent and Independent Regions. Be
careful that this does not erroneously change the
meaning of previously applied loads and boundary
conditions, or element properties.
Superelements
In superelement analysis, the model is partitioned into separate collections of elements. These
smaller pieces of structure, called Superelement, are first solved as separate structures by
reducing their stiffness matrix, mass matrix, damping matrix, loads and constraints to the
boundary nodes and then combined to solve for the whole structure. The first step in creating a
superelement is to create a MSC.Patran group (using Group/Create) that contains the elements
in the superelement. This group is then selected in the Finite Elements application on the
Create/ Superelement form.
Finite Elements
Create
Action:
Object:
Superelement
Superelement List
Superelement_1
List of existing superelements.
Superelement Name
Superelement_1
Superelement Description
Left Wing of DC-10
Element Definition Group

Group_Superelement_1
Select Boundary Nodes...
-Apply-
The group containing all the elements that define a

superelement. Note that the group must contain
elements not just nodes. If a group does not contain
elements, it will not show up in the Element Definition
Group listbox.
Brings up an optional subordinate form that allows a

user to select boundary nodes of the superelement. By
default, the common nodes between the elements in
the group and the rest of the model are selected as the
boundary nodes.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Select Boundary Nodes

Get Default Boundary Nodes
Add
Remove
Selecting this option adds the common nodes between the

Element Definition Group and the rest of the model to the
Selected Boundary Nodes box.
Allows for manual selection of boundary nodes.
Remove selected nodes from the Selected Boundary

Nodes box.
Selected Boundary Nodes
OK
Clear
Add selected nodes to the Selected Boundary Nodes box.
2.6
Material Library
The Materials form will appear when the Material toggle, located on the MSC.Patran application
selections, is chosen. The selections made on the Materials menu will determine which material
form appears, and ultimately, which MSC .Nastran material will be created.
The following pages give an introduction to the Materials form and details of all the material
property definitions supported by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference.
Only material records that are referenced by an element property region or by a laminate lay-up
will be translated. References to externally defined materials will result in special comments in
the NASTRAN input file, e.g., materials that property values that are not defined in MSC.Patran.
The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran forward translator will perform material type conversions when
needed. This applies to both constant material properties and temperature-dependent material
properties. For example, a three-dimensional orthotropic material that is referenced by CHEXA
elements will be converted into a three-dimensional anisotropic material.
MSC.Patran

hp, 2
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Materials Form
This form appears when Materials is selected on the main menu. The Materials form is used to
provide options to create the various MSC . Nastran materials.
Materials
Create
Action:
Isotropic
Object:
Manual Input
Method:
This toggle defines the basic material directionality and

can be set to Isotropic, 2D Orthotropic, 3D Orthotropic, 2D
Anisotropic, 3D Anisotropic, or Composite.
Filter
*
Existing Materials
Lists the existing materials with the specified

directionality.
Material Names
Defines the material name. A unique material ID will be
assigned during translation.
Description
DATE: 01-Apr-92
Time: 17:08:02
Code:
MSC.Nastran
Type:
Structural
Describes the material that is being created.
Indicates the active analysis code and analysis type. These

selections are made on the Preferences>Analysis
(p. 321) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Basic Functions.
Input Properties...
Change Material Status...
Generates a form that is used to define the

material properties.
Generates a form that is used to indicate the active portions of

the material model. By default, all portions of a created material
model are active.
The following table outlines the options when Create is the selected Action.
Object
Isotropic
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Option 4
Option 5
Linear Elastic
Nonlinear
Elastic
Hyperelastic
Nearly
Incompressible
Elastoplastic
Stress/Strain
Test Data
Coefficients
- Mooney
Rivlin
von Mises
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Tresca
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Mohr-Coulomb
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Drucker-Prager
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
von Mises
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Tresca
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Mohr-Coulomb
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Drucker-Prager
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Curve
Hardening Slope
Failure
Creep
n/a
Tabular Input
Hill
Hoffman
Tsai-Wu
Maximum Strain
Creep Law 111

Creep Law 112
Creep Law 121
Creep Law 122
Creep Law 211
Creep Law 212
Creep Law 221
Creep Law 222
Creep Law 300
1
2
3
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Object
Option 1
2D
Orthotropic
Linear Elastic
3D
Orthotropic
Linear Elastic
2D
Anisotropic
Linear Elastic
Elastoplastic
Option 2
Stress/Strain
Option 3
von Mises
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Tresca
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Mohr-Coulomb
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Drucker-
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Curve
Prager
Hardening Slope
Failure
n/a
Hill
Hoffman
Tsai-Wu
Maximum Strain
Option 4
von Mises
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Tresca
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Mohr-Coulomb
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Drucker-Prager
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Option 5
Object
Option 1
Creep
3D
Anisotropic
Option 2
Option 3
Option 4
Tabular Input
Creep Law 111
Creep Law 112
Creep Law 121
Creep Law 122
Creep Law 211
Creep Law 212
Creep Law 221
Creep Law 222
Creep Law 300
Linear Elastic
Elastoplastic
Stress/Strain
von Mises
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Tresca
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Mohr-Coulomb
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Drucker-
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Curve
Prager
Hardening Slope
von Mises
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Tresca
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Mohr-Coulomb
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Drucker-
- Isotropic
- Kinematic
- Combined
Prager
Option 5
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Object
Option 1
Creep
Composite
Laminate
Rule of Mixtures
HAL Cont. Fiber
HAL Disc. Fiber
HAL Cont.
Ribbon
HAL Disc.
Ribbon
HAL Particulate
Short Fiber 1D
Short Fiber 2D
Option 2
Tabular Input
Creep Law 111
Creep Law 112
Creep Law 121
Creep Law 122
Creep Law 211
Creep Law 212
Creep Law 221
Creep Law 222
Creep Law 300
Option 3
Option 4
Option 5
Isotropic
Linear Elastic
This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials
form and Isotropic is selected on the Material form and when Linear Elastic is the selected
Constitutive Model on the Input Options form. Use this form to define the linear elasticity values
and other miscellaneous values for an Isotropic material. The translator will produce MAT1
entry.
Input Options
Linear Elastic
Constitutive Model:
Property Name
Value
Elastic Modulus =
Poissons Ratio =
Shear Modulus =
Density =
Thermal Expansion Coeff =
Structural Damping Coeff =
Reference Temperature =
Current Constitutive Models:
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Nonlinear Elastic
form, Isotropic is the selected Object, and Nonlinear Elastic is the selected Constitutive Model
on the Input Options form. Use this form to define the nonlinear elastic stress-strain curve on the
MATS1 entry. A stress-strain table defined using the Fields application can be selected on this
form. Based on this information the translator will produce MATS1 and TABLES1 entries.
Input Options
Constitutive Model:
Nonlinear Elastic
Property Name
Value
Stress/Strain Curve =
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
Hyperelastic
form and one of the following is the selected Object.
Isotropic
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Option 4
Option 5
Hyperelastic
Nearly
Incompressible
Test Data
Mooney Rivlin
1, 2, 3
Coefficients
Use this form to define the data describing hyperelastic behavior of a material. This data is
placed on MATHP and TABLES1 entries.
Input Options
Hyperelastic
Constitutive Model:
Comressibility:
Data Type:
Strain Energy Potential:
Order of Polynomial:
Nearly Incompressible
Test Data
Mooney Rivlin
1
Property Name
Value
Tension/compresion TAB1 =
Equibiaxial Tension TAB2 =
Simple Shear Data TAB3 =
Pure Shear Data TAB4 =
Pure Vol. compression TABD =
OK
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Hyperelastic
Isotropic
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Option 4
Option 5
Hyperelastic
Nearly
Incompressible
Test Data
Mooney Rivlin
1, 2, 3
Coefficients
Use this form to define the data describing hyperelastic behavior of a material. This data is
placed on MATHP.
Input Options
Hyperelastic
Constitutive Model:
Comressibility:
Nearly Incompressible
Data Type:
Coefficients
Strain Energy Potential:

Order of Polynomial:
Mooney Rivlin
1
Property Name
Value
Distortional Def. Coef. A10 =

Distorional Def. Coef. A01 =
Vol. Deformation Coef. D1=
Density RHO=
Vol. Thermal Exp. Coef. AV =
Reference Temp. TREF =
Structural Damp. Coeff GE =
OK
Clear
Cancel
Elastoplastic
Isotropic
2D Anisotropic
3D Anisotropic
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Elastoplastic
Stress/Strain Curve von Mises

Tresca
Option 4
Isotropic, Kinematic, Combined
Use this form to define the data describing plastic behavior of a material. This data is placed on
MATS1 and TABLES1 entries.
Input Options
Constitutive Model:
Nonlinear Data Input:
Elastoplastic
Stress/Strain Curve
Von Mises
Yield Function:
Hardening Rule:
Isotropic
Property Name
Value
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Elastoplastic
form when one of the following is the selected Object.
Isotropic
2D Anisotropic
3D Anisotropic
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Option 4
Elastoplastic
Stress/Strain Curve
Mohr-Coulomb
Drucker-Prager
Use this form to define the data describing the plastic behavior of a material. This data is placed
on MATS1 and TABLES1 entries.
Input Options
Constitutive Model:
Elastoplastic
Stress/Strain Curve
Yield Function:
Mohr-Coulomb
Hardening Rule:
Isotropic
Property Name
Value
Internal Friction Angle =
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
Elastoplastic
Isotropic
Isotropic
2D Anisotropic
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Option 4
Elastoplastic
Hardening Slope
von Mises
Tresca
on an MATS1 entries.
Input Options
Constitutive Model:
Yield Function:
Hardening Rule:
Elastoplastic
Hardening Slope
Von Mises
Isotropic
Property Name
Value
Hardening Slope =
Yield Point =
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Elastoplastic
Isotropic
2D Anisotropic
3D Anisotropic
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Option 4
Elastoplastic
Hardening Slope
Mohr-Coulomb
Drucker-Prager
on an MATS1 entries.
Input Options
Constitutive Model:
Elastoplastic
Hardening Slope
Yield Function:
Mohr-Coulomb
Hardening Rule:
Isotropic
Value
Property Name
Hardening Slope =
Yield Point =
Internal Friction Angle =
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
Failure
Isotropic
2D Anisotropic
Option 1
Option 2
Failure
n/a
Use this form to define the failure criteria for the isotropic and two-dimensional anisotropic
material. This data appears in the ST, SC, and SS fields on MAT1 and MAT2 entries.
Input Options
Failure
Constitutive Model:
n/a
Composite Failure Theory:

Property Name
Value
Tension Stress Limit =

Compression Stress Limit =
Shear Stress Limit =
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Failure
Isotropic
2D Anisotropic
Option 1
Option 2
Failure
Hill, Hoffman, Tsai-Wu, Maximum Strain
Use this form to define the failure criteria of the isotropic and two-dimensional anisotropic
material. This data appears on MAT1 and PCOMP entries.
Input Options
Failure
Constitutive Model:
Hill

Property Name
Value
Tension Stress Limit =

Compression Stress Limit =
Bonding Shear Stress Limit =
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
Creep
Isotropic
2D Anisotropic
Option 1
Option 2
Creep
Tabular
3D Anisotropic
Use this form to define the primary stiffness, primary damping, and secondary damping for a
creep model with tabular input. This data appears on the CREEP entry.
Input Options
Constitutive Model:
Creep
Creep Data Input:
Tabular Input
Property Name
Value
Creep Reference Temp =

Creep Threshold Factor =
Temp. Dependence Exponent =
Primary Creep Stiffness =
Primary Creep Damping =
Secondary Creep Damping =
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Creep
Isotropic
2D Anisotropic
3D Anisotropic
Option 1
Option 2
Creep
Creep Law 111, 112,121,122, 211, 212, 221, 222, 300
Use this form to define the coefficients for one of many empirical creep models available in
MSC . Nastran. This data appears on the CREEP entry.
Input Options
Constitutive Model:
Creep
Creep Data Input:
Creep Law 111
Property Name
Value
Creep Reference Temp. =

Creep Threshold Factor =
Temp. Dependence Exponent
Coefficient A =
Coefficient B =
Coefficient C =
Coefficient D =
Coefficient E =
Coefficient F =
Coefficient G =
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
2D Orthotropic
Linear Elastic
form, 2D Orthotropic is the selected Object, and Linear Elastic is the selected Constitutive Model
on the Input Options form. Use this form to define the elasticity properties, and other
miscellaneous data for a two dimensional Orthotropic material. The data appears on MAT8
entries.
Input Options
Constitutive Model:
Linear Elastic
Property Name
Value
Elastic Modulus 11 =
Poissons Ratio 12 =
Shear Modulus 12 =
Shear Modulus 23 =
Shear Modulus 13 =
Density =
Thermal Expansion Coef 11=
Thermal Expansion Coef 22 =
Structural Damping Coef =
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Failure
form and 2D Orthotropic is the selected Object.
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Failure
Stress
n/a
Strain
n/a
Use this form to define the failure criteria for a 2D Orthotropic material. The data appears in the
Xt, Xc, Yt, Yc, and S fields of the MAT8 entry.
Input Options
Failure
Constitutive Model:
Failure Limits:
Stress
n/a
Property Name
Value
Tension Stress Limit 11 =

Compress Stress Limit 11 =
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
Failure
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Failure
Stress
Hill, Hoffman
Strain
Hill, Hoffman
Use this form to define the failure criteria of a two-dimensional orthotropic material. This data
appears on MAT8 and PCOMP entries.
Input Options
Failure
Constitutive Model:
Stress
Failure Limits:
Hill
Property Name
Value

-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Failure
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Failure
Stress
Tsai-Wu, Maximum Strain
Strain
Tsai-Wu, Maximum Strain
Use this form to define the failure criteria of a two-dimensional orthotropic material. This data
appears on MAT8 and PCOMP entries.
Input Options
Failure
Constitutive Model:
Failure Limits:
Stress
Tsai-Wu
Property Name
Value

Interaction Term =
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
3D Orthotropic
Linear Elastic
form, 3D Orthotropic is the selected Object, and Linear Elastic is the selected Constitutive Model
on the Input Options form. Use this form to define the elasticity properties and other
miscellaneous data for a 3D Orthotropic material. This data appears on MAT3 entries if the
material is used with axisymmetric solid elements or MAT9 entries if the material is used with
3D solid element (CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA) entries.
Input Options
Constitutive Model:
Linear Elastic
Property Name
Value
Poisson Ratio 12 =
Poisson Ratio 23 =
Poisson Ratio 31 =
Shear Modulus 12 =
Shear Modulus 23 =
Shear Modulus 31 =
Density =
Thermal Expansion Coeff 11=
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
2D Anisotropic
Linear Elastic
form, 2D Anisotropic is the selected Object, and Linear Elastic is the selected Constitutive Model
miscellaneous data for a 2D plane stress Anisotropic material. This data appears on MAT2
entries.
Input Options
Constitutive Model:
Linear Elastic
Property Name
Value
Stiffness 11 =
Stiffness 12 =
Stiffness 13 =
Stiffness 22 =
Stiffness 23 =
Stiffness 33 =
Density =
Thermal Expansion Coef 11=
Structural Damping Coef =
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
3D Anisotropic
Linear Elastic
form, 3D Anisotropic is the selected Object, and Linear Elastic is the selected Constitutive Model
miscellaneous data for a 3D Anisotropic material. This data appears on MAT9 entries.
Input Options
Constitutive Model:
Linear Elastic
Property Name
Value
Stiffness 11 =
Stiffness 12 =
Stiffness 13 =
Stiffness 14 =
Stiffness 15 =
Stiffness 16 =
Stiffness 22 =
Stiffness 23 =
Stiffness 24 =
Stiffness 25 =
Stiffness 26 =
Stiffness 33 =
Stiffness 34 =
-Apply-
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Composite
The Composite forms provide alternate ways of defining the linear elastic properties of
materials. All the composite options, except for Laminated Composite, will always result in a
homogeneous elastic material in MSC.Nastran.
When the Laminated Composite option is used to create a material and this material is then
referenced in a Revised or Standard Laminate Plate element property region, a PCOMP entry
is created. However, if this material is referenced by a different type of element property region,
for example, Revised or Standard Homogeneous Plate, then the equivalent homogeneous
material properties are used instead of the laminate lay-up data. Only materials created through
the Laminated Composite option should be referenced by a Revised or Standard Laminate
Plate element property region. Refer to Composite Materials Construction (p. 72) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.
Laminated
form, Composite is the selected Object, and Laminate is the selected Method. Use this form to
define the laminate lay-up data for a composite material. If the resulting material is referenced
in a Revised or Standard Laminate Plate element property region, then an MSC . Nastran
PCOMP entry containing the lay-up data is written. If the resulting material is referenced by any
other type of element property region, the equivalent homogeneous properties of the material
are used.
Laminated Composite
Offset
Stacking Sequence Convention

Total
Stacking Sequence Definition: Select an Existing Material.
Material Name
Insert Material Names
Thickness
Text Entry Mode
Orientation
Delete Selected Rows
Insert
Material Names
Thicknesses
Orientations
Load Text Into Spreadsheet
Show Laminate Properties...
Clear Text and Data Boxes
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
2.7
Element Properties
The Element Properties form appears when the Element Properties toggle, located on the
MSC.Patran main form, is chosen.There are several option menus available when creating
element properties. The selections made on the Element Properties menu will determine which
element property form appears, and ultimately, which MSC .Nastran element will be created.
The following pages give an introduction to the Element Properties form, and details of all the
element property definitions supported by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference.
MSC.Patran

hp, 2
Element Properties Form

This form appears when Element Properties is selected on the main menu. There are four option
menus on this form. Each will determine which MSC. Nastran element type will be created and
which property forms will appear. The individual property forms are documented later in this
section. For a full description of this form, see Element Properties Forms (p. 41) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.
Element Properties
Action:
Create
Use this option menu to define the elements dimension.

The options are:
Dimension:
2D
0D (point elements)
Type:
Shell
1D (bar elements)
2D (tri and quad elements)
3D (tet, wedge, and hex elements)
Existing Property Sets
This option menu depends on the selection made in

the Dimension option menu. Use this menu to define
the general type of element, such as:
Mass Versus Grounded Spring
Property Set Name
Shell Versus 2D_Solid
Option (s):
Homogeneous
Standard Formulation
Input Properties...
Application Region
Select Members
Remove
Add
Application Region
Apply
These option menus may or may not be presented,

and their contents depend heavily on the selections
made in Dimension and Type. See Table 2-1 for
more help.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
The following table outlines the option menus when Analysis Type is set to Structural.
Table 2-1 Structural Options
Dimension
0D
Type
Mass
Option 1
Option 2
Coupled
Grounded
Lumped
Grounded Spring
Grounded Damper
Grounded Bush
1D
Beam
General Section
Standard
Curved w/General Section

Curved w/Pipe Section
Lumped Section
Tapered Section
Standard
P-element
Rod
General Section
Standard
Pipe Section
CONROD
Spring
Damper
Scalar
Viscous
Gap
1D Mass
PLOTEL
Scalar Bush
2D
Shell
Homogeneous
Standard
Revised
P-element
Laminate
Standard
Revised
Equivalent Section
Standard
Revised
P-element
Table 2-1 Structural Options

Dimension
2D
(continued)
Type
Bending Panel
Option 1
Option 2
Standard
Revised
P-element
2D-Solid
Axisymmetric
Plane Strain
Standard
Revised
P-Formulation
Hyperelastic
Formulation
Membrane
Standard
Revised
Shear Panel
3D
Solid
Standard
P-Formulation
Hyperelastic Formulation
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Coupled Point Mass (CONM1)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element
Properties form and the following options are chosen.
Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
0D
Mass
Coupled
Point/1
Use this form to create a CONM1 element. This defines a 6 x 6 symmetric mass matrix at a
geometric point of the structural model.
Input Properties
Coupled Point Mass (CONM1)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Mass Orientation
CID
Mass Component 1,1
Real Scalar
Mass Component 2,1
Real Scalar
Mass Component 2,2
Real Scalar
Mass Component 3,1
Real Scalar
Mass Component 3,2
Real Scalar
Defines the orientation of the 1-2-3

axes of the mass matrix. The value is
a reference to an existing coordinate
frame. The 1-2-3 axes will be aligned
with the X-Y-Z axes of the specified
coordinate system. If a non
rectangular coordinate system is
specified, the system will be
evaluated into a local rectangular
system, which is then used to orient
the mass matrix. This property is the
CID field on the CONM1 entry. This
property is optional.
OK
Defines the values of the mass matrix. These properties are the Mij fields on the
CONM1 entry and can either be real values or references to existing field definitions.
Each of these properties are optional; however, at least one must be defined.
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CONM1 element that were not shown on
the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.
Prop Name
Mass Component 3,3
Mass Component 4,1
Mass Component 4,2
Mass Component 4,4
Mass Component 5,1
Mass Component 5,2
Mass Component 5,3
Mass Component 5,4
Mass Component 5,5
Mass Component 6,1
Mass Component 6,2
Mass Component 6,3
Mass Component 6,4
Mass Component 6,5
Mass Component 6,6
Description
Defines the values of the mass matrix. These are the Mij fields on
the CONM1 entry. These properties can either be real values or
references to existing field definitions. Each of these properties
are optional; however, at least one must be defined.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Grounded Scalar Mass (CMASS1)

Action
Dimension Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
0D
Grounded
Point/1
Mass
Use this form to create a CMASS1 element and a PMASS property. This defines a scalar mass
element of the structural model. Only one node is used in this method, and the other node is
defined to be grounded.
Input Properties
Grounded Scalar Mass (CMASS1)
Property Name
Value
Mass
Value Type
Real Scalar
String
Dof at Node 1
Defines the translation mass or

rotational inertia value to be applied.
This is the M field on the PMASS entry.
This property can be either a real value
or a reference to an existing field
definition. This property is required.
Defines which degree of freedom this

value will be attached to. This property
can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ
and defines the setting for the C1 field on
the CMASS1 entry. This property is
required.
OK
Lumped Point Mass (CONM2)

Action
Dimension Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
0D
Lumped
Point/1
Mass
Use this form to create a CONM2 element. This defines a concentrated mass at a geometric point
of the structural model.
Defines an offset from the specified node to where the lumped mass actually is to exist in
the structural mode. This vector is defined in the Mass Orientation coordinate system.
Defines the X1, X2, and X3 fields on the CONM2 entry. This property is optional.
Input Properties
Lumped Point Mass (CONM2)
Property Name
Value
Mass
Value Type
Real Scalar
[Mass Orient. CID/CG]
CID
[Mass Offset]
Vector
[Inertia 1,1]
Real Scalar
[Inertia 2,1]
Real Scalar
[Inertia 2,2]
Real Scalar
OK
Defines the translational mass value

to be used. This is the M field on the
CONM2 entry. This property can
either be a real value or a reference to
an existing field definition. This
property is required.
Defines the orientation of the 1-2-3
axes of the mass matrix. This is a
reference to an existing coordinate
frame. The 1-2-3 axes will be aligned
with the X-Y-Z axes of the specified
coordinate system. If a nonrectangular
coordinate system is specified, the
system will be evaluated into a local
rectangular system, which is then used
to orient the mass matrix. This is the
CID field on the CONM2 entry. If the
Value Type is set to Vector then the
components of the vector define the
center of gravity of the mass in the
basic coordinate system and the field
for CID is translated as -1. This
Inertia i,j defines the rotation inertia properties of this lumped mass. These
properties are the Iij fields on the CONM2 record. These values can be
either real values or references to existing field definitions. These values
are optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CONM2 element that were not shown on
the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.
Prop Name
Inertia 3,1
Inertia 3,2
Inertia 3,3
Description
Inertia i,j defines the rotation inertia properties of this lumped
mass. These are the Iij fields on the CONM2 entry. These values
can be either real values or references to existing field definitions.
These values are optional.
Grounded Scalar Spring (CELAS1)

Properties form when the following options are chosen.
Action
Dimension Type
Create
0D
Option(s)
Grounded Spring
Topologies
Point/1
Use this form to create a CELAS1 element and a PELAS property. This defines a scalar spring
element of the structural model. Only one node is used in this method. The other node is defined
to be grounded.
Defines the coefficient to be used for this spring. This is the K field on the
PELAS entry. This can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field
Input Properties
Grounded Scalar Spring (CELAS1)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Spring Constant
Real Scalar
[Damping Coefficient]
Real Scalar
[Stress Coefficient]
Real Scalar
String
Dof at Node 1
Defines what damping is to be included.

This is the GE field on the PELAS entry.
This property can either be a real value or a
reference to an existing field definition. This
Defines the relationship between the spring

deflection and the stresses within the
spring. This property is the S field on the
PELAS entry and can either be a real value,
or a reference to an existing field definition.
This property is optional.
OK
Defines which degree of freedom this value is to be attached to. This can be set to
UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ. This property defines the setting of the C1 field on the
CELAS1 entry. This property is required.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Grounded Scalar Damper (CDAMP1)

Properties form when the following options are chosen.
Action
Dimension Type
Create
0D
Option(s)
Grounded Damper
Topologies
Point/1
Use this form to create a CDAMP1 element and a PDAMP property. This defines a scalar damper
element of the structural model. Only one node is used in this method. The other node is defined
to be grounded.
Input Properties
Grounded Scalar Damper (CDAMP1)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Real Scalar
Defines the force per unit velocity value

to be used. This property is the B field on
the PDAMP entry and can either be a
real value or a reference to an existing
field definition. This property is optional.
String
Dof at Node 1

value is to be attached to. This property
can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RY, or RZ and
defines the setting for the C1 field on the
CDAMP1 entry. This property is required.
OK
Bush
Action
Dimension
Type
Create
1D
Bush
Option(s)
Topologies
Bar/2
Input Properties
Bush Joint
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Vector
[Bush Orientation]
[Offset Location]
Real Scalar
[Offset Orientation Sys]
CID
Vector
[Offset Orientation Vec]

[Spring Constant 1]
Real Scalar
[Spring constant 2]
Real Scalar
Field Definitions
OK
This toggle can also be set

to Node Id or CID.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form
to view these properties.
Prop Name
Description
Bush Orientation System
CID specifies the Grounded Bush Orientation System. The

element X,Y, and Z axes are aligned with the coordinate
system principal axes. If the CID is for a cylindrical or
spherical coordinate system, the grid point specified locates
the system. If CID = 0, the basic coordinate system is used.
Spring Constant 1
Spring Constant 2
Spring Constant 3
Spring Constant 4
Spring Constant 5
Spring Constant 6
Stiff. Freq Depend 1
Defines the stiffness associated with a particular degree of

freedom. This property is defined in terms of force per unit
displacement and can be either a real value or a reference to
an existing field definition for defining stiffness vs. frequency.
Stiff. Force/Disp 1
Stiff. Force/Disp 2
Stiff. Force/Disp 3
Stiff. Force/Disp 4
Stiff. Force/Disp 5
Stiff. Force/Disp 6
Defines the nonlinear force/displacement curves for each

degree of freedom of the spring-damper system.
Damping Coefficient 1
Damp. Freq Depend 1
Damp. Freq Depend 2
Damp. Freq Depend 3
Damp. Freq Depend 4
Damp. Freq Depend 5
Damp. Freq Depend 6
Defines the force per velocity damping value for each degree
of freedom. This property can be either a real value or a
reference to an existing field definition for defining damping
vs. frequency
Structural Damping
Struc. Damp Freq Depend
Defines the non-dimensional structural damping coefficient

(GE1). This property can be either a real value, or a reference
to an existing field definition for defining damping vs.
frequency.
Prop Name
Description
Stress Recovery Translation

Stress Recovery Rotation
Stress recovery coefficients. The element stress are computed

by multiplying the stress coefficients with the recovered
element forces.
Strain Recovery Translation

Strain Recovery Rotation
Strain Recovery Coefficients. The element strains are

computed by multiplying the strain coefficients with the
recovered element strains.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
General Section Beam (CBAR)

Action
Dimension Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
1D
General Section
Bar/2
Beam
Use this form to create a CBAR element and a PBAR or PBARL property. A CBARAO entry will be
generated if any Station Distances are specified. This defines a simple beam element in the
structural model.
Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-sectional properties. This
orientation will define the local XY plane, where the x-axis is along the beam. The orientation vector
can be defined as either a vector or a reference to an existing node in the XY plane. This orientation
defines the value for the X1, X2, X3, or G0 fields on the CBAR entry. This property is required.
Input Properties
General Section Beam (CBAR)
Property Name
Value
Mat Prop Name
Material Name
[Section Name]
Value Type
Properties
na:
Bar Orientation
Vector
[Offset @ Node 1]
Vector
[Offset @ Node 2]
Vector
[Pinned DOFs @ Node 1]
String
String
Material Property Sets
Create Sections
Beam Library
Associate Beam Section
OK
If the Section Name Value Type is set to Properties, you can use
this toggle to choose between defining the section properties
manually (i.e., specifying the A, I11, I22, etc.) or by using the
beam library to define the section. If the Section Name Value Type
is set to Dimensions, this will be toggled ON automatically and will
not be user selectable. The toggle does NOT affect the creation of
a PBAR vs. PBARL or a PBEAM vs. PBEAML. The graphical
display of the bar/beam section can be displayed/controlled using
the Display/Load/BC/Elem Properties Menu.
Defines the material to be used. A list of all

materials currently in the database is displayed
when data is entered. Either select from the list
using the mouse, or type in the name. This property
defines the value to be used in the MID field on the
PBAR entry. This property is required.
Allows a beam section previously created using the
beam library to be selected. When a beam section
is chosen and the Associate Beam Section option is
toggled, the cross sectional properties need not be
input on this Input Properties form.
Allows a user to define a bar/beam section either by
Dimensions (PBARL/PBEAML) or by Properties
(PBAR/PBEAM). If Dimensions is choosen, the
MSC.Nastrans built-in section library (Version 69
and later), PBARL/PBEAML, will be used to define
the bar/beam. If Properties is chosen, the standard
bar/beam properties, PBAR/PBEAM will be used to
define the beam section. If the Dimensions Option is
set to Dimensions, the Translation Parameters
Version must be set to version 69 or later.
Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual
centroids of the beam cross section. These
orientations are defined as vectors. These
properties, after any necessary transformations,
become the W1A, W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and
W3B fields on the CBAR entry. On the CBAR entry,
these values are always in the displacement
coordinate system of the node. In MSC.Patran,
they are either global, or in a system specified such
as <0 1 0 Coord 5>. These properties are optional.
Activates the Beam Library forms. These forms
will allow the user to define beam properties by
choosing a standard cross section type and
inputing dimensions.
These degrees of freedom are in the element local coordinate system. Values that can be specified are UX, UY, UZ, RX,
RY, RZ, or any combination. These properties are used to remove connections between the node and selected degrees of
freedom at the two ends of the beam. This option is commonly used to create a pin connection by specifying RX, RY, and
RZ to be released. Defines the setting of the PA and PB fields on the CBAR record. These properties are optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBAR element and a PBAR or PBARL
property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input
Properties form to view these properties.
Prop Name
Description
Area
Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field on

the PBAR entry. This value can be either real values or a reference to
an existing field definition. This property is required.
Inertia 1,1
Inertia 2,2
Inertia 2,1
Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section.

These are the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBAR entry. These values
Torsional Constant
Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the
PBAR entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an
existing field definition. This property is optional.
Shear Stiff, Y
Shear Stiff, Z
Defines the shear stiffness values. These are the K1 and K2 fields on
the PBAR entry. These values can be either real value or references
to existing field definitions. This property is optional.
Nonstructural Mass
Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of
the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the
beam. This is the NSM field on the PBAR entry. This value can be
either a real value or reference to an existing field definition. This
Y of Point C
Z of Point C
X of Point D
Y of Point D
X of Point E
Y of Point E
X of Point F
Y of Point F
Indicates the stress recovery. They define the Y and Z coordinates of

the stress recovery points across the section of the beam, as defined
in the local element coordinate system. These are the C1, C2, D1, D2,
E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBAR entry. These values can be
either real values or references to existing field definitions. These
properties are optional.
Station Distances
Defines up to 6 points along each bar element. Values specified are

fractions of the beam length. Therefore, these values are in the range
of 0. to 1. This defines the X1 and X6 fields on the CBARAO entry.
The SCALE field on the CBARAO entry is always set to FR. The
alternate format for the CBARAO entry is not supported. These
values are real values. These properties are optional.
P-Formulation General Beam (CBEAM)

Action
Dimension Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
1D
General Section
P-Formulation
Bar/2, Bar/3
Bar/4
Beam
Use this form to create a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML property. This form defines
a simple beam element in the structural model for an adaptive, p-element analysis.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-sectional properties. This
orientation will define the local XY plane, where the x-axis is along the beam, and this orientation
vector, which can be defined as either a vector or a reference to an existing node, is in the XY plane.
This defines the value for the X1, X2, X3, or G0 fields on the CBAR entry. This property is required.
materials currently in the database is displayed
when data is entered. Either select from the list
using the mouse, or type in the name. This
property defines the value to be used in the MID
field on the PBAR entry. This property is required.
Input Properties
P-Formulation General Beam (CBEAM)
Property Name
Value
Mat Prop Name
Material Name
[Section Name]
Value Type
Allows a beam section previously created using the

beam library to be selected. When a beam section
is chosen and the Associate Beam Section option
is toggled, the cross sectional properties need not
be input on this Input Properties form.
Properties
na:
Bar Orientation
Vector
[Offset @ Node 1]
Vector
[Offset @ Node 2]
Vector
String
String
Allows a user to define a bar/beam section either

by Dimensions (PBARL/PBEAML) or by
Properties (PBAR/PBEAM). If Dimensions is
choosen, the MSC.Nastrans built-in section library
(Version 69 and later), PBARL/PBEAML, will be
used to define the bar/beam. If Properties is
chosen, the standard bar/beam properties,
PBAR/PBEAM will be used to define the beam
section. If the Dimensions Option is set to
Dimensions, the Translation Parameters Version
must be set to version 69 or later.
Create Sections
Beam Library
OK
If the Section Name Value Type is set to Properties, you can

use this toggle to choose between defining the section
properties manually (i.e., specifying the A, I11, I22, etc.) or by
using the beam library to define the section. If the Section
Name Value Type is set to Dimensions, this will be toggled ON
automatically and will not be user selectable. The toggle does
NOT affect the creation of a PBAR vs. PBARL or a PBEAM
vs. PBEAML. The graphical display of the bar/beam section
can be displayed/controlled using the Display/Load/BC/Elem
Properties Menu.

orientations are defined as vectors. These
properties, after any necessary transformations,
become the W1A, W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and
W3B fields on the CBEAM entry. On the CBEAM
entry, these values are always in the displacement
coordinate system of the node. In MSC.Patran,
they are either global, or in a system specified such
as <0 1 0 Coord 5>. These properties are optional.
Activates the Beam Library forms. These forms will

allow the user to define beam properties by choosing a
standard cross section type and inputting dimensions.
These degrees of freedom are in the element local coordinate system. The values that can be specified are UX, UY, UZ,
RX, RY, RZ, or any combination. These properties are used to remove connections between the node and select degrees
of freedom at the two ends of the beam. This option is commonly used to create a pin connection by specifying RX, RY,
and RZ to be released. It also defines the setting of the PA and PB fields on the CBAR entry. These properties are optional.
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or
PBEAML property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the
Input Properties form to view these properties.
Prop Name
Description
Area

the PBEAM entry. This value can be either real values or a reference
to an existing field definition. This property is required.
Inertia 1,1
Inertia 2,2
Inertia 2,1

These are the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values
Torsional Constant
PBEAM entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to
an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Shear Stiff, Y
Shear Stiff, Z
the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or
references to existing field definitions. This property is optional.
Nonstructural Mass
beam. This is the NSM field on the PBEAM entry. This value can be
either a real value or reference to an existing field definition. This
Y of Point C
Z of Point C
X of Point D
Y of Point D
X of Point E
Y of Point E
X of Point F
Y of Point F
Indicates the stress recovery. Define the Y and Z coordinates of the

stress recovery points across the section of the beam as defined in
the local element coordinate system. These are the C1, C2, D1, D2,
E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be
Station Distances
Defines up to 6 points along each bar element. Values specified are

fractions of the beam length. Therefore, these values are in the range
of 0. to 1. This defines the X1 and X6 fields on the CBARAO entry.
The SCALE field on the CBARAO entry is always set to FR. The
alternate format for the CBARAO records is not supported. These
values are real values. These properties are optional.
Starting P-orders and

Maximum P-orders
Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements.

Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions
defined by the P-order Coordinate System (default elemental).
Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive
analysis process will limit the polynomial orders to the values
specified in Maximum P-orders. These are the Polyi fields on the
PVAL entry.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Prop Name
P-order Coord. System
Description
The two sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this
coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the
CID field on the PVAL entry.
Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error
analysis. This is the ERREST field in the ADAPT entry.
P-order Adaptivity
Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive

cycle to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry.
Error Tolerance
The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete.

By default, equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT
entry.
Curved General Section Beam (CBEND)

Action
Dimension Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
1D
Curved w/General Section
Bar/2
Beam
Use this form to create a CBEND element and a PBEND property. This form defines a curved beam
element of the structural model. The CBEND element has several ways to define the radius of
the bend and the orientation of that curvature.This element in MSC.Patran always uses the
method of defining the center of curvature point (GEOM=1). An alternate property of the
Curved Pipe element also exists.
Input Properties
Curved General Sec. Beam (CBEND)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Material Name
Mat Prop Name
Center of Curvature
Vector
[Radial Bar Offset]
Real Scalar
[Axial Bar Offset]
Real Scalar
Area
Real Scalar
OK
Defines the center of curvature of the pipe bend. It is done by

either specifying a vector from the first node of the element or by
referencing a node. The CBEND element in MSC.Nastran has
several ways to define the radius of the pipe bend and the
orientation of that curvature. This defines the settings of the X1,
X2, X3, and G0 fields of the CBEND entry. This property is
required.

materials currently in the database is
displayed when data is entered. Either select
from the list using the mouse, or type in the
name. This property defines the setting of the
MID field on the PBEND entry.This property
is required.
Defines the offset from the nodes to the

actual centroids of the beam cross section.
These properties define the settings of the
RC and ZC fields on the PBEND entry.
These values can either be real values or
references to existing field definitions. This
Defines the cross-sectional area of the

element. This property is the A field on the
PBEND entry. This value can be either a
real value or a reference to an existing field
definition. This property is optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEND element and a PBEND property that
were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to
view these properties.
Prop Name
Description
Inertia 1,1
Inertia 2,2

These properties are the I1 and I2 fields on the PBEND entry. These
values can either be real values or references to existing field
definitions. These values are optional.
Torsional Constant
PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value, or a reference to
an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Shear Stiff, R
Shear Stiff, Z
Defines the shear stiffness values. These properties are the K1 and K2
fields on the PBEND entry. These values can be either real values or
references to existing field definitions. This property is optional.
Nonstructural Mass
the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit
length of the beam and is the NSM field on the PBEND entry. This
value can be either real value or a reference to an existing field
Radial NA Offset
Defines the radial offset of the geometric centroid from the end
nodes. Positive values move the centroid of the section towards the
center of curvature of the pipe bend. This property is the DELTAN
field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value or a
reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
R of Point C
Z of Point C
R of Point D
Z of Point D
R of Point E
Z of Point E
R of Point F
These properties are for stress recovery. They define the R and Z
coordinates of the stress recovery points across the section of the
beam, as defined in the local element coordinate system. These
properties are the C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 and F2 fields on the
PBEND entry. These values can be either real values or references to
existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Z of Point F
Curved Pipe Section Beam (CBEND)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
1D
Beam
Curved W/Pipe Section
Bar/2
Use this form to create a CBEND element and a PBEND property. This defines a curved pipe or
elbow element of the structural model. The internal pressure is defined as part of the element
definition because, for pipe elbows, the internal pressure affects the element stiffness.
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is
entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. Defines the MID field on the
PBEND entry. This property is required.
Input Properties
Curved Pipe Section Beam (CBEND)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Material Name
Mat Prop Name
Center of Curvature
Vector
[Radial Bar Offset]
Real Scalar
[Axial Bar Offset]
Real Scalar
Mean Pipe Radius
Real Scalar
Pipe Thickness
Real Scalar
Defines the center of curvature of the pipe

bend. This can be done either by specifying
a vector from the first node of the element
or by referencing a node. The CBEND
element in MSC.Nastran has several ways
to define the radius of the pipe bend and
the orientation of that curvature. Defines
the settings of the X1, X2, X3, and G0
fields on the CBEND entry. This element in
MSC.Patran always uses the method of
defining the center of curvature point
(GEOM=1). This value is required.
Indicates the wall thickness of the pipe. This

is the t field on the PBEND entry. This value
can be either a real value or a reference to
an existing field definition. This property is
required.
OK
Indicates the distance from the centroid of the pipe cross section to mid-wall location. This is
the r field on the PBEND entry. This value can either be a real value or a reference to an
existing field definition. This property is required.
Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the pipe cross
section. These are the RC and ZC fields on the PBEND entry. These values can
either be real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties
are optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEND element and a PBEND property
that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form
Prop Name
Description
Internal Pipe Pressure
Indicates the static pressure inside the pipe elbow. This is the P
field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value or a
Nonstructural Mass
Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material
of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit
length of the beam and is the NSM field on the PBEND entry. This
value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field
Stress Intensification
Indicates the desired type of stress intensification to be used. This

is a character string value. This property is the FSI field on the
PBEND entry. Valid settings of this parameter are General,
ASME, and Welding Council.
Lumped Area Beam (CBEAM/PBCOMP)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
1D
Beam
Lumped Section
Bar/2
Use this form to create a CBEAM element and a PBCOMP property. This defines a beam element
of constant cross section, using a lumped area element formulation.
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is
entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This defines the setting of the MID
field on the PBCOMP entry. This property is required.
Input Properties
Lumped Area Beam (CBEAM/PBCOMP)
Property Name
Value
Material Name
Value Type
Mat Prop Name
Vector
Bar Orientation
[Offset @ Node 1]
Vector
[Offset @ Node 2]
Vector
String
String
OK
Defines the local element coordinate

system to be used for any crosssectional properties. This orientation
defines the local XY plane, where
the X-axis is along the beam, and
this orientation vector is in the XY
plane. This orientation vector can be
defined either as a vector or as a
reference to an existing node and
defines the setting of the X1, X2, X3,
and G0 fields on the CBEAM entry.
This property is required.
Defines the offset from the nodes to

the actual centroids of the beam
cross section. These orientations are
defined as vectors. These properties,
after any necessary transformations,
become the W1A, W2A, W3A, W1B,
W2B, and W3B fields on the CBEAM
entry. On the CBEAM entry, these
values are always in the
displacement coordinate system of
the node. In MSC.Patran, they are
either global, or in a system specified
such as <0 1 0 Coord 5>. These
Indicates whether certain degrees of freedom are to be released. By default,

all degrees of freedom can transfer forces at the ends of beams. By releasing
specified degrees of freedom, pin or sliding type connections can be created.
These degrees-of-freedom are in the element local coordinate system. The
values that can be specified here are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ, or a
combination. These properties define the settings of the PA and PB fields on
the CBEAM entry and are optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEND element and a PBCOMP property
that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form
Prop Name
Description
Warp DOF @ Node 1

Warp DOF @ Node 2
Defines a node ID where the warping degree-of-freedom constraints

and results will be placed. These must reference existing nodes
within the model. They are the SA and SB fields on the CBEAM entry.
These properties are optional.
Area

the PBCOMP entry. This value can be either a real value or a
Nonstructural Mass
beam. This is the NSM field on the PBCOMP record. This value can
be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition.
Shear Stiff, Y
Shear Stiff, Z
the PBCOMP entry. This value can be either a real value or a
Y of NSM
Z of NSM
Defines the offset from the centroid of the cross section to the
location of the nonstructural mass. These values are measured in the
beam cross-section coordinate system. These properties are the M1
and M2 fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values can be either real
values or references to existing field definitions. These properties
are optional.
Symmetry Option
Specifies which type of symmetry is being used to define the

lumped areas of the beam cross section. This is a character string
parameter. The valid settings are No Symmetry, YZ Symmetry, Y
Symmetry, Z Symmetry, or Y=Z Symmetry. This defines the setting
of the SECTION field on the PBCOMP entry. This property is
optional.
Ys of Lumped Areas
Defines the locations of the various lumped areas. These are defined
in the cross-sectional coordinate system. These properties define the
Yi and Zi fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values are lists of real
values. These properties are optional.
Zs of Lumped Areas
Area Factors
Defines the Fraction of the total area to be included in this lumped

area. The sum of all area factors for a given section must equal 1.0. If
the data provided does not meet this requirement, the values will all
be scaled to the corrected value. These properties define the values
for the Ci fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values are lists of real
values. These properties are optional.
Tapered Beam (CBEAM)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
1D
Beam
Tapered
Bar/2
Use this form to create a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML property. This defines a beam
element with varying cross sections.
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when
data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property
defines the setting of the MID field on the PBEAM entry. This property is required.
Input Properties
Tapered Beam ( CBEAM )
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Material Name
Mat Prop Name
[Section Name]
Section Name
na:
Bar Orientation

orientations are defined as vectors. These properties,
after any necessary transformations, become the
W1A, W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the
CBEAM entry. On the CBEAM entry, these values are
always in the displacement coordinate system of the
node. In MSC.Patran, they are either global, or in a
system specified such as <0 1 0 Coord 5>. These
Vector
[Offset @ Node 1]
Vector
[Offset @ Node 2]
Vector
String
String
Create Sections
Beam Library
Use Beam Section
OK
Defines the local element coordinate system to be

used for any cross-sectional properties. This
orientation will define the local XY plane, where the
X-axis is along the beam, and this orientation vector
is in the XY plane. This orientation vector can be
defined either as a vector or as a reference to an
existing node. This orientation defines the setting of
the X1, X2, X3, and G0 fields on the CBEAM entry.
This databox allows a beam section previously

created using the beam library to be selected. When
a beam section is chosen and the Use Beam Section
option is toggled, the cross sectional properties need
not be input on this Input Properties form.
Indicates whether certain degrees of freedom are to

be released. By default, all degrees of freedom can
transfer forces at the ends of beams. Pin or sliding
type connections can be created by releasing
specified degrees of freedom. These degrees of
freedom are in the element local coordinate system.
The values specified here are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY,
RZ, or a combination. These properties define the
settings of the PA and PB fields on the CBEAM entry.
Selecting this icon will activate the Beam Library
forms. These forms will allow the user to define
beam properties by choosing a standard cross
section type and inputting dimensions.
If the Use Beam Section toggle is ON, a PBEAML entry is

created. This entry is only supported in MSC. Nastran
Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC.Nastran Version in
the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
PBEAML property element that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on
the Input Properties form to view these properties.
Prop Name
Description
Warp DOF @ Node 1

Warp DOF @ Node 2
Defines a node ID where the warping degree of freedom constraints

and results will be placed. These must reference existing nodes
within the model. These are the SA and SB fields on the CBEAM
entry. These properties are optional.
Station Distances
Defines stations along each beam element where the section

properties will be defined. The values specified here are fractions of
the beam length. These values, therefore, are in the range of 0. to 1.
These values define the settings of the X/XB fields on the PBEAM
record. These values are real values. These properties are optional.
Cross-Sect. Areas
Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This property

defines the settings of the A fields on the PBEAM record. This value
can be either a real value, or reference to an existing field definition.
Inertias 1,1
Inertias 2,2
Inertias 1,2

These defines the settings of the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBEAM
entry. These values are real values. These properties are optional.
Torsional Constants
Defines the torsional stiffness parameters. This property defines the

J fields on the PBEAM entry. This is a list of real values, one for each
station location. This property is optional.
Ys of C Points
Zs of C Points
Ys of D points
Zs of D Points
Ys of E Points
Zs of E Points
Ys of F Points
Defines the Y and Z locations in element coordinates, relative to the

shear center for stress data recovery. These define the C1, C2, D1,
D2, E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These are lists of
real values, one for each station location. These properties are
optional.
Zs of F Points
Nonstructural Masses
Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material
of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of
the beam. This property is the NSM field on the PBEAM entry. This
is a list of real values, one for each station location. This property is
optional.
NSM Inertia @ Node 1

Specified the nonstructural mass moments of inertia per unit length

about the nonstructural mass center of gravity at each end of the
element. These properties are the NSI(A) and NSI(B) fields on the
PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to
existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Prop Name
Description
Y of NSM @ Node 1
Z of NSM @ Node 1
Y of NSM @ Node 2
Z of NSM @ Node 2
beam cross-section coordinate system. These are the M1(A), M2(A),
M1(B), and M2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be
Shear Stiff, Y
Shear Stiff, Z
fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or
references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Shear Relief Y
Shear Relief Z
Defines the shear relief coefficients due to taper. These are the S1 and
S2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can either be real values
or references to existing field definitions. These properties are
optional.
Warp Coeff. @ Node 1

Specifies the warping coefficient at each end of the element. These

properties are the CW(A) and CW(B) fields on the PBEAM entry.
These values can be either real values or references to existing field
definitions. These properties are optional.
Y of NA @ Node 1
Z of NA @ Node 1
Y of NA @ Node 2
Z of NA @ Node 2
location of the neutral axis. These values are measured in the beam
cross section coordinate system and are the N1(A), N2(A), N1(B), and
N2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real
are optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
General Section (CBEAM)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Create
1D
Beam
General Section (CBEAM)
This set of options provides a method of creating beam models with warping due to torsion. The
capabilities of this beam properties formulation option are similar to those of the Tapered
Section formulation, except that warping due to torsion is handled more conveniently.
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when
data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property
defines the setting of the MID field on the PBEAM entry. This property is required.
Input Properties
General Section( CBEAM )
Property Name
Value
Mat Prop Name
Material Name
[Section Name]
Value Type
na:
Bar Orientation
Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual shear

centers of the beam cross section. These offsets are
defined as vectors. These properties, after any
necessary transformations, become the W1A, W2A,
W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBEAM
entry. On the CBEAM entry, these values are always
in the displacement coordinate system of the node. In
MSC.Patran, they are either global, or in a system
specified such as <0 1 0 Coord 5>. These properties
are optional.
Properties
Vector
[Offset @ Node 1]
Vector
[Offset @ Node 2]
Vector
String
String
Create Sections
Beam Library
OK
Defines the local element coordinate system to be

used for any cross-sectional properties. This
orientation will define the local XY plane, where the
X-axis is along the beam, and this orientation vector
is in the XY plane. This orientation vector can be
defined either as a vector or as a reference to an
existing node. This orientation defines the setting of
the X1, X2, X3, and G0 fields on the CBEAM entry.
This databox allows a beam section previously

created using the beam library to be selected. When
a beam section is chosen and the Use Beam Section
option is toggled, the cross sectional properties need
not be input on this Input Properties form.
Indicates whether certain degrees of freedom are to

be released. By default, all degrees of freedom can
transfer forces at the ends of beams. Pin or sliding
type connections can be created by releasing
specified degrees of freedom. These degrees of
freedom are in the element local coordinate system.
The values specified here are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY,
RZ, or a combination. These properties define the
settings of the PA and PB fields on the CBEAM entry.
Selecting this icon will activate the Beam Library
forms. These forms will allow the user to define
beam properties by choosing a standard cross
section type and inputting dimensions.
If the Use Beam Section toggle is ON, a PBEAML entry is

created. This entry is only supported in MSC. Nastran
Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC.Nastran Version in
the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69 or later.
Warping due to torsion is enabled by generating MSC.Nastran SPOINTs to contain the warping
degrees of freedom. These SPOINTs are not actually present in the MSC.Patran database, and
there is no way to recover any results for these SPOINTs. They are created during analysis deck
translation, and provide the means to communicate to MSC.Nastran the continuity and
constraint properties of the warping degrees of freedom in the model. These attributes of
continuity and constraint are implied in the MSC.Patran database through the composition of
the element properties application region and the set of options selected. These continuity and
constraint attributes apply to both warping SPOINTs and end release flags. This connection of
these attributes to the composition of the application region is new in MSC.Patran 2001r3, and
represents a change in behavior from previous versions of MSC.Patran. The general rules of
implied continuity are as follows.
1. Within the application region, two beam elements are taken to be continuous if a
GRID ID at an end of one of the beam elements matches a GRID ID at one of the ends
of the other beam element. If a third beam element in the same application region also
contains the same GRID ID, it is assumed that none of the beam elements is continuous
at this location. This condition is known as a multiple junction. Similarly, if none of
the other beam elements in the application region contain a matching GRID ID, the
corresponding end of the beam element is taken to be not continuous. This condition
is known as an unmatched end.
2. If warping is enabled, then all instances of beam element continuity must have the
matching GRID ID located at End A of one of the beam elements and at End B of
the other. End A and End B positions are determined by the order of GRID IDs
specified in the element connectivity array, and the positive direction of the x-axis of
the element coordinate system points from End A to End B. If warping is not
enabled, this restiction does not apply. If warping is enabled, any violation of this
requirement will result in a failure to complete the translation of the finite element
model. In this event, the user will have to reverse the direction of the improperly
oriented beam elements and initiate the translation again.
3. When warping is enabled, all positions of beam element continuity within an
application region will be represented by a single SPOINT at each of these positions,
which will be generated at the time of analysis deck translation and will appear on the
CBEAM cards for the appropriate end of both of the beam elements that are continuous
at each location. If any end release codes have been prescribed for the application
region, they will not be applied at locations of beam element continuity. This is new
for MSC.Patran 2001r3. For earlier versions of MSC.Patran, end release codes would
be applied to all elements of the application region, regardless of continuity.
4. When warping is enabled, individual SPOINTs are generated for all beam ends that are
not continuous. This applies to both multiple junctions and unmatched ends.
5. The specified end release codes are applied to all discontinuous beam element ends in
the application region, whether multiple junction or unmatched end, with the
applied end release codes dependent on what has been prescribed for End A and
End B for the application region. If no end release codes have been prescribed for the
application region, none are generated.
6. When warping is enabled, and for unmatched ends only (not multiple junctions),
constraints applied to the SPOINTs are specified by the warping option specified in
the element properties form. For example, if A free B fixed has been selected and the
unmatched end is End A of its beam element, it will not be constrained. If it is
End B of its element, it will be constrained. The warping SPOINT for a beam element
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
end involved in a multiple junction will not be constrained under any circumstances.
If the user wishes to constrain warping for a beam element involved in a multiple
junction, he will have to do so by splitting the application region in such a way that the
beam element end becomes an unmatched end within its new application region.
7. Warping is considered to be enabled when a value has been specified for the warping
coefficient at either end of the beam element. When the user selects the Beam Library
option, values for the warping coefficient get computed autamatically, and thus
warping is implicitly enabled. If the user wishes to disable warping while using the
Beam Library option, he must choose None as his Warping Option on the Input
Properties ... form.
PBEAML element property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on
the Input Properties form to view these properties.
Prop Name
Description
Warping Option
This specifies how contraints should be applied to the warping

SPOINTs of unmatched ends within the application region (see
continuity rules above). The choices available include
A free B free, A fixed B fixed, A free B fixed, A fixed B free,
or None. The choice of None is used to disable warping
altogether for the current element property set, in which case no
SPOINTs will be generated or constrained. Only unmatched ends
within the application region will be eligible for constraining, and
whether or not a constraint is applied will depend on the option
selected, and whether the unmatched end is End A or End B of
its beam element. If no selection is made for this element property,
A free B free is selected by default.

Specifies the warping coefficient at each end of the element. These

properties are the CW(A) and CW(B) fields on the PBEAM entry.
These values can be either real values or references to existing field
definitions. These properties are optional.
Station Distances
Defines stations along each beam element where the section

properties will be defined. The values specified here are fractions of
the beam length. These values, therefore, are in the range of 0. to 1.
These values define the settings of the X/XB fields on the PBEAM
record. This field consists of a set of real values separated by legal
delimiters, such as white space and/or commas. If this list is
entered, then the properties that follow may also be in the form of
lists consisting of the same number of values. If they are in the form
of a single real value, then that value will apply to all stations of the
beam element. This property is optional. If it is not provided, then
all other specified section properties apply to the entire beam, and
lists of values will not be accepted.
Cross-Sect. Areas
Defines the cross sectional area of the element. This property defines
the settings of the A fields on the PBEAM record. This value can be
either a real value, a list (if a list of stations has been provided), or a
reference to an existing field definition, in which case a single real
value will be evaluated for each element of the application region.
Inertias 1,1
Inertias 2,2
Inertias 1,2

These values define the settings of the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the
PBEAM entry. These values are single real values that apply to the
entire beam, or a list of real values if a list of stations has been
provided. These properties are optional. If they are not provided,
values of 0 will be assumed.
Torsional Constants
Defines the torsional stiffness parameters. This property defines the

J fields on the PBEAM entry. This value is a single real value that
applies to the entire beam, or a list of real values if a list of stations
has been provided. This property is optional. If it is not provided, a
value of 0 will be assumed.
Ys of C Points
Zs of C Points
Ys of D Points
Zs of D Points
Ys of E Points
Zs of E Points
Ys of F Points
Zs of F Points
Defines the Y and Z locations in element coordinates, relative to the

shear center, for stress data recovery. These define the C1, C2, D1,
D2, E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values are
single real values that apply to the entire beam, or lists of real values
if a list of stations has been provided. These properties are optional.
If they are not provided, values of 0 will be assumed.
Nonstructural Masses
Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material
of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the
beam. This property is the NSM field on the PBEAM entry. This
value is a single real value that applies to the entire beam, or a list of
real values if a list of stations has been provided. This property is
optional. If it is not provided, a value of 0 will be assumed.

Specifies the nonstructural mass moments of inertia per unit length

about the nonstructural mass center of gravity at each end of the
element. These properties are the NSI(A) and NSI(B) fields on the
PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references
to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Y of NSM @ Node 1
Z of NSM @ Node 1
Y of NSM @ Node 2
Z of NSM @ Node 2
Defines the offset from the shear center of the cross section to the
beam cross-section coordinate system. These are the M1(A), M2(A),
M1(B), and M2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be
Shear Stiff, Y
Shear Stiff, Z
fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or
references to existing field definitions. These properties are
optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Shear Relief Y
Shear Relief Z
Defines the shear relief coefficients due to taper. These are the S1 and
S2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can either be real values
or references to existing field definitions. These properties are
optional.
Y of NA @ Node 1
Z of NA @ Node 1
Y of NA @ Node 2
Z of NA @ Node 2
Defines the offset from the shear center of the cross section to the
location of the neutral axis. These values are measured in the beam
cross-section coordinate system. These are the N1(A), N2(A), N1(B),
and N2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real
are optional.
General Section Rod (CROD)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
1D
Rod
General Section
Standard
Bar/2
Use this form to create a CROD element and a PROD property. This defines a tensioncompression-torsion element of the structural model.
the PROD entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to
an existing field definition. This property is required.
Input Properties
General Section Rod (CROD)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Material Name
Mat Prop Name
Area
Real Scalar
[Torsional Constant]
Real Scalar
[Tors. Stress Coeff.]
Real Scalar
[Nonstructural Mass]
Real Scalar
Defines the material to be used. A list

of all materials currently in the
database is displayed when data is
entered. Either select from the list
using the mouse or type in the name.
This defines the setting of the MID field
on the PROD entry. This property is
required.
Defines mass not included in the mass

derived from the material of the
element. This property is defined in
terms of mass per unit length of the
beam. This is the NSM field on the
PROD entry. This value can be either a
OK
Defines the coefficient to determine the torsional stress. This is the C field on the
PROD entry. This property can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field
Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the PROD entry.
This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
General Section Rod (CONROD)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
1D
Rod
General Section
CONROD
Bar/2
Use this form to create a CONROD element. This defines a tension-compression-torsion element
of the structural model.
Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is
displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in
the name. This defines the setting of the MID field on the CONROD entry. This
Input Properties
General Section Rod (CONROD)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Material Name
Mat Prop Name
Area
Real Scalar
[Torsional Constant]
Real Scalar
[Tors. Stress Coeff.]
Real Scalar
Real Scalar
OK
Defines the cross-sectional area of the

element. This property is the A field on
the CONROD entry. This value can be
either a real value or a reference to an
existing field definition. This property is
required.

beam and is the NSM field on the
CONROD entry. This value can be
optional.
Defines the coefficient to determine the torsional stress. This property is the C field on
the CONROD entry and can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field
Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This property is the J field on the
CONROD entry. This value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field
Pipe Section Rod (CTUBE)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
1D
Rod
Pipe Section
Bar/2
Use this form to create a CTUBE element and a PTUBE property. This defines a tensioncompression-torsion element with a thin-walled tube cross section.
Defines the tube outer diameters at each end of the element. These are the OD
and OD2 fields on the PTUBE entry. These values can either be real values or
references to existing field definitions. The outer diameter at Node 1 property is
required. The outer diameter at Node 2 Property is optional.
Input Properties
Pipe Section Rod (CTUBE)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Material Name
Mat Prop Name
Outer Diameter @ Node
Real Scalar
[Outer Diam. @ Node 2]
Real Scalar
Pipe Thickness
Real Scalar
Real Scalar

entered. This property defines the
setting of the MID field on the PTUBE
entry. Either select from the list using
the mouse, or type in the name. This

beam and is the NSM field on the
PRTUBE entry. This value can be either
a real value or reference to an existing
OK
Specifies the wall thickness of the pipe. This is the T field on the PTUBE entry.
This value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Scalar Spring (CELAS1)

Action
Dimension
Type
Create
1D
Spring
Option(s)
Topologies
Bar/2
Use this form to create a CELAS1 element and a PELAS property. This defines a scalar spring of
the structural model.
Input Properties
Scalar Spring (CELAS1)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Spring Constant
Real Scalar
Real Scalar
[Stress Coefficient]
Real Scalar
Dof at Node 1
String
Dof at Node 2
String
OK
Defines the relationship between the spring deflection and the

stresses within the spring. This property is the S field on the
PELAS entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an
Defines the coefficient to be used for

this spring. This property is the K field
on the PELAS entry and can be either
a real value or a reference to an
required.
Defines what damping is to be

included. This property is the GE field
on the PELAS entry and can be either
optional.

value is to be attached to at each node.
The degree of freedom can be set to UX,
UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ. These properties
define the settings of the C1 and C2
fields on the CELAS1 entry. These
properties are required.
Scalar Damper (CDAMP1)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
1D
Damper
Scalar
Bar/2
Use this form to create a CDAMP1 element and a PDAMP property. This defines a scalar damper
element of the structural model.
Input Properties
Scalar Damper (CDAMP1)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Real Scalar
Dof at Node 1
String
Dof at Node 2
String
Defines the force per unit velocity

value to be used. This is the B field on
the PDAMP entry and can either be a
field definition. This property is
optional.

value will be attached to at each node.
This can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY,
or RZ. These define the settings of the
C1 and C2 field on the CDAMP1 entry.
These properties are required.
OK
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Viscous Damper (CVISC)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
1D
Damper
Viscous
Bar/2
Use this form to create a CVISC element and a PVISC property. This defines a viscous damper
Input Properties
Viscous Damper (CVISC)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
[Ext. Viscous Coeff.]
Real Scalar
[Rot. Viscous Coeff.]
Real Scalar
This is the C1 field on the PVISC entry.

This property can either be a real value
This is the C2 field on the PVISC entry.

This property can either be a real value
OK
Gap (CGAP)
Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
1D
Gap
Adaptive
Nonadaptive
Bar/2
Use this form to create a CGAP element and a PGAP property. This defines a gap or frictional
element of the structural model for non-linear analysis.
Input Properties
Gap (CGAP)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Vector
Gap Orientation
[Initial Opening]
Real Scalar
[Preload]
Real Scalar
Closed Stiffness
Real Scalar
[Opened Stiffness]
Real Scalar
[Sliding Stiffness]
Real Scalar
Defines the local element coordinate

system for this element that can be
defined in one of three ways. If the
two end nodes of the gap are not
coincident, then the Gap Orientation
can reference a vector or a node ID.
This local x-axis would then run
between the two end nodes and the
orientation information would define
the local xy plane. However, if the two
end nodes are coincident, then the
Gap Orientation refers to an existing
coordinate system definition and will
be used as the local element
coordinate system. This Gap
Orientation defines the settings of the
X1, X2, X3, G0, and CID fields on the
CGAP entry. This property is
required.
Defines the initial opening of the
gap element. The nodal coordinates
are only used to define the closure
direction. This property is the U0
field on the PGAP entry and can be
either a real value or a reference to
OK
Defines the artificial stiffness of the gap when the gap is open or closed. The closed stiffness
should be chosen to closely match the stiffness of the surrounding elements. The open stiffness
should be approximately 10 orders of magnitude less. These properties are the Ka and Kb fields
on the PGAP entry and can either be real value or references to existing field definitions. The
closed stiffness property is required. The opened stiffness property is optional.
Defines an initial preload across an initially closed gap. For example, this can be used for
initial thread loading. If the gap is initially open, setting this value to the initial opening stiffness
will improve the solution convergence. This is the F0 field on the PGAP entry and can either
be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CGAP element and a PGAP property that
Prop Name
Description
Sliding Stiffness
Defines the artificial shear stiffness of the element when the element
is closed. This is the Kt field on the PGAP entry. This property can be
either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This
Static Friction
Defines the static friction coefficient. This property is the MU1 field
on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or
a spatially varying real scalar field.
Kinematic Friction
Defines the kinematic friction coefficient. This property is the MU2

field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real
scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field.
Max Penetration
Defines the maximum allowable penetration. This property is the

TMAX field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a
real scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field.
Max Adjust Ratio
Defines the maximum allowable adjustment ratio. This property is

the MAR field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a
Penet. Lower Bound
Defines the lower bound for the allowable penetration. This is the
TRMIN field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a
Friction Coeff. y
Friction Coeff. Z
Defines the coefficient of friction when sliding occurs along this

element in the local y and z directions. These are the MU1 and MU2
fields on the PGAP entry and can be either real values or references
to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Scalar Mass (CMASS1)

Action
Dimension
Type
Create
1D
1D Mass
Option(s)
Topologies
Bar/2
Use this form to create a CMASS1 element and a PMASS property. This defines a scalar mass
Input Properties
Scalar Mass (CMASS1)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Real Scalar
Mass
Dof at Node 1
String
Dof at Node 2
String
Defines the translation mass or

rotational inertia value to be applied.
This property is the M field on the
PMASS entry and can either be a
real value or a reference to an
existing field definition. This property
is required.

value will be attached to at each
node. These can be set to UX, UY,
UZ, RX, RY, or RZ and defines the
settings of the C1 and C2 field on the
CMASS1 entry. These properties are
required.
OK
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
PLOTEL
Action
Dimension
Type
Create
1D
PLOTEL
Option(s)
Topologies
Bar/2
Use this form to create a PLOTEL element.

Input Properties
PLOTEL element
Property Name
Value
Value Type
String
[Dummy Property Data]
OK
Dummy property data not required

to define the PLOTEL property set.
Scalar Bush
Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Create
1D
Scalar Bush
Topologies
Bar/2
Input Properties
Scalar Bush Joint
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Vector
[Bush Orientation]
[Offset Location]
Real Scalar
[Offset Orientation Sys]
CID
Vector
[Offset Orientation Vec]

[Spring Constant 1]
Real Scalar
[Spring constant 2]
Real Scalar
Field Definitions
OK
This toggle can also be set

to Node Id or CID.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form
Prop Name
Bush Orientation
Description
Element orientation strategy keys off of CID specification. If
CID is blank, the element x-axis lies along the line which joins
the elements grid points (GA, GB Element
Properties/Application Region). The X-Y plane is determined
by specifying the Bush Orientation. If a vector input is given,
these components define an orientation vector v from the
first grid point (GA) of the element in the displacement
coordinate system at that point (GA). If the Bush Orientation
references a grid point ID (Value), this orientation point forms
an orientation vector which extends from the first element
grid point to the orientation point.
If a CID 0 is specified for Bush Orientation System, the
element X,Y, and Z axes are aligned with the coordinate
system principal axes. If the CID is for a cylindrical or
spherical coordinate system, the first elemental grid point
(GA) is used to locate the system. If CID = 0, the elemental
coordinate system is the Basic Coordinate System.
If no orientation is specified in any form, the element x-axis is
along the line which connects the elements grid points. The
material property inputs for this condition must be limited to
simple axial and torsional stiffness and damping
(k1,k4,B1,B4).
Offset Location
Offset Location (0.0 s 1.0) specifies the spring-damper

location along the line from GRIDGA to GRIDGB by setting
the fraction of the distance from GRIDGA. s=0.50 centers the
spring-damper.
Offset Orientation System
Specifies the coordinate system used to locate the springdamper offset when it is not on the line from GRIDGA to
GRIDGB.
Offset Orientation Vector
Provides the location of the spring-damper in space relative

to the offset coordinate system. If the offset orientation system
is -1 or blank, the offset orientation vector is ignored.
Prop Name
Description
Spring Constant 1
Spring Constant 2
Spring Constant 3
Spring Constant 4
Spring Constant 5
Spring Constant 6
Defines the stiffness associated with a particular degree of

freedom. This property is defined in terms of force per unit
displacement and can be either a real value or a reference to
an existing field definition for defining stiffness vs. frequency.
Stiff. Force/Disp 1
Stiff. Force/Disp 2
Stiff. Force/Disp 3
Stiff. Force/Disp 4
Stiff. Force/Disp 5
Stiff. Force/Disp 6
Defines the nonlinear force/displacement curves for each

degree of freedom of the spring-damper system.
Damp. Freq Depend 1
Damp. Freq Depend 2
Damp. Freq Depend 3
Damp. Freq Depend 4
Damp. Freq Depend 5
Damp. Freq Depend 6
Defines the force per velocity damping value for each degree
of freedom. This property can be either a real value or a
reference to an existing field definition for defining damping
vs. frequency
Structural Damping
Struc. Damp Freq Depend
Defines the non-dimensional structural damping coefficient

(GE1). This property can be either a real value, or a reference
to an existing field definition for defining damping vs.
frequency.
Stress Recovery Translation

Stress Recovery Rotation
Stress Recovery Coefficients. The element stress are computed

by multiplying the stress coefficients with the recovered
element forces.
Strain Recovery Translation

Strain Recovery Rotation
Strain Recovery Coefficients. The element strains are

computed by multiplying the strain coefficients with the
recovered element strains.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Standard Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
2D
Shell
Homogeneous
Tri/3, Quad/4
Tri/6, Quad/8
Use this form to create a CQUAD4, CTRIA3, CQUAD8, or CTRIA6 element and a PSHELL
property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank to achieve the
requested behavior.
Input Properties
Stan. Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4)
Property Name
Value
Material Name
Value Type
Mat Prop Name
[Material Orientation]

entered. Either select one from the list
This defines the settings of the MID1,
MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the
PSHELL entry. This property is
required.
CID
Thickness
Real Scalar
Real Scalar
[Plate Offset]
Real Scalar
[Fiber Dist. 1]
Real Scalar
OK
Defines the thickness, which will be

uniform over each element. This value
can either be a real value or a
reference to an existing field definition.
This property defines the T1, T2, T3,
and T4 fields on the CQUAD4/8 and
CTRIA3/6 entries and/or the T field on
the PSHELL entry. This property is
required.
Defines the mass not derived from the

material of the element. This is defined
in terms of mass per unit area of the
element. This is the NSM field on the
PSHELL entry. This value can be either
optional.
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three
ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the
element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle
offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID
field on the CQUADi or CTRIAi entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value in degrees, a
vector, or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.
This is a list of Input Properties, available for creating a CQUADi and a CTRIAi element and a
PSHELL property, that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the
Input Properties form to view these properties.
Prop Name
Description
Plate Offset
Defines the offset of the elements reference plane from the plane
defined by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the
CQUAD4/8 entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an
Fiber Dist. 1
Fiber Dist. 2
Defines the distance from the elements reference plane to the

bottom and top most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties
define the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either
real values or references to existing field definitions. This property is
optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Revised Homogeneous Plate (CQUADR)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
2D
Shell
Homogeneous
Revised Formulation
Tri/3, Quad/4
Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate
fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank to achieve the requested behavior.
Input Properties
Revised Homogeneous Plate (CQUADR)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Mat Prop Name
Material Name
CID
Thickness
Real Scalar
Real Scalar
[Fiber Dist.1]
Real Scalar
[Fiber Dist. 2]
Real Scalar
OK
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within

the element. There are three ways to assign this definition:
(1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the
element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element,
or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element
coordinate system. This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID
field on the CQUADR or CTRIAR entry. This scalar value can be
either a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate
system. This property is optional.

This property defines the settings of
the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4
fields on the PSHELL entry. This
Defines a uniform thickness, which will
cover each element. This property
defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields
on the CQUADR or CTRIAR entry
and/or the T field on the PSHELL
entry and can be either a real value or
a reference to existing field definition.
Defines the mass not included in the
mass derived from the material of the
terms of mass per unit area of the
element. and this is the NSM field on
the PSHELL entry. This value can be
is optional.
Defines the distance from the

elements reference plane to the top
and bottom most extreme fibers.
These properties are the Z1 and Z2
fields on the PSHELL entry and can
be either real values or references to
existing field definitions. These
P-Formulation Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4)

Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create
input for an adaptive, p-element analysis.
Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
2D
Shell
Homogeneous
P-Formulation
Tri/3, Quad/4,Tri/6, Quad/8,

Tri/7, Quad/9, Tri/9,
Quad/12, Tri/13, Quad/16
Use this form to create a CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate
fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested
behavior.The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC . Nastran Version 69 or later.
Therefore, the MSC .Nastran Version in the Translation Parameter form must be set to 69.
Input Properties
P-Formulation Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Material Name
Mat Prop Name
[Material Orient. Angle
Real Scalar
CID
Thickness
Real Scalar
Real Scalar
[Fiber Dist.1]
Real Scalar
OK
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material
within the element. There are two ways to assign this
definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, then the
projected x-axis of the coordinate system is the material xaxis (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected xaxis of the basic system.This defines the setting of the
THETA or MCID field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This
Defines the material to be used. A

list of all materials currently in the
Defines a uniform thickness, which
will cover each element. This property
on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry
entry and can be either a real value or
a reference to existing field definition.
terms of mass per unit area of the
element and this is the NSM field on
the PSHELL entry. This value can be
and bottom most extreme fibers
respectively. These properties are the
Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry
and can be either real values or
references to existing field definitions.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties, available for creating a CQUAD4 and a CTRIA3 element, that
Prop Name
Description
Plate Offset
CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry and can be either a real value or a
Fiber Dist. 1
Fiber Dist. 2
Defines the distance from the elements reference plane to the top
and bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties
real values or references to existing field definitions. This property is
optional.

Maximum P-orders

defined by the P--order Coordinate System (default elemental).
PVAL entry.
The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this
Activate Error Estimate Flag that controls whether or not this set of elements participates in
the error analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry.
P-order Adaptivity

Error Tolerance

By default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the
ADAPT entry.
Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate
in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the
SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Strain Threshold Value
Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate
in the error analysis.By default this value is equal to1.0E-8. This is
the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Standard Laminate Plate (CQUAD4/PCOMP)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
2D
Shell
Laminate
Tri/3, Quad/4
Tri/6, Quad/8
Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PCOMP
property.
Input Properties
Stan. Lam. Plate (CQUAD4/PCOMP)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Mat Prop Name
Material Name
CID

using the mouse or type the name in.
The specified material must be a
laminate material in MSC.Patran.
The data in this material definition
defines the settings of the MIDi, Ti,
and THETAi fields on the PCOMP
entry. This property is required.
Real Scalar
[Plate Offset]
Real Scalar
OK
Defines mass not included in the

mass derived from the material of
the element. This is the NSM field on
the PCOMP entry. This property is
defined in terms of mass per unit
area of the element and can be
Defines the offset of the elements
reference plane from the plane
defined by the nodal locations. This
is the ZOFFS field on the CTRIA3,
CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8
entry. This value can be either a real
value or a reference to an existing
optional.
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element.
There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate
system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will
be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the
default element coordinate system. This property defines the setting of the
THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6 CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry.
This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an existing
coordinate system. This property is optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Revised Laminate Plate (CQUADR/PCOMP)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
2D
Shell
Laminate
Revised Formulation
Tri/3, Quad/4
Use this form to create a CQUADR or CTRIAR element and a PCOMP property.
Input Properties
Rev. Lam. Plate (CQUADR/PCOMP)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Mat Prop Name
Material Name
CID

The specified material must be a
laminate material in MSC.Patran. The
data in this material definition defines
the settings of the MIDi, Ti, and
THETAi fields on the PCOMP entry.
Real Scalar

element. This is the NSM field on the
PCOMP entry. This property is
defined in mass per unit area, of the
element. This value can be either a
real value or a reference to an
is optional.
OK
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways
to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the
element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle
offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID
field on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a
reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.
Standard Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
2D
Shell
Equivalent Section
Tri/3, Quad/4
Tri/6, Quad/8
Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property.
The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the
requested behavior.
Defines the materials to be used to describe the membrane, bending, shear, and coupling behavior of the
element. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. These properties
define the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. Either select from the list
using the mouse or type in the name. These properties are optional.
Input Properties
Stan. Equiv. Sec. Plate (CQUAD4)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
[Membrane Material]
Mat Prop Name
[Bending Material]
Mat Prop Name
[Shear Material]
Mat Prop Name
[Coupling Material]
Mat Prop Name

CID
Real Scalar
Thickness
Defines the basic orientation for any

non-isotropic material within the
element. There are three ways to
assign this definition: (1) reference a
coordinate system, which is then
projected onto the element, (2) define
a vector that will be projected onto
the element, or (3) define a constant
angle offset from the default element
coordinate system. This defines the
setting of the THETA field on the
CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or
CQUAD8 entry. This scalar value can
be either a constant value or a
OK
Defines the uniform thickness for each element. This property defines the setting of the Ti, T2, T3,
and T4 fields on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry and/or the T field on the
PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8
element and a PSHELL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll
bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.
Prop Name
Description
Bending Stiffness
Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This is the 12I/T3 field on

the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a
Thickness Ratio
Defines the ratio of transverse shear thickness to the membrane

thickness. This property is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This
value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field
Nonstructural Mass
the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the
element. This property is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This
Plate Offset
defined by the nodal locations. This property is the ZOFFS field on
the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This value can
Fiber Distance 1
Fiber Distance 2
and bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties are
the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either
real values or references to existing field definitions. These
Revised Equivalent Section Plate (CQUADR)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
2D
Shell
Equivalent Section
Revised Formulation
Tri/3, Quad/4
fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.
Defines the materials to be used to describe the membrane, bending, shear, and coupling behavior of
the element. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. These
properties define the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields, on the PSHELL entry. Either
select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. These properties are optional.
Input Properties
Rev. Equiv. Sect. Plate (CQUADR)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
[Membrane Material]
Mat Prop Name
[Bending Material]
Mat Prop Name
[Shear Material]
Mat Prop Name
CID
Thickness
Real Scalar
[Bending Stiffness]
Real Scalar
OK

element. There are three ways to
coordinate system which is then
projected onto the element, (2)
define a vector that will be projected
onto the element, or (3) define a
constant angle offset from the default
element coordinate system. This
property defines the setting of the
THETA field on the CQUADR or
CTRIAR entry. This scalar value can
either be a constant value or a
Defines the uniform thickness, which

will be used for each element. This
property defines the setting of the Ti,
T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIAR
or CQUADR entry and/or the T field
on the PSHELL entry. This value can
be either a real value or a references
to an existing field definition. This
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a
PSHELL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input
Prop Name
Description
Bending Stiffness
Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This property is the 12I/T3

field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a
Thickness Ratio

thickness. This is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can
Nonstructural Mass
the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area
of the element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This
Fiber Distance 1
Fiber Distance 2
and bottom most extreme fibers respectively. These properties are
the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either
real values or references to existing field definitions. These
P-Formulation Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
2D
Shell
Equivalent Section
P-Formulation

Quad/8, Tri/7,
Quad/9, Tri/9,
Quad/12, Tri/13,
Quad/16
Use this form to create a CQUAD4, or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate
The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC .Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the
MSC . Nastran Version in the Translation Parameter form must be set to 69.
Defines the materials to be used to describe the membrane, bending, shear, and coupling behavior
of the element. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered.
These properties define the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields, on the PSHELL
entry. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. These properties are optional.
Input Properties
P-Formulation Equiv. Sect. Plate (CQUAD4)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
[Membrane Material]
Mat Prop Name
[Bending Material]
Mat Prop Name
[Shear Material]
Mat Prop Name
Real Scalar

element. There are two ways to
coordinate system, then the
projected x-axis of the coordinate
system is the material x-axis
(2) define a constant angle offset
from the projected x-axis of basic
system.This property is optional.
CID
Real Scalar
Thickness
OK

property defines the setting of the
Ti, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the
CTRIAR3 or CQUAD4 entry and/or
the T field on the PSHELL entry.
This value can be either a real value
or a references to an existing field
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties, available for creating a CQUAD4 and a CTRIA3 element that
Prop Name
Description
Bending Stiffness
Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This property is the 12I/T3

field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a
Thickness Ratio

thickness. This is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can
Nonstructural Mass
Plate Offset
CQUAD4 or CTRIA3entry and can be either real value or reference
to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Fiber Dist. 1
Fiber Dist. 2
real value or references to existing field definitions. This property is
optional.

Maximum P-orders

specified in Maximum P-orders. These are the Polyi fields in the
PVAL entry.
analysis. This is the ERREST field in the ADAPT entry.
P-order Adaptivity

Error Tolerance

By default, equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT
entry.
Prop Name
Description
in the error analysis. By default, equal to 0.0. This is the SIGTOL
field on the ADAPT entry.
in the error analysis. By default, equal to1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Standard Bending Panel (CQUAD4)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
2D
Bending Panel
Tri/3, Quad/4
Tri/6, Quad/8
requested behavior.
Input Properties
Stan. Bending Panel (CQUAD4)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Mat Prop Name
Material Name

CID
Thickness
Real Scalar
Real Scalar
OK

the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1)
reference a coordinate system which is then projected onto the
element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the
element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default
element coordinate system. This property defines the setting of
the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or
CQUAD8 entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value
or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is
optional.
Defines the uniform thickness for

each element. This defines the T1,
T2, T3, and T4 fields on the
CQUAD4/8 and CTRIA3/6 entries
required.
Defines the mass not derived from

the material of the element. This
property is defined in mass per unit
area of the element and is the NSM
field on the PSHELL entry. This value
can be either a real value or a
reference to an existing field
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4 or CQUAD8
element and a PSHELL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll
bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.
Prop Name
Fiber Dist. 1
Fiber Dist. 2
Description
and bottom most extreme fibers respectively. These properties
define the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and these values
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Revised Bending Panel (CQUADR)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
2D
Bending Panel
Revised Formulation
Tri/3, Quad/4
Input Properties
Rev. Bending Panel (CQUADR)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Mat Prop Name
Material Name
CID
Thickness
Real Scalar
Real Scalar
[Fiber Dist. 1]
Real Scalar
[Fiber Dist. 2]
Real Scalar
OK

the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1)
reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the
element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the
element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default
element coordinate system. This defines the setting of the THETA
or MCID field on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry. This scalar value
can either be a constant value or a reference to an existing

using the mouse or type in the
name. This property defines the
settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3,
and MID4 fields on the PSHELL
entry. This property is required.
on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry
field definitions. This property is
required.
element. This is defined in terms of
mass per unit area of the element.
This is the NSM field on the PSHELL
entry. This value can either be real
values or a reference to and existing
optional.
and bottom most extreme fibers,
respectively. These properties are the
Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry.
These values can be either real
values or references to existing field
definitions. This property is optional.
P-Formulation Bending Panel (CQUAD4)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
2D
Bending Panel
P- Formulation

Quad/8, Tri/7, Quad/9,
Quad/16
Use this form to create a CTRIA3, or CQUAD4 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate
MSC . Nastran Version in the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69.
Input Properties
P-Formulation Bending Panel (CQUAD4)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Material Name
Mat Prop Name
Real Scalar

CID
Real Scalar
Thickness

on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry
entry and this value can be either a
required.
OK
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are two
ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of the
coordinate system is the material x-axis or (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected
x-axis of basic system.This property defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the
CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This property is optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIA3 or CQUAD4 element and a
PSHELL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input
Prop Name
Description
Nonstructural Mass
Fiber Dist. 1
Fiber Dist. 2
define the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be

Maximum P-orders

PVAL entry.
coordinate system. By default this system is elemental. This is the
analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry.
P-order Adaptivity

Error Tolerance

By default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the
ADAPT entry.
in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the
SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to1.0E-8. This is
the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Axisymmetric Solid (CTRIAX6)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
2D
2D Solid
Axisymmetric
Tri/3, Tri/6
Use this form to create a CTRIAX6 axisymmetric solid element. This defines an isoparametric and
axisymmetric triangular cross section ring element with midside nodes.
There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system,
which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected
onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element
coordinate system. This defines the setting of the TH field on the CTRIAX6 entry.
This scalar value can be either a constant value or a reference to an existing
Input Properties
Axisym Solid (CTRIAX6)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
CID
Mat Prop Name
Material Name

This defines the setting of the MID
field on the CTRIAX6 entry. This
OK
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Standard Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
2D
2D Solid
Plane Strain
Tri/3, Quad/4
Tri/6, Quad/8
requested behavior.
Input Properties
Stn. Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Mat Prop Name
Material Name
OK

This property defines the setting of the
MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. The
MID2 field on the PSHELL entry will
be set to -1 to define plane strain
behavior. This property is required.
Revised Plane Strain Solid (CQUADR)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
2D
2D Solid
Plane Strain
Revised Formulation
Tri/3, Quad/4
Input Properties
Rev. Plane Strain Solid (CQUADR)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Mat Prop Name
Material Name
OK

This property defines the setting of the
MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. The
MID2 field on the PSHELL entry will be
set to -1 to define plane strain
behavior. This property is required.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
P-Formulation Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
2D
2D Solid
Plane Strain
P- Formulation

Quad/8, Tri/7, Quad/9,
Quad/16
Input Properties
P-Formulation Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Mat Prop Name
Material Name
Real Scalar

Defines the material to be used. A list of

all materials currently in the database is
displayed when data is entered. Either
select from the list using the mouse, or
type in the name. This property defines
the setting of the MID1 field on the
PSHELL entry. This property is required.
The MID2 field on the PSHELL entry will
be set to -1 to define plane strain
behavior.
CID
[Starting P-orders]
Vector
[Maximum P-orders]
Vector
Polynomial orders for displacement

representation within elements. Each
contains a list of three integers referring
to the directions defined by the P-order
Coordinate System (default elemental).
Starting P-orders apply to the first
adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis
process will limit the polynomial orders
to the values specified in Maximum Porders. These are the Polyi fields on the
PVAL entry.
OK
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the
element. There are two ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a
coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate system is the
material x-axis (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected x-axis
of basic system. This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the
CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This property is optional.
Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are:
Prop Name
Description
The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of
this coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This
is the CID field on the PVAL entry.
Activate Error Estimate
Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the

error analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry.
P-order Adaptivity

Error Tolerance
The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is

complete. By default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the
ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Stress Threshold Value
Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not
participate in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to
0.0. This is the SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not
1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Standard Membrane (CQUAD4)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
2D
Membrane
Tri/3, Quad/4
Tri /6, Quad/8
requested behavior.
Input Properties
Stan. Membrane (CQUAD4)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Mat Prop Name
Material Name

using the mouse or type in the
name. This property defines the
settings of the MID1 field on the
required.
CID
Thickness
Real Scalar
Real Scalar
OK
Defines the uniform thickness that

value can either be a real value or
reference an existing field definition.
This property defines the T1, T2,
T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIA3,
CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8
entry and/or the T field on the
required.
property is defined in mass per unit
area of the element and is the NSM
field on the PSHELL entry. This
value can be either a real value or
a reference to an existing field
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways
to assign this definition: (1)reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element.
(2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from
the default element coordinate system. This property defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field
on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar value can either be a constant
value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.
Revised Membrane (CQUADR)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
2D
Membrane
Revised Formulation
Tri/3, Quad/4
Input Properties
Rev. Membrane (CQUADR)
Property Name
Value
Value Type

This defines the settings of the MID1
field on the PSHELL entry. This
Mat Prop Name
Material Name
CID
Thickness
Real Scalar
Real Scalar
OK
Defines the uniform thickness that

value can be either a real value or a
definition. This property defines the
T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the
CTRIAR or CQUADR entry and/or
the T field on the PSHELL entry. This

property is defined in terms of mass
per unit area of the element and is
the NSM field on the PSHELL entry.
This value can be either a real value
There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system,
which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected
onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element
coordinate system. This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the
CTRIAR or CQUADR entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a
reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
P-Formulation Membrane (CQUAD4)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
2D
Membrane
P- Formulation

Quad/8, Tri/7, Quad/9.
Quad/16
Input Properties
P-Formulation Membrane (CQUAD4)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Mat Prop Name
Material Name

select from the list using the mouse or
the setting of the MID1 field on the
required.
Real Scalar

CID
[Starting P-orders]
Vector
[Maximum P-orders]
Vector

Coordinate System (default elemental).
PVAL entry.
OK
Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are two ways to
assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate
system is the material x-axis or (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected x-axis of basic
system. This property defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry.
Prop Name
Description
this coordinate system. By default this system is elemental. This

P-order Adaptivity

Error Tolerance

complete. By default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the
ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Shear Panel (CSHEAR)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Create
2D
Shear Panel
Topologies
Quad/4
Use this form to create a CSHEAR element and a PSHEAR property. This defines a shear panel
Input Properties
Shear Panel (CSHEAR)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Material Name
Mat Prop Name
Thickness
Real Scalar
Real Scalar
[Extensional Stiff. 12]
Real Scalar
[Extensional Stiff. 14]
Real Scalar
OK
Defines the uniform thickness, which will be used for each

element. This defines the T field on the PSHEAR entry.
This property is required. This value can be either a real
value or a reference to an existing field definition.

This defines the settings of the MID
field on the PSHEAR entry. This

element. This is defined in mass per
unit area of the element. This is the
NSM field on the PSHEAR entry. This
value can be either a real value or a
Defines the effectiveness factor for

extensional stiffness along the 1-2
and 3-4 sides. This is the F1 field on
the PSHEAR entry. This value can
be either a real value or a reference
to an existing field definition. This
Defines the effectiveness factor for

extensional stiffness along the 2-3 and 1-4
sides. This is the F2 field on the PSHEAR
entry. This value can be either a real value
or a reference to an existing field definition.
Solid (CHEXA)
Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
3D
Solid
Standard
Tet/4, Wedge/6
Hex/8, Tet/10
Wedge/15, Hex/20
Use this form to create a CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA element and a PSOLID property.
Input Properties
Solid (CHEXA)
Property Name
Value
Value Type

the settings of the MID field on the
PSOLID entry. This property is required.
Mat Prop Name
Material Name
[Mater. Orientation]
String
[Integration Network]
String
[Integration Scheme]
String
[Output Locations]
String
Defines the type of integration network

to be used. This property is the IN field
on the PSOLID entry and can be set to
Bubble, Two, or Three. This property is
optional.
Defines the integration scheme to be

used. This property is the ISOP field on
the PSOLID entry and can be set to
Reduced or Full. This property is
optional.
Defines where the output for these
elements are to be reported. This
property can be set to either Gauss or
Grid and is the STRESS field on the
PSOLID entry. This property is optional.
OK
Defines both the orientation of referenced nonisotropic materials and solid element
results. This can be set to Global, Elemental, or to a specific coordinate frame reference
and defines the CORDM field on the PSOLID entry. The default is Global. Nonlinear
stresses and strains are output in the Elemental system regardless of the setting.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
P-Formulation Solid (CHEXA)

input for an adaptive, p-element analysis:
Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
3D
Solid
P-Formulation
Tet/4, Wedge/6
Hex/8, Tet/10
Wedge/15, Hex/20,
Tet/16, Tet/40,
Wedge/24,Wedge/52,
Hex/32, Hex/64
Use this form to create a CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA element and a PSOLID property.
Input Properties
P-Formulation Solid (CHEXA)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Mat Prop Name
Material Name
[Mater. Orientation]
String
[Starting P-orders]
Vector
[Minimum P-orders]
Vector
[Maximum P-orders]
Vector

the setting of the MID field on the
PSOLID entry. This property is required.

Coord. System (default elemental).
PVAL entry.
OK
Defines orientation for the referenced material. This property can be set to Global,
Elemental or to a user-defined coordinate system and defines the CORDM field on
the PSOLID entry. The default is Global. This property is optional.
Prop Name
Description
this coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This

P-order Adaptivity

Error Tolerance

complete. By default the value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL
participate in the error analysis. By default the value is equal to
participate in the error analysis. By default the value is equal to
Integration Network
Defines the type of integration network to be used. This property

is the IN field on the PSOLID entry and can be set to Bubble, Two,
or Three. This property is optional.
Integration Scheme
Defines where the output for these elements are to be reported.

This can be set to either Gauss or Grid. This property is the
STRESS field on the PSOLID entry. This property is optional.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Hyperelastic Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4)

input for a nonlinear analysis:
Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
2D
2D Solid
Plane Strain
Hyperelastic
Formulation

Quad/8, Quad/9
Use this form to create a CQUAD, CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CTRIA3, or CTRIA6 element and a
PLPLANE property.
Input Properties
Hyp. Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Mat Prop Name
Material Name
[Plane of Deformation]]
CID
[Output Locations]]
String

PLPLANE entry. This property is
required.
Location of stress and strain output. the

options are GAUS (default) or GRID.
this defines the STR field on the
PLPLANE entry.
OK
Identification number of a coordinate system defining the plane of

deformation. This defines the CID field on the PLPLANE entry.
Hyperelastic Axisym Solid (CTRIAX6)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
2D
2D Solid
Axisymmetric
Hyperelastic
Formulation
CQUADX,
CTRIAX
Use this form to create a CQUADX or CTRIAX element and a PLPLANE property.
Input Properties
Hype. Axisym Solid (CTRIAX6)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Mat Prop Name
Material Name

PLPLANE entry. This property is
required.
String
[Output Locations]]

PLPLANE entry.
OK
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Hyperelastic Solid (CHEXA)

Action
Dimension
Type
Option(s)
Topologies
Create
3D
Solid
Hyperelastic
Formulation
HEX, PENT, TET
Use this form to create a CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA element and a PLSOLID property.
Input Properties
Hyperelastic Solid (CHEXA)
Property Name
Value
Value Type
Mat Prop Name
Material Name

PLSOLID entry. This property is
required.
String
[Output Locations]]

PLSOLID entry.
OK
2.8
Beam Modeling
Modeling structures composed of beams can be more complicated than modeling shell, plate, or
solid structures. First, it is necessary to define bending, extensional, and torsional stiffness that
may be complex functions of the beam cross sectional dimensions. Then it is necessary to define
the orientation of this cross section in space. Finally, if the centroid of the cross section is offset
from the two finite element nodes defining the beam element, these offsets must be explicitly
defined. Fortunately, MSC.Patran provides a number of tools to simplify these aspects of
modeling.
Cross Section Definition

The cross section properties are defined on the element property forms shown on pages General
Section Beam (CBAR) (p. 77) and Tapered Beam (CBEAM) (p. 90). The properties can be
entered directly into the data boxes labeled Area, Inertia i,j, Torsional Constant, etc. or by
pushing the large I-beam icon on these forms to access the Beam Library form. The Beam Library
forms are a much more convenient way of defining properties for standard cross sections and
are shown below.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Create Action. The first step in using the beam library is to select the section icon for the
particular cross section desired (e.g. I-section).Then the dimensions for each of the components
of the beam section must be entered.
Beam Library
Action:
Type:
Create
Standard Shape
Current beam section as
selected from the section library
icon palette. The required
dimensions are shown.
Existing Sections
Filter
*
Hexagonal
I-Beam
Solid-Rod
New Section Name
I-Beam
10.
W1
7.
W2
4.
1.1
t1
0.7
0.5
t2
Enter the dimensions of the

beam section here, referring
to the beam section icon.
Beam section library icon

palette. Select the icon
representing the desired section.
Calculate /Display
Write to Report File
These forward and backward

arrows provide access to
additional beam section icons.
Writes the current beam

properties to a report file.
Calculates the beam properties

based on the current
dimensions and displays an
image of the scaled section
along with the properties.
OK
Apply
Reset
Cancel
Beam section name to be created.

List of existing beam sections. This list can be filtered to contain only the
section names of interest using the filter mechanism.
Finally, a section name must be entered and the Apply button pushed. The other options
available with the beam library are documented in the MSC.Patran Users Guide Tools>Beam
Library (p. 370) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Once one or more
beam sections have been defined, these can be selected in the section data box on the element
properties form.
Supplied Functions.
I-Beam - Six dimensions -- lower flange thickness (t1), upper flange thickness
(t2),lower flange width (w1), upper flange width (w2), overall height (H), and web
thickness (t)-- allows for symmetric or unsymmetrical I-beam definition.
Angle - Open section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W),
horizontal flange thickness (t1), vertical flange thickness (t2).
Tee - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), horizontal flange
thickness (t1), vertical flange thickness (t2).
Solid-Rod - Solid section, one dimension -- radius (R).
Box-Symmetric - Closed section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall

width (W), top and bottom flange thicknesses (t1), side flange thicknesses (t2).
Tube - Closed section, two dimensions -- outer radius (R1), inner radius (R2).
Channel - Open section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W),
top and bottom flange thicknesses (t1), shear web thickness (t).
Bar - Solid section, two dimensions -- height (H) and width (W).
Box-Unsymmetrical - Closed section, six dimensions -- overall height (H), overall

width (W), top flange thickness (t1), bottom flange thickness (t2), right side flange
thickness (t3), left side flange thickness (t4).
Hat - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), top of hat flange width (W), bottom of
hat flange width for one side (W1), thickness (t).
H-Beam - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), width between inner edges of
vertical flanges (W), horizontal shear web thickness (t), and thickness of one
vertical flange (W1/2).
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Cross - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), vertical flange thickness (t),
horizontal flange thickness (t2), length of free horizontal flange for one side (W/2).
Z-Beam - Four dimensions -- overall height (H2), height of vertical flange between
as measured between horizontal flanges, length of free horizontal flange for one
side (W), thickness (t1).
Hexagonal - Solid section, three dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width
(W), horizontal distance from side vertex to top or bottom surface vertex along the
common edge (i.e., diagonal edge hypotenuse times the cosine of the exterior
diagonal angle).
Cross Section Orientation

The Bar Orientation data box on the Input Properties form is used to define how the y-axis of the
beam cross section is oriented in space. By default the Value Type is Vector. This tells
MSC Nastran that the cross section y-axis lies in the plane defined by the beams x-axis (the line
connecting the two node points) and this vector. The Value Type pop up menu may be changed
to Node ID. In this case the y-axis lies in the plane defined by the x-axis and the selected node.
When the Value Type is Vector and the Bar Orientation data box is selected the following select
box appears on the screen.
These select tools provide different options for defining vectors. They are discussed in
more detail in the Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Basic Functions.
These three tools define the orientation

vector as the 1 (x), 2(y), or 3(z) axis of a
selected coordinate system. This is a
convenient way to specify the orientation
when it is aligned with one of the three
axes of a rectangular coordinate system.
When the system is not rectangular (e.g.
cylindrical) these tools may not provide
the desired definition because the defined
vector does not change direction at
different points in space--these tools just
provide an alternate way to define a
global vector.
These tools provide different

ways to define vectors. In
addition, the user is requested to
select a coordinate system in
which this vector is defined.
The simplest list processor syntax
that appears in the databox for a
vector in an alternate coordinate
system is <x_component,
y_component, z_component>
coord cord_id (e.g. <1, 0, 0>
coord 3). In many cases it is easy
to simply type a definition in this
form into the Bar Orientation
databox.
This tool may be used to define a general

vector with respect to an alternate coordinate
system. When this icon is picked, the select
menu changes to the one on the right.
After the orientation has been defined, there are two ways to verify its correctness in
MSC.Patran. The first option is in the Element Properties application. By selecting the Show
Action, the Definition of X Y Plane property, and Display Method Vector Plot, the vectors
defining the orientation will be shown on the model. A second option can be used when the
Beam Library has been used to define the beam cross section. There is an option on the Display
form Display>LBC/Element Property Attributes (p. 293) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions called Beam Display. The menu allows different display options for
displaying an outline of the defined cross section on the model in the correct location and
orientation.
Users should be aware of one difference between the MSC.Patran and MSC . Nastran definitions
for cross section orientation. In MSC.Patran the orientation is completely independent of the
analysis coordinate system at the beam nodes. In MSC. Nastran, the orientation vector is
assumed to be defined in the same system as the analysis system at the first node of the beam.
In MSC.Patran it is perfectly permissible to define the orientation in a different coordinate
system from that analysis system. When the NASTRAN input file is generated, the necessary
transformation of this vector to the analysis system at node 1 will be performed.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Cross Section End Offsets

Two data boxes are provided on the Element Properties, Input Properties form to optionally
define an offset from either node 1 to the cross section centroid (Offset @ Node 1) or from node
2 to the cross section centroid (Offset @ Node 2). The same select menu tools are available for
defining these vectors. One difference between the orientation definition and the offset
definitions, however, is that for the offset the magnitude of the vector is important. Because of
this, the select menu tools are usually not very convenient. Typically, offsets are defined by
typing the definition (e.g <x, y, z> or <x, y, z> coord n>) into the appropriate data box.
Two options are available for verifying the definitions of offsets; these options are very similar
to those for orientations. The Element Properties, Show Action will allow the end offsets to be
displayed as vectors on the model. This option is not especially useful because the vector plot
shows only the direction of the offset, not the magnitude of the offset. It is usually much more
useful to view the Beam Display menu on the Display form Display>LBC/Element Property
Attributes (p. 293) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions to select the
display option with offsets. The viewport will then show the beam displayed in both the offset
and non-offset positions.
Stiffened Cylinder Example

Figure 2-1 shows a simple example of a circular cylinder stiffened with Z-stiffeners. The cross
section was defined by selecting the Beam Library icon on the Element Properties/Input
Properties form. The Z cross section was selected on the Beam Library form, the cross section
dimensions input, a section name input, and the Apply button pushed. On the Input Properties
form, the Use Beam Section toggle is set to ON. The defined section name is selected in the
[Section Name] data box. The string <-1.0 0. 0.> coord 1 is typed into the Bar Orientation data
box to align the cross section orientation with the radial direction of the global, cylindrical
system. Similarly, the strings <-2.0 0.0 0.0> coord 1 and <-2.0 0.0 0.0> coord 1 typed into the
Offset @ Node 1 and Offset @ Node 2 data boxes define the end offsets to be radially inward.
T
Z1
Y
Z
Figure 2-1 Stiffened Cylinder
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
2.9

The Loads and Boundary Conditions form will appear when the Loads/BCs toggle, located on
the MSC.Patran main form, is chosen. When creating a load and boundary condition there are
several option menus. The selections made on the Loads and Boundary Conditions menu will
determine which load and boundary conditions form appears, and ultimately, which
MSC .Nastran loads and boundary conditions will be created.
The following pages give an introduction to the Loads and Boundary Conditions form and
details of all the loads and boundary conditions supported by the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran
Analysts Preference.
MSC.Patran

hp, 2
Loads & Boundary Conditions Form

This form appears when Loads/BCs is selected on the main menu. The Loads and Boundary
Conditions form is used to provide options to create the various MSC .Nastran loads and
boundary conditions. For a definition of full functionality, see Loads and Boundary
Conditions Form (p. 18) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.
Options for defining slide line contact are also accessed from this main Loads and Boundary
Conditions form. For more information see Defining Contact Regions (p. 168).
Defines the general load type to be applied. Object choices are
Displacement, Force, Pressure, Temperature, Inertial Load,
Initial Displacement, Initial Velocity, Velocity, Acceleration,
Distributed Load, CID Distributed Load, Total Load, Contact,
and Initial Temperature.
Load/Boundary Conditions
Action:
Object:
Create
Defines what type of region is to be loaded. The available

options depend on the selected Object. The general selections
can be Nodal, Element Uniform, or Element Variable. Nodal is
applied explicitly to nodes. Element Uniform defines a constant
value to be applied over an entire element, element face, or
element edge. Element Variable defines a value that varies
across an entire element, element face, or element edge.
Displacement
Type:
Nodal
Analysis Type:
Structural
Current Load Case:

Default...
Type:
Current Load Case type is set on the Load Case menu.

When the Load Cases toggle located on the main menu is
chosen, the Load Cases menu will appear. Under Load
Case Type, select either Static or Time Dependent, then
enter the name of the case, and click on the Apply button.
Static
Existing Sets
New Set Name
Target Element Type:
2D
Input Data...
Select Application Region...
-Apply-
Defines the target element type to which this load will be

applied. This only appears if the type is Element Uniform
or Element Variable. This can be 0D, 1D, 2D, or 3D.
Generates either a Static (p. 156) or Time Dependent

(p. 157) Input Data form, depending on the current Load
Case Type.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
The following table outlines the options when Create is the selected action.
Object
Type
Displacement
Nodal
Element Uniform
Element Variable
Force
Nodal
Pressure
Element Uniform
Element Variable
Temperature
Nodal
Element Uniform
Element Variable
Inertial Load
Element Uniform
Initial Displacement
Nodal
Initial Velocity
Nodal
Velocity
Nodal
Acceleration
Nodal
Distributed Load
Element Uniform
Element Variable
CID Distributed Load
Element Uniform
Element Variable
Total Load
Element Uniform
Contact
Element Uniform
Initial Temperature
Nodal
Static
This subordinate form appears when the Input Data button is selected on the Loads and
Boundary Conditions form and the Current Load Case Type is Static. The Current Load Case
Type is set on the Load Case form. For more information see Loads & Boundary Conditions
Form (p. 154). The information on the Input Data form will vary depending on the selected
Object. Defined below is the standard information found on this form.
Input Data
Load/BC Set Scale Factor
Defines a general scaling factor for all values defined on
this form. The default value is 1.0. Primarily used when
field definitions are used to define the load values.
Translations (T1, T2, T3)

Input Data in this section will vary. See
(p. 158) for detailed information.
Object Tables
Rotations (R1, R2, R3)
When specifying real values in the Input Data entries, spatial

fields can be referenced. All defined spatial fields currently in
the database are listed. If the input focus is placed in the Input
Data entry and a spatial field is selected by clicking in this list,
a reference to that field will be entered in the Input Data entry.
Spatial Fields
FEM Dependent Data...
This button will display a Discrete FEM Fields input form to

allow field creation and modification within the loads/bcs
application. Visible only when focus is set in a databox which
can have a DFEM field reference.

Coord 0
OK
Reset
Defines the coordinate frame used to interpret the degree-offreedom data defined on this form. This only appears on the
form for Nodal type loads. This can be a reference to any
existing coordinate frame definition.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Time Dependent
This subordinate form appears when the Input Data button is selected on the Loads and
Boundary Condition form and the Current Load Case Type is Time Dependent. The Current Load
Case Type is set on the Load Case form. For more information see Loads & Boundary
Conditions Form (p. 154) and Load Cases (p. 167). The information on the Input Data form
will vary, depending on the selected Object. Defined below is the standard information found
on this form.
Input Data
Load/BC Set Scale Factor
1
Spatial Dependence
* Time Dependence
Defines a general scaling factor for all

values defined on this form.The default
value is 1.0. Primarily used when field
definitions are used to define the load
values.
Trans Accel (A1,A2,A3)

Input Data in this section will vary. See
Object Tables (p. 158) for detailed
information.
Rot Velocity (w1,w2,w3)
Rot Accel (a1,a2,a3)
Spatial Fields
Time Dependent Fields
When specifying time dependent values

in the Input Data entries, time-dependent
fields can be referenced. All defined
time-dependent fields currently in the
database are listed. If the input focus is
placed in the Input Data entry and a
time-dependent field is selected by
clicking in this list, a reference to that
field will be entered in the Input Data
entry.
FEM Dependent Data...

Coord 0
OK
Reset
Defines the coordinate frame to be used

to interpret the degree-of-freedom data
defined on this form. This only appears
on the form for Nodal type loads. This can
be a reference to any existing coordinate
frame definition.
This button will display a Discrete FEM Fields input form to allow field
creation and modification within the loads/bcs application. Visible only
when focus is set in a databox which can have a DFEM field reference.
When specifying real values in the Input Data entries, spatial fields can be referenced.
All defined spatial fields currently in the database are listed. If the input focus is placed
in the Input Data entry and a spatial field is selected by clicking in this list, a reference
to that field will be entered in the Input Data entry.
Object Tables
These are areas on the static and transient input data forms where the load data values are
defined. The data fields that appear depend on the selected load Object and Type. In some cases,
the data fields also depend on the selected Target Element Type. The following Object Tables
outline and define the various input data that pertains to a specific selected object:
Displacement
Object
Type
Analysis Type
Displacement
Nodal
Structural
Creates MSC . Nastran SPC1 and SPCD Bulk Data entries. All non blank entries will cause an
SPC1 entry to be created. If the specified value is not 0.0, an SCPD entry will also be created to
define the non zero enforced displacement or rotation.
Input Data
Description
Translations (T1,T2,T3)
Defines the enforced translational displacement values. These

are in model length units.
Rotations (R1,R2,R3)
Defines the enforced rotational displacement values. These are

in radians.
Object
Type
Analysis Type
Dimension
Displacement
Element Uniform
Element Variable
Structural
3D
Applies a zero or nonzero displacement boundary condition to the face of solid elements. The
primary use of this boundary condition is to apply constraints to p-elements; but it may also be
used for standard solid elements. If applied to a p-element solid, the appropriate FEFACE and
GMBC entries are created. If applied to a standard solid element, the appropriate SPC1 and
SPCD entries are created.
Input Data
Description
Defines the enforced translational displacement values. These
values are in model-length units.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Force
Object
Type
Analysis Type
Force
Nodal
Structural
Creates MSC.Nastran FORCE and MOMENT Bulk Data entries.

Input Data
Description
Force (F1,F2,F3)
Defines the applied forces in the translation degrees of freedom.

This defines the N vector and the F magnitude on the FORCE
entry.
Moment (M1,M2,M3)
Defines the applied moments in the rotational degrees of

freedom. This defines the N vector and the M magnitude on the
MOMENT entry.
Pressure
Object
Type
Analysis Type
Dimension
Pressure
Element Uniform
Structural
2D
Creates MSC . Nastran, PLOAD4, PLOADX1, or FORCE Bulk Data entries.

Input Data
Description
Top Surf Pressure
Defines the top surface pressure load on shell elements using a

PLOAD4 entry. The negative of this value defines the P1, P2, P3,
and P4 values. These values are all equal for a given element,
producing a uniform pressure field across that face.
Bot Surf Pressure
Defines the bottom surface pressure load on shell elements using a

PLOAD4 entry. This value defines the P1 through P4 values.These
values are all equal for a given element, producing a uniform
pressure field across that face.
Edge Pressure
For Axisymmetric Solid elements (CTRIAX6), defines the P1

through P3 values on the PLOADX1 entry where THETA on that
entry is defined as zero. For other 2D elements, this will be
interpreted as a load per unit length (i.e. independent of thickness)
and converted into equivalent nodal loads (FORCE entries). If a
scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated at the middle of the
application region.
Object
Type
Analysis Type
Dimension
Pressure
Element Uniform
Structural
3D
Creates MSC . Nastran PLOAD4 Bulk Data entries.

Input Data
Description
Defines the face pressure value on solid elements using a PLOAD4
entry. This defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is
referenced, it will be evaluated once at the center of the applied
region.
Pressure
Object
Type
Analysis Type
Dimension
Pressure
Element Variable
Structural
2D
Creates MSC . Nastran, PLOAD4, PLOADX1, or FORCE Bulk Data entries.

Input Data
Description
Top Surf Pressure
Defines the top surface pressure load on shell elements using a

PLOAD4 entry. The negative of this value defines the P1, P2, P3,
and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated
separately for the P1 through P4 values.
Bot Surf Pressure
Defines the bottom surface pressure load on shell elements using a

PLOAD4 entry. This value defines the P1 through P4 values. If a
scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated separately for the P1
through P4 values.
Edge Pressure
For Axisymmetric Solid elements (CTRIAX6), defines the P1

through P3 values on the PLOADX1 entry where THETA on that
entry is defined as zero. For other 2D elements, this will be
interpreted as a load per unit length (e.g., independent of
thickness) and converted into equivalent nodal loads (FORCE
entries). If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated
independently at each node.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Object
Type
Analysis Type
Dimension
Pressure
Element Variable
Structural
3D
Creates MSC .Nastran PLOAD4 Bulk Data entries.

Input Data
Description
Defines the face pressure value on solid elements using a
PLOAD4 entry. This defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a
scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated separately for each
of the P1 through P4 values.
Pressure
Temperature
Object
Type
Analysis Type
Temperature
Nodal
Structural
Creates MSC .Nastran TEMP Bulk Data entries.

Input Data
Description
Defines the T fields on the TEMP entry.
Temperature
Object
Type
Analysis Type
Dimension
Temperature
Element Uniform
Structural
1D
Creates MSC . Nastran TEMPRB Bulk Data entries.

Input Data
Temperature
Description
Defines a uniform temperature field using a TEMPRB entry. The
temperature value is used for both the TA and TB fields. The T1a,
T1b, T2a, and T2b fields are all defined as 0.0.
Object
Type
Analysis Type
Dimension
Temperature
Element Uniform
Structural
2D
Creates MSC . Nastran TEMPP1 Bulk Data entries.

Input Data
Description
Defines a uniform temperature field using a TEMPP1 entry. The
temperature value is used for the T field. The gradient through
the thickness is defined to be 0.0.
Temperature
Object
Type
Analysis Type
Dimension
Temperature
Element Variable
Structural
1D
Creates MSC . Nastran TEMPRB Bulk Data entries.

Input Data
Description
Centroid Temp
Defines a variable temperature file using a TEMPRB entry. A field

reference will be evaluated at either end of the element to define
the TA and TB fields.
Axis-1 Gradient
Defines the temperature gradient in the 1 direction. A field

the T1a and T1b fields.
Axis-2 Gradient
Defines the temperature gradient in the 2 direction. A field

the T2a and T2b fields.
Object
Type
Analysis Type
Dimension
Temperature
Element Variable
Structural
2D
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Creates MSC . Nastran TEMPP1 Bulk Data entries.

Input Data
Description
Top Surf Temp
Defines the temperature on the top surface of a shell element. The

top and bottom values are used to compute the average and
gradient values on the TEMPP1 entry.
Bot Surf Temp
Defines the temperature on the bottom surface of a shell element.

The top and bottom values are used to compute the average and
gradient values on the TEMPP1 entry.
Object
Type
Analysis Type
Dimension
Temperature
Element Uniform
Element Variable
Structural
1D, 2D, 3D
This option applies only to the P-formulation elements. A TEMPF and DEQATN entry are
created for the constant temperature case. A TEMPF and TABLE3D entry are created for the case
when a spatial field is referenced.
Input Data
Temperature
Description
Defines the temperature or temperature distribution in the element.
Inertial Load
Object
Type
Analysis Type
Inertial Load
Element Uniform
Structural
Creates MSC . Nastran GRAV and RFORCE Bulk Data entries.

Input Data
Description
Trans Accel (A1,A2,A3)
Defines the N vector and the G magnitude value on the GRAV

entry.
Rot Velocity
(w1,w2,w3)
Defines the R vector and the A magnitude value on the RFORCE

entry.
Rot Accel (a1,a2,a3)
Defines the R vector and the RACC magnitude value on the

RFORCE entry.
The acceleration and velocity vectors are defined with respect to the input analysis coordinate
frame. The origin of the rotational vectors is the origin of the analysis coordinate frame. Note that
rotational velocity and rotational acceleration cannot be defined together in the same set.In
generating the GRAV and RFORCE entries, the interface produces one GRAV and/or RFORCE
entry image for each MSC.Patran load set.
Object
Type
Analysis Type
Nodal
Structural
Creates a set of MSC .Nastran TIC Bulk Data entries.

Input Data
Description
Defines the U0 fields for translational degrees of freedom on the

TIC entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank
entry.
Rotations (R1,R2,R3)
Defines the U0 fields for rotational degrees of freedom on the TIC

entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry.
Initial Velocity
Object
Type
Analysis Type
Initial Velocity
Nodal
Structural
Creates a set of MSC .Nastran TIC Bulk Data entries.

Input Data
Description
Trans Veloc (v1,v2,v3)
Defines the V0 fields for translational degrees of freedom on the

TIC entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank
entry.
Rot Veloc (w1,w2,w3)
Defines the V0 fields for rotational degrees of freedom on the TIC

entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry.
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Distributed Load
Object
Type
Analysis Type
Dimension
Distributed Load
Element Uniform
Element Variable
Structural
1D
Defines distributed force or moment loading along beam elements using MSC . Nastran
PLOAD1 entries. The coordinate system in which the load is applied is defined by the beam axis
and the Bar Orientation element property. The Bar Orientation must be defined before this
Distributed Load can be created. If the Bar Orientation is subsequently changed, the Distributed
Load must be updated manually if necessary.
For the element variable type, a field reference is evaluated at each end of the beam to define a
linear load variation.
Input Data
Description
Edge Distributed Load

(f1,f2,f3)
Defines the FXE, FYE, and FZE fields on three PLOAD1 entries.
Edge Distributed
Moment (m1,m2,m3)
Defines the MXE, MYE, and MZE fields on three PLOAD1 entries.
Object
Type
Analysis Type
Dimension
Distributed Load
Element Uniform
Element Variable
Structural
2D
Defines a distributed force or moment load along the edges of 2D elements. The coordinate
system for the load is defined by the surface or element edge and normal. The x direction is along
the edge. Positive x is determined by the element corner node connectivity. See The MSC.Patran
Element Library (p. 259) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling. For
example, if the element is a CQUAD4, with node connectivity of 1, 2, 3, 4. The positive x
directions for each edge would be from nodes 1 to 2, 2 to 3, 3 to 4, and 4 to 1. The z direction is
normal to the surface or element. Positive z is in the direction of the element normal. The y
direction is normal to x and z. Positive y is determined by the cross product of the z and x axes
and always points into the element. The MSC.Nastran entries generated, depend on the element
type.
For the element variable type, a field reference is evaluated at all element nodes lying on the
edge.
Input Data
Description
Edge Distributed Load

(f1,f2,f3)
For axisymmetric solid elements (CTRIAX6), the PA, PB, and

THETA fields on the PLOADX1 entry are defined. For other 2D
elements, the input vector is interpreted as load per unit length
and converted into equivalent nodal loads (FORCE entries).
Edge Distributed
Moment (m1,m2,m3)
For 2D shell elements, the input vector is interpreted as moment

per unit length and converted into equivalent nodal moments
(MOMENT entries).
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
2.10
Load Cases
Load cases in MSC.Patran are used to group a series of load sets into one load environment for
the model. Load cases are selected when defining an analysis job. The usage within
MSC . Nastran is similar. The individual load sets are translated into MSC .Nastran load sets, and
the load cases are used to create the SUBCASE commands in the Case Control Section.
For information on how to define multiple static and/or transient load cases, see Load Cases
Application (Ch. 5) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.
MSC.Patran

hp, 2
2.11
Defining Contact Regions

The MSC . Nastran preference supports 3D slideline contact functionality introduced in
MSC . Nastran Version 68. This capability allows the user to model contact between 2D and 3D
structural regions or rigid bodies.
This functionality can be accessed by using in the Loads/BCs Application in MSC.Patran. After
selecting the Contact Object on the main form, the first step is to define the regions that may
come into contact. Pushing the Application Region button brings up the following form.
Application Region
Geometry Filter
Geometry
Master Surface:
Slide Line
Slave Surface:
Slide Line
Active Region:
Master
One or more curves, surface edges, or solid edges are

defined for the Master and Slave application regions.
The application region can only contain geometric
entities. To model contact between FEM entities
without associated geometry, curves must first be
created from the nodes using the tools available in the
Geometry application.
Toggles the select box between Master and Slave

regions. The Master and Slave application
regions can be defined in either order.
Select Curves
Select the curve or edge.
Add
Remove
Master Region
Adds the entities in the Select Curves databox to either

the Master Region or Slave Region depending on the
setting of the Active Region option menu.
Slave Region
OK
Clear
CHAPTER 2
Building A Model
Contact
The second step is to define a set of properties of these contacting surfaces. This is done by
pushing the Input Data button on the main Application form to bring up the following
subordinate form.
Input Data
Penetration Type:
If the Penetration Type is One Sided, nodes in

the Slave Region are not allowed to penetrate
the segments of the Master Region. If Two
Sided, in addition, nodes in the Master
Region are not allowed to penetrate
segments of the Slave Region. This is the
PTYPE field on the BCONP entry.
One Sided
Friction Coefficient (MU1)
Stiffness in Stick (FSTIF)
Coefficient of static friction between the two

surfaces. This is the MU1 field on the BFRIC
entry.
Penalty Stiffness Scaling Factor (SFAC)

FSTIF on the BFRIC entry and SFAC on the
BCONP entry are penalty parameters in the
contact formulation. The default values are
usually adequate.
1.0
Slideline Width (W1)
Slideline Width is constant along the slideline

and is used to determine the area for contact
stress calculation. This is the Wi field on the
BFRIC entry.
A Vector Pointing from Master to Slave Surface
OK
Reset
A vector must be defined which lies in the

contact plane and points from the Master
region to the Slave region. This vector is
used to define the coordinate system on the
BCONP entry and the BLSEG entries for
each region.
CHAPTER
Running an Analysis
Review of the Analysis Form

Translation Parameters
Solution Types
Direct Text Input
Solution Parameters
Subcases
Subcase Parameters
Output Requests
Select Superelements
Select Explicit MPCs...
Subcase Select
Restart Parameters
Optimize
Interactive Analysis
3.1
Review of the Analysis Form

The Analysis form appears when the Analysis toggle, located on the MSC.Patran mainform, is
chosen. To run an analysis, or to create a NASTRAN input file, select Analyze as the Action on
the Analysis form. Other forms brought up by the Analysis form are used to define translation
parameters, solution type, solution parameters, output requests, and the load cases. These forms
are described on the following pages. For further information see The Analysis Form (p. 8) in
the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Analysis Application.
MSC.Patran

hp, 2
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Analysis Form
This form appears when the Analysis toggle is chosen on the main menu. When preparing for
an analysis run, select Analyze as the Action.
Actions can be set to:
Analysis
Action:
Analyze
Object:
Entire Model
Method:
Analysis Deck
Code: MSC.Nastran:
Type:
Analyze
Optimize
Read Output2
Read Input File
Attach XDB
Delete
Monitor (if MSC.Patran Analysis Manager iis installed).
Abort (if MSC.Patran Analysis Manager iis installed).
Structural
Available Jobs
a
Indicates the selected Analysis Code and Analysis Type, as

defined in the Preferences>Analysis (p. 321) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
List of already existing jobs. If one of these jobs is selected, the

name will appear in the Job Name list box and all parameters for
this job will be retrieved from the database. An existing job can
be submitted again by simply selecting it and pushing Apply. It is
often convenient to select an existing job, modify a few
parameters and push Apply to submit the new job.
Job Name
my_job
Job Description
MSC.Nastran job created on
01-Feb-93 at 14:32:43
Translation Parameters...
Name of job. This name will be used as the base file name for all
resulting MSC.Nastran files and message files.
This text is used to generate the TITLE card in the MSC.Nastran

executive control section.
Solution Type...
Direct Text Input...
Subcases...
Opens the Direct Text Input form which allows the user to
directly enter data for the BULK DATA, Case Control,
Executive Control and File Management sections of the
NASTRAN input file.
Subcase Select...
Analysis Manager...
Apply
Open MSC.Patran Analysis Manager form.
The following table outlines the selections for the Analyze action.
Object
Type
Entire Model
Full Run
Check Run
Analysis Deck
Model Only
Current Group
Full Run
Check Run
Analysis Deck
Model Only
Existing Deck
Full Run
Restart
Full Run
Check Run
Analysis Deck
The Object indicates which part of the model is to be analyzed. There are four choices: Entire
Model, Current Group, Existing Deck, and Restart.
Entire Model is the selected Object if the whole model is to be analyzed.

Current Group is the selected Object if only part of the model is to be analyzed. Create
a group of that part, confirm it is the current group, then select Current Group as the
Object. For more information see The Group Menu (p. 213) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Existing Deck is selected if you wish to simply submit an existing input file to
MSC.Nastran. The jobname appearing in the Job Name listbox is appended with the
suffix .bdf to form the input filename. This file must reside in the current directory.
Restart is selected if you wish to restart an analysis. Currently, restarts are only
supported for the Linear Static (101), Nonlinear Static (106), and Normal Modes (103)
solution types. The Restart Parameters (p. 251) form allows you to specify where to
resume the analysis.
The Type indicates how far the translation is to be taken.The types are listed below:
Full Run is the selected type if an Analysis Deck translation is done, and the resulting
input file is submitted to MSC.Nastran for complete analysis.
Check Run is the selected type if an Analysis Deck translation is done, and the
resulting input file is submitted to MSC.Nastran for a check run only.
Analysis Deck is the selected type if the Model Deck translation is done, plus all load
case, analysis type and analysis parameter data are translated. A complete input file,
ready for MSC.Nastran should be generated.
Model Only is the selected type if a Bulk Data file is created that contains only the
model data including node, element, coordinate frame, element property, material
property, and loads and boundary condition data. The translation stops at that point.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Overview of Analysis Job Definition and Submittal

To submit a single load case, linear static analysis job to MSC.Nastran it is necessary only to click
the Apply button on the main Analysis form. Appropriate defaults and selections will be made
automatically. Other solution types or multiple load cases will require access to one or more
lower-level forms. Several different analysis examples are considered below.
To perform a multiple load case, linear static analysis, it is necessary only to open the Subcase
Select form. Subcases with the same names as the user-defined load case names and with
appropriate defaults can be selected for inclusion in the job. If a change to one or more
parameters for a subcase is desired (e.g., to change an output request), the Subcases... form must
be accessed. Then it is simple to select a subcase and bring up the appropriate form (e.g., Output
Requests) to make changes.
For other analysis types (e.g., Normal Modes), the first step is to bring up the Solution Type form
and make the appropriate selection. A lower-level Solution Parameters form can be accessed
from the Solution Type form to change parameters that affect the overall analysis. Just as for the
linear static case, subcases are automatically created for each defined load case. These can be
selected on the Subcase Select form or modified on the Subcases form.
In the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Interface, a subcase can be thought of as a MSC.Patran load
case with some additional parameters (e.g., Output Requests) associated with it. This association
is further strengthened since the default subcases are created for each load case and have the
same name as their associated load case. In the rest of this document, the terms load case and
subcase will generally be used interchangeably. When a specific form is referenced, Load case
and Subcase will be capitalized.
3.2
This subordinate form appears when the Translation Parameters button is selected.
Specifies format of the MSC.Nastran OUTPUT2

(*.op2) files. Use Text format when the resulting
OUTPUT2 file must be transported between
heterogeneous computer platforms.
Data Output
XDB and Print
Data Output:
Binary
OUTPUT2 Format:
Specifies type of OUTPUT2 commands.

Alter File specifies the use of an external alter file
found on the MSC.Patran file path and following the
msc_v#_sol#.alt naming convention. See Files
(p. 338) for more details. .
P3 Built In
OUTPUT2 Requests:
Defines type of data output. Print specifies output of

data to the MSC.Nastran print file (*.f06). OP2
specifies output of data to a MSC.Nastran OUTPUT2
file (*.op2). XDB specifies output of data to a
MSC.Access database (*.xdb). This is will place a
PARAM, POST, -1 or PARAM, POST, 0 in the input deck
for OP2 or XDB respectively. The default value can be
changed in the settings.pcl file.
P2 Built In specifies use of MSC.Nastran internal

OUTPUT2 commands geared toward PATRAN 2.
Tolerances
Division:
1.0e-08
Numerical:
1.0e-04
Writing:
1.0e-21
P3 Built In option is appropriate only for Database

Runs, see Solution Parameters (p. 183). If Database
Run has been deselected, this option will be set
internally to Alter File.
Bulk Data Format

Card Format:
either
Defines various tolerances used during translation.
Minimum Signif. Digits:
Grid Precision Digits:
1. Division prevents divide-by-zero errors.

2. Numerical determines if two real values are equal.
3. Writing determines if a value is approximately zero
when generating a Bulk Data entry field.
Node Coordinates:
reference frame
MSC.Nastran Version:
70.7
Specifies where to round off a grid point coordinate

before its written out to the bdf file. For example if this
value is specified as 2 the number 1.3398 will be
written out as 1.34.
Number of Tasks:
Represents the number of processors to be used to run
an analysis. It is assumed that the environment is
configured for distributed parallel processing. For a
system with multiple processors, the number of tasks
must be less than or equal to the number of processors. If
the number of tasks is greater than the number of
processors on the system, an error is issued. The multiple
systems processing is only available for IBM if the host list
is provided in the working directory. The hosts can have
single or multiple processors. The analysis uses one
processor per machine if it can, otherwise it uses multiple
processors of the systems in rotation.
Write Properties on Element Entries

Do not Write Continuation Markers
Use Iterative Solver
Numbering Options...
Bulk Data Include File...
OK
Defaults
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Data Output
XDB and Print
Data Output:
P3 Built In
OUTPUT2 Requests:
Defines the type of fields to be used in the Bulk Data

entry. Entry format can be set to small, large, or either.
If either is selected, the Minimum Significant Digits
value is used to determine if the values on a particular
Bulk Data entry can be placed in small fields, or if
large fields are required. The small-field format
consists of Bulk Data entry fields 8 columns wide,
while the large field format is 16 columns wide.
Binary
OUTPUT2 Format:
Tolerances
Division:
1.0e-08
Numerical:
1.0e-04
Writing:
1.0e-21
Determines whether the real number can be written to

a standard (8 character) NASTRAN field or to a double
(16 character) NASTRAN field.
Defines which coordinate frame is used when
generating the grid coordinates. This can be set to
reference frame, analysis frame, or global. This should
not affect the analysis. It only changes the method
used in the grid creation. This determines which
coordinate frame is referenced in the CP field of the
GRID entry.
Bulk Data Format

Card Format:
either
Minimum Signif. Digits:
Grid Precision Digits:
Node Coordinates:
reference frame
70.5
Number of Tasks:
Write Properties on Element Entries
Specifies the version of MSC.Nastran. The version

specified here is used for two purposes: to create the
full name of the ALTER file to be used, and to
determine which Solution Sequence to use. Use only
whole numbers and letters; for example, 66a, 67 and
68; 67.5 is the same as 67. This version number can
be overridden by setting the environment variable
NASTRAN_VERSION.
This option is ON by default. This option can be
turned OFF to write continuation markers for bulk
data entries.
Do not Write Continuation Markers

Use Iterative Solver
Activates the iterative solver for analysis. The

analysis manger does not support this option and
must be disabled when using this option.
Numbering Options...
Bulk Data Include File...
OK
Defaults
Cancel
Invokes the subordinate form, Numbering Options

(p. 178), which defines automatic numbering offsets
and possible syntaxes for encoded IDs.
Invokes the subordinate form, Select File (p. 179), which

allows a file to be selected for inclusion in the Bulk Data
Section of the NASTRAN input file.
Specifies that properties will be written to the element cards for
all elements where it is allowed in MSC.Nastran.
Numbering Options
This form is activated by the Numbering Options button on the Translation Parameters form. It
allows the user to indicate offsets for all IDS to be automatically assigned during translation. For
example, if the user types 100 into the Element Properties Offset box, the numbering of element
properties in the resulting NASTRAN input file will begin at 101.
Numbering Options
Automatic Numbering Offsets:
Element Properties:
Material Properties:
Data Tables:
Load Sets:
Load Cases:
Control Sets:
Rigid Elements:
Scalar Points:
Begin. Contin. Marker:
The Begin. Contin. Marker box allows the

user to specify the continuation of the
mnemonic format used on multiple line, Bulk
Data entries.
A
IDs Encoded in Names allows the user to
activate recognition of IDs encoded into the
name of any named entity, such as a
material.
IDs Encoded in Names:

Number Only
Beginning Number
Trailing Number
Encoded Syntax
Syntax Marker:
OK
Defaults
Cancel
Number Only will recognize and use an ID if,

and only if, the name of the entity is an actual
number like 105. This option is ON by
default.
Beginning Number will recognize an ID if
the number begins the name, such as
52_shell_property. This option is OFF by
default.
Trailing Number will recognize an ID if it
trails the name, such as shell_property_52.
This option is OFF by default.
Encoded Syntax will recognize an ID if it
directly follows the first occurrence of the
specified syntax. For example, with this
option activated and the specified syntax set
to ., the ID assigned to a material given the
name Steel_1027.32 would be 32.
Note that both the MSC.Patran Neutral file reader and the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran input file
reader preserve the IDs of named entities with a . syntax, so that a NASTRAN PSHELL record
of ID 12 will be assigned the name PSHELL.12. This last option allows great continuity
between input model data and output model data. This option is ON by default and the default
Syntax Marker is ..
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Select File
Select File
Filter
/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/*.bdf
Files
Directories
/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/.
ids.bdf
/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/..
ids_1.bdf
/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/clip
north.bdf
Selected Input File

/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/north.bdf
OK
Filter
Cancel
3.3
Solution Types
This subordinate form appears when you select the Solution Type button on the Analysis form.
Use this fom to define the type of analysis and Solution Parameters. Your choice for the Solution
Type will in turn affect additional forms you complete for Solution Parameters (p. 183),
Subcase Parameters (p. 214), and Output Requests (p. 231). See Table 3-1.
Solution Type
MSC.Nastran
Linear Static selects MSC.Nastran Solution Sequence (SOL)

101, 114, 1, or 47 depending on the selected Solution
Parameters. You may select one or more subcases in SOLs 1
and 101.
Solution Type
Nonlinear Static selects Solution Sequence 66 or 106, depending
on the version of MSC.Nastran. Version 66 and below yields SOL
66, and Version 67 and above yields SOL 106. You may select one
or more subcases.
Solution Type:
LINEAR STATIC
NONLINEAR STATIC
NORMAL MODES
Normal Modes selects Solution Sequence 103, 115, 3, or 48

depending on the Solution Parameters. You may select only one
subcase.
BUCKLING
COMPLEX EIGENVALUE
FREQUENCY RESPONSE
TRANSIENT RESPONSE
Complex Eigenvalue selects Solution Sequence 107, 110, 28, or

29 depending on the selected Solution Parameters. You may
select only one subcase.
NONLINEAR TRANSIENT
Formulation:
Nonlinear Transient selects Solution Sequence 99 or 129,

depending on the MSC.Nastran Version. Version 66 and below
yields SOL 99; Version 67 and above yields SOL 129. You may
select only one subcase.
Modal
Solution Parameters...
Solution Sequence:
OK
112
Cancel
Formulation is only visible when you select Complex Eigenvalue,

Frequency Response, or Transient Response. The default
formulation for each is modal.
Brings up a Solution-type-dependent subordinate form that allows
you to specify parameters which apply to the complete solution.
Transient Response selects Solution Sequence 109, 112, 27, or 31 depending on the selected
Solution Parameters. You may specify only one subcase for Solution Sequences 27 or 31. For
Solutions Sequences 109 or 112, multiple subcases may be selected.
Frequency Response selects Solution Sequence 108, 111, 118, 26, or 30 depending on the selected
Solution Parameters. You may specify only one subcase for Solution Sequences 118, 26, or 30. For
Solution Sequences 108 or 111, multiple subcases may be selected.
Buckling selects Solution Sequence 105, 77, or 5 depending on the selected Solution Parameters. Only
one subcase may be selected that defines the static preload. The buckling subcase is automatically
generated. The output requests for this Solution Type are applied to the static preload subcase. The
default output requests for the buckling subcase are displacements and constraint forces.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Table 3-1 Supported MSC.Nastran Solution Sequences

Solution Type
Linear Static
Nonlinear Static
Normal Modes
Buckling
Complex
Eigenvalue
Frequency
Response
Transient
Response
Nonlinear
Transient
Database
Run
Cyclic
Symmetry
MSC.Nastran
Version
Formulation
Solution
Parameter
Settings
Off
Off
On
On
--Off
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
--Off
On
Off
----------
----66 or Below
67 or Above
----
1
47
101
114
66
106
3
48
103
On
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
------Off
-On
--
----Direct
Modal
Direct
Modal
Direct
Modal
Direct
Modal
Direct
Direct
---------------
115
5
77
105
28
29
107
110
26
30
108
111
118
27
Off
On
On
---
------
Modal
Direct
Modal
---
---66 or Below
67 or Above
31
109
112
99
129
3.4
Direct Text Input

This form is used to directly enter entries in the File Management, Executive Control, Case
Control, and BULK DATA sections of the NASTRAN input file. The input file reader also creates
these entries for any unsupported entries in the input deck. If the data is entered by the user the
Write to Input Deck toggle default is ON. If the data comes from the input file reader the default
for the Input Deck toggle is OFF. These entries may be reviewed and edited by the user. If they
should be written to any input files subsequently created by the interface, the appropriate Write
to Input Deck toggle should be set to ON.
Text entered into the Case Control section is written to the input deck before the first subcase.
The Direct Text Input option on the Subcases form should be used to directly enter text within a
subcase definition.
Switches to determine which data section the
MSC.Nastran input would be sent.
Direct Text Input

Bulk Data Section
OK
Saves the current

setting and data for
the four sections
and closes the form.
File Management Section
FMS Write To Input Deck
Executive Control Section
EXEC Write To Input Deck
Case Control Section
CASE Write To Input Deck
Bulk Data Section
BULK Write To Input Deck
Clear
Clears the current

form.
Reset
Resets the form

back to the data
values it had at the
last OK.
Cancel
Resets all four forms

back to its previous
value and closes the
form.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
3.5
Solution Parameters
Linear Static
This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution
Type form when Linear Static is selected. Depending on the setting of the Database Run and
Cyclic Symmetry parameters, this Solution Type will generate a SOL 101, 114, 1, or 47 input file.
Indicates whether a Structured Solution Sequence (SOL 101 or 114) is to be used or a Rigid Format (SOL
1 or 47). If selected, a Structured Solution Sequence is selected.
Solution Parameters
Static Solution Parameters
Indicates that this model is a sector of a
cyclically repeating part (SOL 114 or
47).
Database Run
Cyclic Symmetry
Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is

requested, so that MSC.Nastran will
automatically constrain model
singularities.
Automatic Constraints
Inertia Relief
Alternate Reduction
Indicates that the inertia relief flags are to

be set by including the PARAM, INREL,-1
command. This flag can only be chosen if
Database Run is selected and Cyclic
Symmetry is disabled. If inertia relief is
selected, a node-ID for weight generation
must be selected. A PARAM, GRDPNT
and a SUPORT command will be written
to the input file using the same node-ID
selected for weight generation. The
SUPORT card will specify all 6 degrees of
freedom.
Shell Normal Tol. Angle =

Lumped
Mass Calculation:
None
Data Deck Echo:

Plate Rz Stiffness Factor =
0.0
Maximum Printed Lines =
500000
Maximum Run Time =
10
Wt.-Mass Conversion =
1.0
Node i.d. for Wt. Gener. =

Max p-Adaptive Cycles =
OK
Defaults
Cancel
Indicates that an alternate method of performing the static condensation is desired.

The PARAM, ALTRED,YES command is included if selected and if Database Run is
also selected.
The table outlines the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry selections, and the SOL types that will
be used.
Database Run
Cyclic Symmetry
SOL
On
Off
101
On
On
114
Off
Off
Off
On
47
This is a list of the data input available for defining the Static Solution Parameters that were not
shown on the previous page.
Parameter Name
Description
Shell Normal
Tolerance Angle
Indicates that MSC.Nastran will define grid point normals for a

Faceted Shell Surface based on the Tolerance Angle. This data
appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry.
Mass Calculation
Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within

MSC.Nastran. This controls the setting of the COUPMASS
parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or
Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1;
otherwise, it will be set to Defines how the mass matrix is to be
treated within -1.
Data Deck Echo
Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the
MSC.Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the
ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of
three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.
Plate Rz Stiffness Factor
Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell

elements. This defines the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate
method to suppress the grid point singularities and is intended
primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.
Maximum Printed Lines
Limits the size of the MSC.Nastran print file that will be

generated. This defines the setting of the MAXLINES case control
command.
Maximum Run Time
Limits the amount of CPU time, expressed in CPU minutes, that

can be used by this run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs.
This defines the setting of the TIME executive control statement.
Wt-Mass Conversion
Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass

measures. This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Parameter Name
Description
Node ID for Wt. Gener.
Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight
Generator. This is the GRDPNT parameter.
Max p-Adaptive Cycles
For p-element analysis, this is the maximum number of adaptive

analysis that will be performed. If the adaptive analysis
converges before this number of cycles is reached, the run will
terminate normally.
Nonlinear Static
Type form, when Nonlinear Static is selected. If the MSC.Nastran version specified is Version 66
or lower, then Solution Sequence (SOL) 66 will be employed. However, if the MSC.Nastran
version specified is version 67 or higher, then Solution Sequence 106 will be employed. For more
information about specification of the MSC.Nastran version number, see the Translation
Parameters (p. 176) form.
Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested. MSC.Nastran will automatically
constrain model singularities.
Solution Parameters
Indicates that displacements, which can
cause a difference in the formulation of
the stiffness matrix, may be
encountered. Therefore, the stiffness
matrix may need to be periodically
recomputed based on the displaced
shape.
Nonlinear Static Solution Parameters

Large Displacements
Follower Forces
Indicates, as the part deflects, that the

applied forces will remain aligned with
the deformed part rather than
maintaining their global orientation. This
can only be selected if Large
Displacements is also selected.
Coupled
Mass Calculation:
None
Data Deck Echo:

100.0
500000
Maximum Run Time =
10
1.0
OK
Defaults
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
The following table outlines the selections for Large Displacements and Follower Forces, and the
altered LGDISP parameter setting for each.
Large Displacements
Follower Forces
LGDISP
Off
On
-1
On
On
On
Off
This is a list of the data input, available for defining the Nonlinear Static Solution Parameters, that
were not shown on the previous page.
Parameter Name
Description
Mass Calculation

Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1,
otherwise, it will be set to -1.
Data Deck Echo
Indicates how the data file entry card images are to be printed in
the MSC.Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the


generated. This defines the setting of the MAXLINES Case
Control command.
Maximum Run Time
Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that

This defines the setting of the TIME Executive Control statement.
Wt-Mass Conversion

Normal Modes
This subordinate form appears whenever the Solution Parameters is selected on the Solution
Type form when Normal Modes is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 103, 115, 3, or 48
input file, depending on the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry parameters below.
Indicates whether a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 103 or 115) is to be
used or a Rigid Format (SOL 3 or 48). If Database Run is selected, a Structured
Solution Sequence will be selected.
Solution Parameters
Static Solution Parameters
Indicates that this model is a sector of
a cyclically repeating part (SOL 115 or
48).
Database Run
Cyclic Symmetry
Indicates that an AUTOSPC card is

automatically constrain model
singularities.

Lumped
Mass Calculation:
None
Data Deck Echo:

0.0
500000
Maximum Run Time =
10
1.0

Max p-Adaptive Cycles =
See Real Eigenvalue Extraction

(p. 191). If the version is Version 68
and the solution sequence is SOL 103,
then these controls are selectable on
the Normal Modes Subcase
Parameters (p. 221) form.
Eigenvalue Extraction...
Dynamic Reduction...
See Dynamic Reduction

Parameters (p. 193).
OK
Defaults
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry, and the
altered SOL type for each.
Database Run
Cyclic Symmetry
SOL
On
Off
103
On
On
115
Off
Off
Off
On
48
This is a list of data input, available for defining the Normal Modes Solution Parameters, that
Parameter Name
Description
Shell Normal
Tolerance Angle

Mass Calculation

Data Deck Echo


Control command.
Maximum Run Time

can be used by this run (used to prevent runaway jobs). This
defines the setting of the TIME Executive Control statement.
Wt-Mass Conversion

Eigenvalue Extraction
Brings up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the

eigenvalue extraction controls. If the version is 68 and the
solution sequence is SOL 103, then these controls are selectable at
the subcase level.
Dynamic Reduction
Brings up the Dynamic Reduction Parameters form for defining

the dynamic reduction controls.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Real Eigenvalue Extraction

This subordinate form appears when the Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the Normal
Modes, Frequency Response, or Transient Response Solution Parameters forms. It also appears
when the Real Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the Complex Eigenvalue Solution
Parameter form. Use this form to create either EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.
Defines the method to use to extract the real eigenvalues. This parameter can be
set to any one of the following: Lanczos, Automatic Givens, Automatic
Householder, Modified Givens, Modified Householder, Givens, Householder,
Enhanced Inverse Power, or Inverse Power. If this selection is set to Lanczos, an
EIGRL Bulk Data entry should be created. Otherwise, this defines the setting of
the METHOD field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.
REAL EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION
Extraction Method:
Lanczos
Frequency Range of Interest

Defines the lower and upper limits to the
range of frequencies to be examined.
These are the F1 and F2 fields on the
EIGR Bulk Data entry or the V1 and V2
fields on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.
Lower =
Upper =
Estimated Number of Roots =
100
Number of Desired Roots =
Indicates an estimate of the number of

eigenvalues to be located. This parameter
can only be specified if Extraction Method
is set to Enhanced Inverse Power or
Inverse Power. This is the NE field on the
EIGR Bulk Data entry.
10
Diagnostic Output Level:
Results Normalization
Normalization Method:
Mass
Normalization Point =
Normalization Component:
OK
Cancel
This is a list of data input available for defining the Real Eigenvalue Extraction that was not
Parameter Name
Description
Number of Desired Roots
Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed.

This is the ND field on the EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.
Diagnostic Output Level
Defines the level of desired output. This can take any integer
value between 0 and 3. This parameter can only be specified if
Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the MSGLVL field on
the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.
Normalization Method
Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be done.

This parameter can take one of three settings: Mass, Maximum,
or Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method
is set to Lanczos. Defines the setting of the NORM field on the
Normalization Point
Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This can only

be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This
parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to
Lanczos. This is the G field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.
Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization

Point to be used. This can only be selected if Normalization
Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if
Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the C field on the
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Dynamic Reduction Parameters

This subordinate form appears when the Dynamic Reduction button is selected on the Normal
Modes, Complex Eigenvalue, Frequency Response, or Transient Response Solution Parameters
forms. Use this form to create the DYNRED Bulk Data entry.
Dynamic Reduction
A flag that indicates whether or not any

dynamic reduction is desired.
Dynamic Reduction Parameters:

Perform Dynamic Reduction
Indicates the maximum frequency to be

considered when performing dynamic
reduction. This parameter can only be
selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction is
set to ON. This is the FMAX field.
Highest Frequency of Interest =

250
Method:
Automatic
Number of Generalized Coordinates =

100
Number of Needed Scalar Points =
100
OK
Cancel
Indicates which method is to be used in

selecting coordinates. This parameter can
be set to either Automatic or Manual. This
parameter can only be selected if Perform
Dynamic Reduction is set to ON. This
determines if the program will automatically
select the number of generalized
coordinates.
Indicates the number of scalar points that must be retained in this dynamic
reduction. This parameter can only be selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction is set
to ON and Method of Coordinate Selection is set to Manual. The Application
Preference will automatically create this many SPOINTs, and place them in the aset and the q-set.
Defines the number of generalized coordinates to be included in the dynamic
reduction. This parameter can only be selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction is
set to ON, and Method of Coordinate Selection is set to Manual. This is the
NQDES field.
Buckling
This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters is selected on the Solution Type
form when Buckling is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 105, 77, or 5 input file,
depending on the setting of the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry parameters.
Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MSC.Nastran
will automatically constrain model singularities.
Solution Parameters
Indicates whether a Structured
Solution Sequence (SOL 105) is to be
used or a Rigid Format or unstructured
Solution Sequence (SOL 5 or 77). If
Database Run is selected, a
Structured Solution Sequence will be
selected.
Buckling Solution Parameters

Database Run
Cyclic Symmetry
Coupled
Mass Calculation:
Indicates that this model is a sector

of a cyclically repeating part.
None
Data Deck Echo:

0.0
500000
Maximum Run Time =
10
1.0

See Real Eigenvalue
Extraction (p. 191).
OK
Defaults
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry, and the
altered SOL type for each.
Database Run
Cyclic Symmetry
SOL
On
Off
105
On
On
77
Off
Off
This is a list of data input available for defining the Buckling Solution Parameters that were not
Parameter Name
Description
Mass Calculation

Data Deck Echo
Indicates how the data deck card images are to be printed in the


Control command.
Maximum Run Time

Wt-Mass Conversion

Brings up the Buckling Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining

the eigenvalue extraction controls.
Buckling Eigenvalue Extraction

This subordinate form appears when the Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the
Buckling Solution Parameters form. Use this form to create either EIGB or EIGRL Bulk Data
entries, depending on the selected extraction method.
Defines the method to use to extract the buckling eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any
one of the following: Lanczos, Enhanced Inverse Power, or Inverse Power. If Lanczos is selected,
an EIGRL entry will be created. If Inverse Power or Enhanced Inverse Power are selected, and
EIGB entry will be created with the METHOD field set to either INV or SINV specified, respectively.
BUCKLING EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION
Extraction Method:
Lanczos
Eigenvalue Range of Interest

range of eigenvalues to be examined. These
are the L1 and L2 fields on the EIGB entry or
the V1 and V2 fields on the EIGRL entry.
Lower =
Upper =

eigenvalues to be located. This parameter can
only be specified if Extraction Method is set to
Inverse Power. This is the NEP field on the
EIGB entry.
2
1
Number of Desired Positive Roots =
1
Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to

be computed. This value can only be selected
if Extraction Methods set to Lanczos. This is
the NP field on the EIGRL entry.
Number of Desired Negative Roots =

1
Maximum
OK
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
This is a list of data input, available for defining the Buckling Eigenvalue Extraction, that was not
Parameter Name
Description
Number of Desired Positive Indicates the limit to how many positive eigenvalues to be
Roots
computed. This value can only be selected if Extraction Method is
set to Inverse Power or Enhanced Inverse Power. This is the NDP
field on the EIGB entry.
Number of Desired
Negative Roots
Indicates the limit to how many negative eigenvalues to be

computed. This value cannot be selected if Extraction Method is
set to Inverse Power or Enhanced Inverse Power. This is the NDN
field on the EIGB entry.
value in the range of 0 through 3. This parameter can only be
specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the
MSGLVL field on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.

This parameter can take one of two settings: Maximum or Point.
This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to
Lanczos. This is the NORM field on the EIGB entry.
Normalization Point

Lanczos. This is the G field on the EIGB entry.

Point to be used. This, too, can only be selected if Normalization
EIGB entry.
Complex Eigenvalue
This subordinate form appears when you select Solution Parameters/Complex Eigenvalue on
the Solution Type form. When you specify the Database Run and Formulation parameters (from
the Solution Type form), MSC.Patran generates a SOL 107, 110, 28, or 29 input file.
If you select Database Run, a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 107 or
110) will be selected. If you deselect Database Run a Rigid Format Solution
Sequence (SOLs 28 or 29) will be selected.
Solution Parameters
Complex Eigenvalue Solution Parameters
Database Run
Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is
constrain model singularities.
Lumped
Mass Calculation:
None
Data Deck Echo:

0.0
999999999
Maximum Run Time =
600
1.0

Struct. Damping Coeff. =
See Complex Eigenvalue

Complex Eigenvalue...
See Real Eigenvalue

Real Eigenvalue...

OK
Defaults
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Formulation, and the altered
SOL type for each.
Database Run
Formulation
SOL
On
Direct
107
On
Modal
110
Off
Direct
28
Off
Modal
29
This is a list of data input available for defining the Complex Eigenvalue Solution Parameters that
was not shown on the previous page.
Parameter Name
Description
Shell Normal
Tolerance Angle

Mass Calculation

Data Deck Echo


Control command.
Maximum Run Time

Wt-Mass Conversion

Struct. Damping Coeff.
Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the

G parameter (e.g., PARAM, G, value).
Parameter Name
Description
Complex Eigenvalue
Brings up the Complex Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining

the complex eigenvalue extraction controls.
Real Eigenvalue
Brings up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the

real eigenvalue extraction controls.
Dynamic Reduction
Brings up the Dynamic Reduction Parameters form for defining

the dynamic reduction controls.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Complex Eigenvalue Extraction

This subordinate form appears when the Complex Eigenvalue button is selected on the Complex
Eigenvalue Solution Parameters form. Use this form to create an EIGC Bulk Data entry.
COMPLEX EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION
Extraction Method:
Complex Lanczos
Search Region
Alpha of Point A =
Omega of Point A =
Alpha of Point B =
10
Omega of Point B =
10
Width of Region =
Defines the method to use to extract the

complex eigenvalues. This parameter can be
set to any one of the following: Complex
Lanczos, Upper Hessenberg, Inverse Power,
or Determinate. This defines the setting of
the METHOD field.
Defines the real component of the beginning
of lines in the complex plane. These values
cannot be selected if Extraction Method is
set to Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real
values. They are the ALPHAAJ fields.
Defines the real component of the end of

lines in the complex plane. These values
cannot be selected if Extraction Method is
set to Complex Lanczos or Upper
Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They
are the ALPHABJ fields.

50
10
Maximum
OK
Cancel
Defines the imaginary component of the beginning of lines in the complex plane.
These values cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Upper
Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are the OMEGAAJ fields.
This is a list of data input available for defining the Complex Eigenvalue Extraction that was not
Parameter Name
Description
Omega of B Points
Defines the imaginary component of the end of lines in the

complex plane. These values cannot be selected if Extraction
Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a
list of real values. They are the OMEGABJ fields.
Width of Regions
Defines the width of the region in the complex plane. This value
cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex
Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They
are the LJ fields.
Estimated Number of
Roots
Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues to be located

within the specified region. This value cannot be selected if
Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Upper
Hessenberg. This is a list of integer values. They are the NEJ
fields.
Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed

within the specified region. This value cannot be selected if
Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Upper
Hessenberg. This is a list of integer values. They are the
NDJ fields.

This parameter can take one of two settings: Maximum or Point.
This is the NORM field on the EIGC entry.
Normalization Point
Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This is the

G field on the EIGC bulk data entry.

Point to be used. This can only be selected if Extraction Method is
set to Inverse Power or Determinate. This is the C field on the
EIGC Bulk Data entry.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Frequency Response
This subordinate form appears when you select Solution Parameters/Frequency Response on
the Solution Type form. MSC.Patran generates a SOL 108, 111, 118, 26, or 30 input file when you
specify the Database Run, Cyclic Symmetry, and Formulation parameters (from the Solution
Type form).
If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 108,
111, 118) will be selected. If Database Run is deselected, a Rigid Format
(SOLs 26 or 30) will be selected.
Solution Parameters
Complex Eigenvalue Solution Parameters
Database Run
Indicates that this model is a sector of a

cyclically repeating part, and the
appropriate flags will be set. This can only
be set if Database Run is selected and
Formulation is set to Direct (SOL 118).
Cyclic Symmetry
Residual Vector Computation
Residual Vector Computation requests

the computation of residual vectors from
applied loads. By default the residual
vectors are not computed.

Coupled
Mass Calculation:
None
Data Deck Echo:

0.0
500000
Maximum Run Time =
10
1.0

See Real Eigenvalue Extraction
(p. 191).
OK
Defaults
See Dynamic Reduction Parameters

(p. 193).
Cancel
The following table outlines the selections for Database Run, Formulation, and Cyclic Symmetry
parameters, and the altered SOL type for each.
Database Run
Formulation
Cyclic Symmetry
SOL
On
Direct
Off
108
On
Direct
On
118
On
Modal
--
111
Off
Direct
--
26
Off
Modal
--
30
This is a list of data input, available for defining the Frequency Response Solution Parameters that
Parameter Name
Description
Shell Normal
Tolerance Angle

Indicates that an AUTOSPC card is requested, so that

MSC.Nastran will constrain model singularities.
Mass Calculation

Data Deck Echo


Control command.
Maximum Run Time

Wt-Mass Conversion

CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Parameter Name
Description

G parameter (e.g., PARAM, G, value).
Calls up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form that is used to

define the eigenvalue extraction controls. These parameters can
only be specified if Formulation is set to Modal.
Dynamic Reduction
Calls up another form that is used to define the dynamic

reduction controls. These parameters can only be specified if
Formulation is set to Modal.
Transient Response
This subordinate form appears when you select Solution Parameters/Tranisent Response on the
Solution Type form. MSC.Patran generates a SOL 109, 112, 27, or 31 input file, when you specify
Database Run and Formulation parameters (from the Solution Type form).
Solution Parameters
Transient Solution Parameters
If Database Run is selected, a

Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs
109, 112) will be selected. If Database
Run is deselected, a Rigid Format
(SOLs 27 or 31) will be selected.
Database Run
Residual Vector Computation requests

the computation of residual vectors from
applied loads. By default the residual
vectors are not computed.
Residual Vector Computation

Lumped
Mass Calculation:
None
Data Deck Echo:

0.0
999999999
Maximum Run Time =
600
1.0

W3, Damping Factor =
These options are only available for a
"Modal" solution.
OK
Defaults
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Formulation, and the altered
SOL type for each.
Database Run
Formulation
SOL
On
Direct
109
On
Modal
112
Off
Direct
27
Off
Modal
31
This is a list of data input available for defining the Transient Solution Parameters that was not
Parameter Name
Description
Shell Normal
Tolerance Angle

Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that

MSC.Nastran will constrain model singularities.
Mass Calculation
Defines how the mass matrix will be treated within

Data Deck Echo


Control command.
Maximum Run Time

Wt-Mass Conversion

Parameter Name
Description

G parameter (e.g., PARAM, G, value.)
W3, Damping Factor

W4, Damping Factor1
Defines W3 and W4 parameters. These parameters alter the

damping characteristics of the model.
Calls up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form that is used to

define the eigenvalue extraction controls. These parameters can
Dynamic Reduction
Calls up the Dynamic Reduction Parameters form that is used to

define the dynamic reduction controls. These parameters can
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Nonlinear Transient
Type form when Nonlinear Transient is selected. Use this form to generate either a SOL 99 or a
SOL 129 input file, depending on the version of MSC.Nastran indicated on the translation
parameter form. Version 66 and below yields SOL 99 and Version 67 and above yields SOL 129.
Indicates that an AUTOSPC card is requested, so that MSC.Nastran
will constrain model singularities.
Solution Parameters
Nonlinear Transient Solution Parameters
Defines how the mass matrix is to be
treated within MSC.Nastran. This controls
the setting of the COUPMASS parameter.
This parameter can be set to either
Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled,
COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise,
it will be set to -1.
Large Displacements
Follower Forces
Coupled
Mass Calculation:
None
Data Deck Echo:

100.0
500000
Maximum Run Time =
10
1.0
Indicates how the data file entry images

are to be printed in theMSC.Nastran print
file. This controls the setting used for the
ECHO Case Control command. This
parameter can have one of three
settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.

OK
Defaults
Cancel
This is a list of data input available for defining the Nonlinear Transient Solution Parameters that
was not shown on the previous page.
Parameter Name
Description


Control command.
Maximum Run Time

Wt-Mass Conversion


G parameter (e.g., PARAM, G, value.)
W3, Damping Factor

W4, Damping Factor
Define W3 and W4 parameters. These parameters alter the

damping characteristics of the model.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
3.6
Subcases
This form appears when the Subcases button is selected on the Analysis form. The subcase is the
MSC.Nastran mechanism for associating loads and boundary conditions, output requests, and
various other parameters to be used during part of a complete run. In runs involving
superelements, operations on specific superelements can be carried out in different subcases.
The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface automatically associates default parameters and output
requests with each MSC.Patran load case to create a subcase with the same name as the load case.
You can access the Subcase Parameters and Output Requests forms to view or modify these
defaults. You can access the Select Superelements form to include already-created
superelements in this analysis job.
Subcases
Options are Create, Delete, and
Global Data.
Solution Sequence: 101

Create
Action
Displays all the available subcases

associated with the current Solution
Sequence.
Available Subcases
Default
Second-Load-Case
Pressure-Case
3-g-Pullup
The subcase name that is being created or

modified is displayed in this databox. It can be
typed in or picked from the Available
Subcases listbox.
Subcase Name
Default
Subcase Description
Displays the description of the current

subcase. The description can be
256 characters long. This is used to generate
the SUBTITLE entry.
This is the default subcase
Available Load Cases

Default
Second-Load-Case
Pressure-Case
3-g-Pullup
Displays all the available loadcases in the

current database. Only one loadcase can be
selected per subcase. For Normal Modes and
Complex Eigenvalue solution types, free-free
runs can be generated by using an empty load
case.
Subcase Options
Subcase Parameters...
Output Requests...
Select Superelements...
Apply
Cancel
Deleting Subcases
To delete subcases, select Subcases from the Analysis form, and set the Action to Delete.
Subcases
Action
Delete
Select Subcases
Default
Second-Load-Case
Pressure-Case
3-g-Pullup
Select the subcase(s) to delete.
Apply to delete the selected subcases.
Apply
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Editing Subcases
To edit global data for subcases, select Subcases from the Analysis form, and set the Action to
Global Data. The following form appears.
Subcases
Action
Global Data
Select Subcases
Default
Second-Load-Case
Pressure-Case
3-g-Pullup
Select Subcase(s) to edit associated data.
Subcase Options
Use
Use Output Requests... to
to edit the
the output
output
requests
requests associated with
with the selected
selected
subcases.
subcases. The
The Edit
Edit Output
Output Request form
form
appears. See Edit Output Requests Form
(p. 242).
Output Requests...
Apply changes the output requests for all

selected subcases. Cancel closes the form
without changes.
Apply
Cancel
3.7
Subcase Parameters
The subcase parameters represent the settings in MSC.Nastran Case Control that take effect
within a subcase and do not affect the analysis in other subcases. Currently, the following
solution sequences have subcase parameters associated with them.
Solution Sequences
Other Conditions
Description
Linear Static Subcase

Parameters (p. 215)
SOL 101
Model has p-elements

and utilizes Version 68
Selects the subcase to

participate in the error
analysis calculations in an
adaptive analysis. By default
the subcase participates in the
error analysis.
Nonlinear Static Subcase

Parameters (p. 216)
None
Selects nonlinear static

iteration parameters.
Subcases Nonlinear Transient

Subcase Parameters (p. 219)
SOL 129, 99
None
Selects nonlinear transient

iteration parameters.
Normal Modes Subcase

Parameters (p. 221)
SOL 103
Version 68
Selects real eigenvalue

extraction parameters.
SOL 106, 66
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Linear Static Subcase Parameters

This form is available for solution sequence 101 for MSC.Nastran Version 68 and for models that
contain p-elements. The form allows the inclusion of subcases in the error analysis. This toggle
sets the ADACT Case Control command.
Subcase Parameters
Perform Error Analysis
OK
Cancel
Nonlinear Static Subcase Parameters

This subordinate form appears when the Subcase Parameters button is selected on the Subcases
form when the solution type is Nonlinear Static. This form allows the definition of the
parameters that control the interation criteria for a Nonlinear Static analysis. All of the data is
part of the NLPARM Bulk Data entry. If Arc-Length Method is selected, additional data for the
NLPCI bulk data entry is generated.
Defines the number of increments to be used to apply
the full load. This is the NINC field.
Subcase Parameters
Static Nonlinear Iterations
Number of Load Increments =
Matrix Update Method:
10
Automatic
Number of Iterations per Update =
Allowable Iterations per Increment =
25
Defines what method to use to control

the stiffness. Matrix updates as the load
is incrementally applied. This parameter
can have one of three settings:
Automatic, Semi-Automatic, or
Controlled Iter. This defines the setting
of the KMETHOD field.
Defines the number of iterations to be
used after each matrix update. This is
the KSTEP field.
Convergence Criteria
Displacement Error
Displacement Tolerance =
1.0e-03
Defines the limit for the number of

iterations that can be done in any given
increment. This is the MAXITER field.
Load Error
0.01
Load Tolerance =
Work Error
0.01
Work Tolerance =
Opens a subordinate form to activate

the Arc-Length Method which is turned
OFF by default. The Arc-Length Method
is used to explore post-buckling paths.
Arc-Length Method ...

Normal Modes
Normal Modes
OK
Activates a normal mode analysis of

the prestressed system at the end of
the subcase.
Buckling
Activates a buckling analysis at the end

of the subcase.
Buckling
Cancel
Opens subordinate form to define

eigenvalue extraction parameters.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
This is a list of data input available for defining the Static Nonlinear Iterations that was not
Parameter Name
Description
Displacement Error
Displacement Tolerance
Indicates whether a displacement convergence criteria should be

used. If Displacement Error is selected, the Displacement
Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance
on displacements. The displacement tolerance must be met
between iterations to define convergence. If Displacement Error
is selected, a U is entered in the CONV field. The Displacement
Tolerance is the EPSU field.
Load Error
Load Tolerance
Indicates whether a load convergence criteria should be used. If

Load Error is selected, the Load Tolerance field becomes active.
This value defines the tolerance on load equilibrium. The load
equilibrium tolerance must be met between iterations to define
convergence. If Load Error is selected, a P is entered in the CONV
field. Load Tolerance is the EPSP field.
Work Error
Work Tolerance
Indicates whether a work convergence criteria should be used. If

Work Error is selected, the Work Tolerance field becomes active.
This value defines the tolerance on work error. The work
tolerance must be met between iterations to define convergence.
If Work Error is selected, a W is entered in the CONV field. Work
Tolerance is the EPSW field.
Arc-Length Method Parameters

This subordinate form appears when the Arc-Length Method button is selected on the Subcase
Parameters form. This form allows the definition of parameters that control the Arc-Length
Method. All of the data is part of the NLPCI bulk data entry.
Defines the type of Arc-Length Method:
CRIS = Crisfield method (default)
RIKS = Riks method
MRIKS = modified Riks method
Arc-Length Method Parameters

Use Arc-Length Method
CRIS
Constraint type:
Min. Adjust. ratio (MINALR) =
0.25
Max. Adjust. ratio (MAXALR) =
4.00
Scale Facter (W) =
0.0
Convergence Iterations =
12
Max. controlled Increment Steps =
OK
Defaults
20
Minimum allowable arc-length

adjustment ratio between increments for
the adaptive arc-length method
0.0MINALR1.0.
Maximum allowable arc-length
adjustment ratio between increments for
the adaptive arc-length method
MAXALR1.0.
Scale factor w for arc-length criteria:
w=0, displacement control
w>0, combined load and displacements
control
w1, load control
Cancel
Maximum number of controlled

increment steps allowed within
the subcase. This is the MXINC
field.
Desired number of iterations for

convergence to be used for the adaptive
arc-length adjustments. This is the
DESITER field
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Subcases Nonlinear Transient Subcase Parameters

This subordinate form appears when the Subcase Parameters button is selected on the Subcases
form when the solution type is Nonlinear Transient. All of the data is part of the TSTEPNL Bulk
Data entry.
Subcase Parameters
Ending Time =
1.0
Number of Time Steps =
100
Transient Nonlinear Iterations

Matrix Update Method:
Adaptive
Static Solution
Defines the Ending Time and

Number of Time Steps for the
subcase.
Defines what method to use to control the
stiffness. The Mass matrix updates as the
load is incrementally applied. This
parameter can have one of three settings:
Adaptive, Automatic, or Time Step. This is
the METHOD field.
Number of Time Steps per Update =

2
Defines the number of time steps to be
used in each matrix update. This can only
be set if Matrix Update Method is set to
Time Step. This is the NDT field.
Number of Bisections per Update =

2
Allowable Iterations per Time Step =
10
Defines the limit for the number of

iterations that can be done in any given
increment. This is the MAXITER field.
Convergence Criteria
Displacement Error
Displacement Tolerance =
1.0e-02
Load Error
Load Tolerance =
1.0e-03
Work Error
Work Tolerance =
1.0e-06
Exit on Failure to Converge
OK
Cancel
Defines the maximum number of time step bisections to be used in each

matrix update. This can only be set if Matrix Update Method is set to
Adaptive. This is the MAXBIS field.
This is a list of data input available for defining the Transient Nonlinear Iterations that was not
Parameter Name
Description
Displacement Error
Displacement Tolerance
Indicates whether a displacement convergence criteria should be

used. If Displacement Error is selected, the Displacement
Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance
on displacements that must be met between interactions to define
convergence. If Displacement Error is selected, a U is entered in
the CONV field. The Displacement Tolerance is the EPSU field.
Load Error
Load Tolerance
Indicates whether a load convergence criteria should be used. If

Load Error is selected, the Load Tolerance field becomes active.
This value defines the tolerance on load equilibrium that must be
met between iterations to define convergence. If Load Error is
selected, a P is entered in the CONV field. Load Tolerance is the
EPSP field.
Work Error
Work Tolerance
Indicates whether a work convergence criteria should be used. If

Work Error is selected, the Work Tolerance field becomes active.
This value defines the tolerance on work error that must be met
between iterations to define convergence. If Work Error is
selected, a W is entered in the CONV field. Work Tolerance is the
EPSW field.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Normal Modes Subcase Parameters

The Normal Modes subcase parameters form is available only for Solution 106 for MSC.Nastran
Version 70.7. Use this form to create either EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.
Defines the method to use to extract the real eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any one
of the following: Lanczos, Automatic Givens, Automatic Householder, Modified Givens, Modified
Householder, Givens, Householder, Enhanced Inverse Power, or Inverse Power. If this is set to
Lanczos, this indicates that an EIGRL Bulk Data entry should be created. Otherwise, this
defines the setting of the METHOD field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.
Subcase Parameters
REAL EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION
Extraction Method:
Lanczos
Frequency Range of Interest

Lower =

range of frequencies to be examined.
These are the F1 and F2 fields on the
EIGR Bulk Data entry or the V1 and V2
fields on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.
Upper =
100
10
Mass

eigenvalues to be located. This
parameter can only be specified if
Extraction Method is set to Enhanced
Inverse Power or Inverse Power. This is
the NE field on the EIGR Bulk Data
entry.
Number of Modes in Error Analysis =

10

OK
Cancel
This is a list of data input available for defining the Real Eigenvalue Extraction that was not
Parameter Name
Description
Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed.

This is the ND field on the EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.
value between 0 and 3. This parameter can only be specified if
Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the MSGLVL field on
the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.

This parameter can take one of three settings: Mass, Maximum,
or Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method
is set to Lanczos. Defines the setting of the NORM field on the
Normalization Point

Lanczos. This is the G field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.

Point to be used. This can only be selected if Normalization
Number of Modes in Error Indicates how many modes will participate in the error analysis
Analysis
when the model contains p-elements. This data sets the ADACT
Case Control command.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Transient Response Subcase Parameters

This subordinate form appears when you select Subcase Parameters button on the Subcases
form and the solution type is Transient Response. Use this form to specify the time step interval
and duration for a transient response analysis. All of the data is part of the TSTEP Bulk Data
entry.
Direct Transient Solution
Subcase Parameters
TRANSIENT RESPONSE SOLUTION PARAMETERS
Time Recovery Points
Use this button to define your TSTEP entry.
DEFINE TIME STEPS...
OK
Cancel
Modal Transient Solution

This is the subcase Parameters form for a Modal Transient solution.
Subcase Parameters
TRANSIENT RESPONSE SOLUTION PARAMETERS
Time Recovery Points
Use this button to define your TSTEP entry.
DEFINE TIME STEPS...
Modal Damping
None
DEFINE MODAL DAMPING...
OK
Defaults
Use this button to define your TABDMP1

entry. You must enter at least one value of
frequency and damping on the spreadsheet
for damping to occur.
Cancel
Define Time Step

Use this form to define the time steps in a linear table. Values of Delta-T (Time Increment) must
be positive. See "MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide" TSTEP for more information.
Define Time Step
Input Data
No. of Time Steps

1
100
Delta-T
Skip Factor
1.
The "Skip Factor"

column is optional. If
the column is empty,
MSC.Nastran assumes
the Skip Factor is 1.
3
4
5
6
7
Add Row
OK
Clear All
Delete Row
Defaults
Cancel
No. of Time Steps and Delta-T determine the solution points in

time. The skip factor defines which of the solution points you
wish to perform results processing on. A skip factor of 1
indicates every time step, 2 indicates every other solution step,
etc. Total solution time accumulates in order of entry.
For the example shown, MSC.Nastran will calculate output at
100 time steps ranging between 1. and 100.
"Add Row" adds a row

after the selected row.
To insert a row at the
beginning of the table,
select click on the row
label and select "Add
Row".
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Define Damping
Use this form to define Damping in a linear table. Values of frequency must be positive.
Discontinuities (same value of frequency, different value of damping) are allowed at all
locations except the first and last entries in the table. See "MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide"
TABDMP1 for more information.
Modal Damping does not allow a discontinuity to exist as either the first or last entries in the
modal damping data. This will cause an error in MSC.Nastran. It is strongly recommended that
you do not create such scenario.
If the first and second frequencies (two lowest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will
be issued, even if the damping value for those frequencies are the same. If the last and second to
last frequencies (two highest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even if
the damping value for those frequencies are the same.
Define Damping
Input Data
Frequency
Value
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Add Row
OK
Clear All
Delete Row
Cancel
"Add Row" adds a row after the selected

row. To insert a row at the beginning of the
table, click on the row label and select "Add
Row".
Frequency Response Subcase Parameters

This subordinate form appears when you select the Subcase Parameters button on the Subcases
form and the solution type is Frequency Response. Use this form to specify the frequencies for a
frequency response analysis. All of the data is part of a FREQi Bulk Data entry.
Direct Frequency Solution
This is the Direct Frequency Subcase Parameter Form.
Subcase Parameters
FREQUENCY RESPONSE SOLUTION PARAMETERS
FREQUENCY RECOVERY POINTS
Use this button to define frequencies.
DEFINE FREQUENCIES...
OK
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Use this form to create FREQi entries.

Define Frequencies
Type:
Logarithmic
Input Data
Start Freq.
End Freq.
No. Incr.
0.
250.
100
Add Row
OK
0.
Incr. Type
Logarithmic
Clear All
Delete Row
Defaults
Cancel
"Add Row" adds a row

after the selected row. To
insert a row at the
beginning of the table,
click on the row label and
select "Add Row".
The driving column on this form is the Increment type.

When the
Increment type is...
MSC.Patran...
Discrete
Creates a FREQ entry where Start Freq is the frequency value.

Multiple Discrete rows will be written to the same FREQ card. End
Freq. and No. Incr. columns are not used.
Linear
Creates a FREQ1 entry. The Start Freq. will be the first frequency and
the End Freq. and No. Increments will have a linear progression in
between.
Logarithmic
Creates a FREQ2. Same as Linear, except it will have a logarithmic

progression.
Modal Frequency Solution

This is the subcase Parameters form for a Modal Frequency solution.
Subcase Parameters
FREQUENCY RESPONSE SOLUTION PARAMETERS
FREQUENCY RECOVERY POINTS
Use this button to define
FREQ,FREQ1,FREQ2,FREQ3, FREQ4
entries.
DEFINE FREQUENCIES...
Modal Damping
None
DEFINE MODAL DAMPING...
OK
Defaults
Use this button to define a TABDMP1 entry.

At least one value of frequency and damping
must be entered on the spreadsheet for
damping to occur.
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Define Frequencies
Use this form to create FREQi entries.
Define Frequencies
Logarithmic
Type:
Input Data
0.
Start Freq.
End Freq.
No. Incr.
Incr. Type
0.01
250.
100
Logarithmic
Add Row
Cluster/Spread
Clear All
Delete Row
Defaults
Cancel
OK
"Add Row" adds a row after the selected row. To insert a row at the beginning
of the table, click on the row label and select "Add Row".
The driving column on this form is the Increment type.

When the
Increment Type is...
Discrete
Linear
Logarithmic
Lin. Cluster
MSC.Patran...
Creates a FREQ entry where Start Freq is the frequency value. Multiple
Discrete rows will be written to the same FREQ card. End Freq, No. Incr.
and Cluster/Spread columns are not used.
Creates a FREQ1 entry. The Start Freq. will be the first frequency and the
End Freq. and No. Increments will have a linear progression in between.
The Cluster/Spread column is not used.
Creates a FREQ2. Same as Linear, except it will have a logarithmic
progression.
Creates a FREQ3 with type set to LINEAR. This results in a linear
distribution of solution frequencies between each successive pair of
natural modes in the specified frequency interval. The Cluster value,
which has a default of 1.0 is used to bias the linear distribution of
solution frequencies. A smaller cluster value has a closer spacing
towards the center, CLUSTER greater than 1.0 has a closer spacing at the
ends of the frequency range.
Same as Lin. Cluster except that a logarithmic interpolation is used

between the start and end frequencies.
Creates a FREQ4 entry. The default value of spread is 0.1. The spread is a
fractional amount specified for each mode. With a spread of 0.3 and No.
Incr. of 21, there will be 21 evenly spaced frequencies between 0.7*FN
and 1.3*FN, where FN a natural frequency, for all natural frequencies
between the specified Start Freq and End Freq values.
Log. Cluster
Spread
Define Damping
Use this form to define the damping in a linear table. Values of frequency must be positive.
Discontinuities (same value of frequency, different value of damping) are allowed at all
locations except the first and last entries in the table. See "MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide"
TABDMP1 for more information.
Modal Damping does not allow a discontinuity to exist as either the first or last entry in the
modal damping data. This will cause an error in MSC.Nastran. It is strongly recommended that
you do not create such scenario.
If the first and second frequencies (two lowest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will
be issued, even if the damping values for those frequencies are the same. If the last and second
to last frequencies (two highest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even
if the damping values for those frequencies are the same.
Define Damping
Input Data
Frequency
Value
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Add Row
OK
Clear All
Delete Row
Cancel
"Add Row" adds a row after the selected

row. To insert a row at the beginning of the
table, click on the row label and select "Add
Row".
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
3.8
Output Requests
This allows the definition of what data is desired from the analysis code in the form of results.
The form consists of two formats: Basic and Advanced. The Basic form retains the simplicity of
being able to specify the output requests over the entire model and uses the default settings of
MSC.Nastran Case Control commands. There is a special set defined in MSC.Patran called ALL
FEM. This set represents all nodes and elements associated with Object defined on the Analysis
Form (p. 173). This default set is used for all output requests in the Basic Output Requests
(p. 232) form.
The Advanced version of this form allows the user to vary these default options. Since output
requests have to be appropriate to the type of analysis, the form changes depending on the
solution sequence. The Advanced Output Requests (p. 233) also adds the capability of being
able to associate a given output request to a subset of the model using MSC.Patran groups. This
capability can be used effectively in significantly reducing the results that are created for a
model, optimizing the sizes and translation times of output files. The creation of MSC.Patran
groups are documented in Group>Create (p. 214) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Basic Functions.
The results types that will be brought into MSC.Patran due to any of these requests, are
documented in Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities (p. 277). In that chapter,
tables are presented that correlate the MSC.Nastran results block, and the MSC.Patran primary
and secondary results labels with the various output requests.
Note: Many of the output requests that can be defined on the Output Request forms
currently apply only to the printed values in the MSC.Nastran output file; these result
quantities cannot be imported and postprocessed in MSC.Patran. For guidance on
specific quantities, review Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities
(p. 277).
Basic Output Requests

This form is used to select output requests with their default options. The set is always All FEM,
which means results for all nodes or elements in the model. A default set of output requests is
always preselected.
Output Requests
The available output requests depend on

the active Solution Sequence as
indicated by this value.
SUBCASE NAME: Default

SOLUTION SEQUENCE: 101
Basic
Form Type:
This option menu is used to switch

between the advanced and basic
versions of this form.
Select Result Type

Displacements
Element Stresses
Constraint Forces
Multi-Point Constraints Forces
Element Forces
Applied Loads
Element Strain Energies
Element Strains
This listbox displays the appropriate

result types that may be selected for the
solution sequence indicated at the top of
the form. The output requests are
selected one at a time by clicking.
Output Requests
DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM;BY=0
STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CORNER)=All FEM
SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM
This listbox displays the selected output

requests for the subcase shown at the
top of the form.
ESE=ALL FEM
The Delete button deletes the output

request highlighted in the Output
Requests listbox.
Delete
OK
Defaults
Cancel
Note: The OK button accepts the output requests and closes the form. The
Defaults button deletes all output requests and replaces them with
defaults. The Cancel button closes the form without saving the output
requests.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Advanced Output Requests

This form provides great flexibility in creating output requests. Output requests may be
associated with different groups (SET options in MSC.Nastran) as well as different
superelements1. The output requests available depend on the chosen Solution Types (p. 180),
Solution Parameters (p. 183), and Translation Parameters (p. 176). The Advanced Output
Requests form is sensitive to the Result Type selected. The Form Type, Delete, OK, Defaults, and
Cancel buttons operate exactly like on the Basic Output Requests (p. 232) form.
A description of the output requests and their associated options are listed in Table 3-2 and
Table 3-3.
1At the present time, superelement specifications are allowed only in the structured linear static
solution type (Solution Sequence 101).
This listbox is used to select the group to which

the output requests relate.
Use this listbox to select the result

type to be created.
Output Request
SUBCASE NAME: Default
SOLUTION SEQUENCE: 101
Form Type:
Advanced
Select Result Type

Displacements
Element Stresses
Constraint Forces
Multi-Point Constraints Forces
Element Forces
Applied Loads
Element Strains
Select Group/SET
All FEM
default_group
Options
Output Requests
DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM;BY=0
STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CORNER)=
Sorting:
By Grid Points
Format:
Rectangular
Tensor:
von Mises
Element Points:
Plate Strain Curv:

Composite Plate Opt:
Cubic/Corner
Strcur
Element Stresses
Suppress Print for Result Type

Create
Delete
Adaptive Cycle Output Interval = 0
OK
Defaults
This button creates output requests for highlighted

result types. It also modifies highlighted output
requests. The button label changes to reflect the
operation.
Use this list box to select output requests that are
to be modified or deleted.
Cancel
This databox appears for SOL 101 and 103 when the
model contains p-elements. Other options will be
presented, such as Percent of Step Output and
Intermediate Output Options depending on conditions
listed in Table 3-3.
These are the options that are appropriate to the
highlighted result type. They also indicate the options
that were selected for a highlighted output request. See
Table 3-2.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Table 3-2 Output Request Descriptions
Output Request
Case Control
Command or Bulk
Data Entry
Description
Displacements
DISPLACEMENT
Requests nodal displacements.
Eigenvectors
VECTOR
Requests nodal eigenvectors.
Element Stresses
STRESS
Requests elemental stresses.
Constraint Forces
SPCFORCES
Requests forces of single- point

constraints.
MultiPoint Constraint
Forces
MPCFORCES
Requests forces of multipoint

constraints (for versions 68 or
higher).
Element Forces
FORCE
Requests elemental forces.
Applied Loads
OLOAD
Requests equivalent nodal applied

loads.
Nonlinear Applied Loads
NLLOAD
Requests equivalent nonlinear

applied loads. Sorting and format
options are not allowed with this
request.
ESE
Requests elemental strain energies

and energy densities. No options
are allowed with this output
request.
Element Strains
STRAIN
Requests elemental strains.
Grid Point Stresses
GPSTRESS
Requests stresses at grid points.
Velocities
VELOCITY
Requests nodal velocities.
Accelerations
ACCELERATION
Requests nodal accelerations.
Grid Point Force Balance
GPFORCE
Requests grid point force balance

at nodes. Sorting and format
options are not allowed with this
request.
Grid Point Stress

Discontinuities
GPSDCON
Requests mesh stress

discontinuities based on grid point
stresses.
Element Stress
Discontinuity
ELSDCON
Requests mesh stress

discontinuities based on element
stresses.
Table 3-3 Output Request Form Options
Options
Sorting
Format
Tensor
Element
Points
Label
Case
Control or
Bulk Data
Options
Groups
Multiple
Select
Allowed
Descriptions
By
Nodes/Ele
ments
SORT1
Elements
No
Output is presented as tabular

listing of nodes/elements for
each load, frequency,
eigenvalue, or time.
By
Frequency/
Time
SORT2
Elements
No

listing of frequency/time for
each node or element type.
Rectangular
REAL
Elements
No
Requests real and imaginary

format for complex output.
Polar
PHASE
Elements
No
Requests magnitude and phase

Von Mises
VONMISES
Elements
No
Requests von Mises stresses or

strains.
Maximum
Shear
MAXS
Elements
No
Requests Maximum shear or

Octahedral stresses or strains.
Corner
CORNER
Elements
No
Requests QUAD4 stresses or

strains at the corner grid points
as well as the center.
Strain Gage
SGAGE
Elements
No

as well as the center using the
strain gage approach.
Bilinear
BILIN
Elements
No

as well as the center using
bilinear extrapolation.
Center
CENTER
Elements
No

strains at the center only.
NOCOMPS=
-1, LSTRN =
0 in Bulk
Data
Elements:
Surfaces
No
Composite element ply stresses

and failure indices are
suppressed. Element stresses
for the equivalent
homogeneous element are
output.
NOCOMPS=
1,LSTRN = 0
in Bulk Data
Elements:
Surfaces
No

and failure indices are output.
Model should contain PCOMP
entry defining composites.
Composite
Element
Plate Options Stresses
Ply Stresses
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Table 3-3 Output Request Form Options (continued)
Options
Label
Composite
Ply Strains
Plate Options
Plate Strain
Options
Sorting
Case
Control or
Bulk Data
Options
Groups
Multiple
Select
Allowed
Descriptions
NOCOMPS=
1,LSTRN = 1
in Bulk Data
Elements:
Surfaces
No
Composite element ply strains

and failure indices are output.
Model should contain PCOMP
card defining composites.
Element
and Ply
Stresses
NOCOMPS=
0,LSTRN=0
in Bulk Data
Elements:
Surfaces
No

and failure indices as well as
Element stresses for the
equivalent homogeneous
element are output. Model
should contain PCOMP entry
defining composites.
Element
and Ply
Strains
NOCOMPS=
0,LSTRN=1
in Bulk Data
Elements:
Surfaces
No
Composite element ply strains

and failure indices as well as
Element stresses for the
equivalent homogeneous
element are output. Model
should contain PCOMP entry
defining composites.
Plane &
Curv.
STRCUR
Elements:
Surfaces
No
This option is available for

Element Strains output
requests only. Strains and
curvatures are output at the
reference plane for plate
elements.
Fiber
FIBER
Elements:
Surfaces
No
This option is available for

Element Strains output
requests only. Strains at
locations Z1 and Z2 (specified
under element properties) are
output at the reference plane
for plate elements.
By Nodes
/Elements
SORT1
Nodes
No

listing of nodes/elements for
each load, frequency,
eigenvalue, or time.
By
Frequency/
Time
SORT2
Nodes
No

listing of frequency/time for
each node or element type.
Options
Format
Label
Case
Control or
Bulk Data
Options
Groups
Multiple
Select
Allowed
Descriptions
Rectangular
REAL
Nodes
No
Requests real and imaginary

Polar
PHASE
Nodes
No
Requests magnitude and phase

Output
Coordinate
Coord
COORD CID
Elements:
Surfaces,
Volumes
Yes
Selects the output coordinate

frame for grid point stress
output. Coord 0 is the basic
coordinate frame.
Volume
Output
Both
Blank
Elements:
Volumes
Yes
Requests direct stress, principal

stresses, direction cosines,
mean pressure stress and von
Mises equivalent stresses to be
output.
Principal
PRINCIPAL
Elements:
Volumes
Yes
Requests principal stresses,

direction cosines, mean
pressure stress and von Mises
equivalent stresses to be
output.
Direct
DIRECT
Elements:
Volumes
Yes
Requests direct stress, mean

pressure stress and von Mises
equivalent stresses to be
output.
All
FIBER, ALL
Elements:
Surfaces
Yes
Specifies that grid point

stresses will be output at all
fibre locations, that is at Z1, Z2
and the reference plane. Z1 and
Z2 distances are specified as
element properties (default
Z1=-thickness/2, Z2=
+thickness/2).
Fiber
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Options
Fiber
Normal
Method
Label
Case
Control or
Bulk Data
Options
Groups
Multiple
Select
Allowed
Descriptions
Mid
FIBER, MID
Elements:
Surfaces
Yes

stresses will be output at the
reference plane.
Z1
FIBER, Z1
Elements:
Surfaces
Yes

stresses will be output at
distance Z1 from the reference
plane (default Z1=thickness/2).
Z2
FIBER, Z2
Elements:
Surfaces
Yes

stresses will be output at
distance Z2 from the reference
plane (default
Z2=+thickness/2).
X1
NORMAL
X1
Elements:
Surfaces,
Yes
Specifies the x-axis of the

output coordinate frame to be
the reference direction for the
positive fiber and shear stress
output.
X2
NORMAL
X2
Elements:
Surfaces
Yes
Specifies the y-axis of the

output.
X3
NORMAL
X3
Elements:
Surfaces
Yes
Specifies the z-axis of the

output.
Topological
TOPOLOGICAL
Elements:
Surfaces
Yes
Specifies the topological

method for calculating average
grid point stresses. This is the
default.
Geometric
GEOMETRI
C
Elements:
Surfaces
Yes
Specifies the geometric

interpolation method for
calculating average grid point
stresses. This method should be
used when there are large
differences in slope between
adjacent elements.
Options
Label
Case
Control or
Bulk Data
Options
Groups
Multiple
Select
Allowed
Descriptions
X-axis of
Basic Coord
X1
AXIS, X1
Elements:
Surfaces
Yes
Specifies that the x-axis of the

output coordinate frame
should be used as the x-output
axis and the local x-axis when
geometric interpolation
method is used.
X-axis of
Basic Coord
X2
AXIS, X2
Elements:
Surfaces
Yes
Specifies that the y-axis of the

method is used.
X3
AXIS, X3
Elements:
Surfaces
Yes
Specifies that the z-axis of the

method is used.
Break
BREAK
Elements:
Surfaces
Yes
Treats multiple element

intersections as stress
discontinuities in the geometric
interpolation method.
No Break
NOBREAK
Elements:
Surfaces
Yes
Does not treat multiple element

intersections as stress
discontinuities in the geometric
interpolation method.
Elements:
Surfaces
Yes
Defines the tolerance to be used

for interelement slope
differences. Slopes beyond this
tolerance will signify
discontinuous stresses.
All
Once per
subcase
An integer n that specifies the

percentage of intermediate
outputs to be presented for
transient and nonlinear
transient analyses.
Branch
Tolerance
0.0
TOL=0.0
Percent of
Step Output
100
NOi Field of
TSTEP and
TSTEPNL
entry
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Options
Label
Case
Control or
Bulk Data
Options
Groups
Multiple
Select
Allowed
Descriptions
Adaptive
Cycle Output
Interval
BY = n on
OUTPUT
Bulk Data
entry
pelements
Once per
subcase
An integer n that requests

intermediate outputs for each
nth adaptive cycle. For n=0,
only the last adaptive cycle
results are output. This is
available for SOLs 101 and 103
for versions 68 and higher.
Intermediate
Output
Options
Yes
INTOUT
field of
NLPARM
Bulk Data
entry
All
Once per
subcase
Intermediate outputs are

requested for every computed
load increment. Applicable for
nonlinear static solution type
only.
No
INTOUT
field of
NLPARM
Bulk Data
entry
All
Once per
subcase

requested for the last load of
the subcase. Applicable for
only.
All
INTOUT
field of
NLPARM
Bulk Data
entry
All
Once per
subcase

requested for every computed
and user-specified load
increment. Applicable for
only.
N/A
Specifies
PLOT option
instead of
PRINT on
the Case
Control
Output
request
entry.
All
Yes
Print to the .f06 file is

suppressed for the result type
when this is selected.
Suppress
Print for
Result Type
Edit Output Requests Form

Use this form to edit the outputs request associated with selected subcases. To access this form,
select the Output Requests button on the Subcases form with the Action set to Global Data.
Edit Output Requests
SOLUTION SEQUENCE:
101
RESULT TYPE:
Displacements
OUTPUT REQUEST:
DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM
Select Group(s)/SET
Options
All FEM
default_group
Sorting:
By Node/Element
Format:
Rectangular
The top half of

the form changes
based on what
cell or column of
cells are
selected.
Von Mises
Tensor:
Bilinear
Element Points:
Plate Strain Curv:
Plane & Curv.

Element Stresses
Composite Plate Opt:
Suppress Print for Result Type
OK
Default
Displacements
Element Stresses
Test1
DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL>
STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,B>
Test2
STRESS(SORT2,PHASE,MAX,BILI>
Test3
STRESS(SORT1,PHASE,VONMISES,>
Subcase Defaults
Clear Cell(s)
OK
Inactive (greyed out) until a subcase label

(column 1) is selected. When this button is
selected, the top half of the form will
become inactive, and the default output
request function (named
user_change_default_out_req) will be
called. This will load user defined defaults
or the system defined defaults if user ones
do not exist.
Cancel
Closes the form and saves

the selected changes. To
apply the new output
requests, you must select
Apply on the parent
Subcases/Global Data form.
Selecting the
Default button
when a single
cell is selected
resets the
selected output
request to its
default setting.
The row labels for

the spreadsheet
are the selected
subcases from
the parent form.
The Output
Requests for
each subcase are
stored in cells of
the spreadsheet.
Clears the selected cells.
You can select individual
cells, multiple cells in a
column, entire columns, or
entire rows.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Notes:
The Edit Output Requests form opens with focus in the first result type of the first
subcase.
The top half of the Edit Output Requests form is similar to the Advanced Output
Request form.
The spreadsheet column labels are the result types for the current solution type.
Putting focus in a cell causes the top half of the form to reflect the current setting, just
like the current advanced output request form. This means that the databox RESULT
TYPE: gets updated with the result type of the currently selected cell. The OUTPUT
REQUESTS: databox is also updated to show the actual content of the cell.
If a cell is initially empty, selecting it will cause the top half of the form to display the
appropriate default setting for the selected result type (i.e., column).
Selecting a column header will allow you to change all subcase output requests of a
particular type. The top half of the Edit Output Requests form will set to the default
request of the particular result type.
When you select a set of contiguous column cells, the top half of the form will configure
to the upper most selected cell.
You cannot select multiple columns.
Default Output Request Information

In order to make use of this new feature you will need to create a PCL file that contains the
function user_change_default_out_req which will overwrite the existing default file in
MSC.Patran. This new PCL file will need to be compiled and then the resulting library (.plb) will
need to be loaded into Patran. This can be done using the p3midilog.pcl or the p3epilog.pcl file.
The user_change_default_out_req function makes use of the mscn_user_add_out_req and the
mscn_user_del_out_req functions to add and delete default Output Request types. These two
functions are defined as follows:
mscn_user_add_out_req
(or_num, or_value)
Description:
This function adds either a specified version or a default version of an Output Request type to
the list of default Output Requests.
Input:
INTEGER
or_num
The OR number of the output request type to add (See Table 34).
STRING
or_value
The value of the selected output request type. Blank implies the
default value.
mscn_user_del_out_req
(or_num)
Description:
This function deletes the specified Output Request type from the list of default Output
Requests.
Input:
INTEGER
or_num
The OR number of the Output Request type to delete (See
Table 3-4).
Code Sample
FUNTION user_change_default_out_req(sol_seq)
INTEGER sol_seq
IF (sol_seq == 101 || sol_seq == 106) THEN
/* This will add this version of the Output Request type to the list of default */
/* Output Requests for solution 101 and 106. */
mscn_user_add_out_req (4,MPCFORCES(SORT2,REAL)=ALL FEM)
/* This will add the default version of these Output Request types from the list */
/* of default Output Requests for solution 101 and 106. */
mscn_user_add_out_req (10, )
mscn_user_add_out_req (6, )
/* This will delete these Output Request types from the list of default */
/* Output Requests for solution 101 and 106. */
mscn_user_del_out_req (1)
END IF
END FUNCTION
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
The following is a table that shows the current predefined default Output Requests (those
marked with an X) and the allowed options (those marked with an O) for the various solution
sequences.
Table 3-4
Result ID
Number
(Solution
Sequence)
OR Number
1
101
103
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
114
115
129
153
159
10
o
o
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
o
o
o
o
22
21
o
o
20
19
o
o
where:
1 = Displacement, 2 = stress, 3 = spcforces, 4 = mpcforces, 5 = forces, 6 = oload, 7 = nlload, 8 = ese,
9 = strain, 10 = gpstress, 11 = velocity, 12 = acceleration, 13 = gpforce, 14 = gpsdcon, 15 = elsdcon,
16 = vector, 17 = thermal, 18 = flux, 19 = ht_oload, 20 = ht_spcforces, 21 =enthalpy, 22 = hdot
OR #
Default Value
DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM
STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=All FEM;PARAM,NOCOMPS,-1
MPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM
FORCE(SORT1,REAL,BILIN)=All FEM
OLOAD(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM
NLLOAD=All FEM
ESE=All FEM
STRAIN(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,STRCUR,BILIN)=All FEM
10
GPSTRESS=All FEM; VOLUME # SET,PRINCIPAL,SYSTEM Coord 0;

SURFACE # SET #,FIBRE ALL,SYSTEM Coord 0, AXIS X1,NORMAL R,
TOPOLOGICAL,BRANCH BREAK
11
VELOCITY(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM
12
ACCELERATION(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM
13
GPFORCE=All FEM
14
GPSDCON=All FEM; VOLUME # SET #,PRINCIPAL,SYSTEM Coord 0;

TOPOLOGICAL 0.,BRANCH BREAK
15
ELSDCON=All FEM; VOLUME # SET #,PRINCIPAL,SYSTEM Coord 0;

TOPOLOGICAL 0.,BRANCH BREAK
16
VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM
17
THERMAL=(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM
18
FLUX(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM
19
OLOAD(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM
20
SPCFORCES(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM
21
ENTHALPY(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM
22
HDOT(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM
Note:
In SOL 109, 112 & 159 will have SORT2 as the default in some versions of MSC.Patran.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Subcases Direct Text Input

This form is used to directly enter entries into the Case Control section for the defined subcase.
Directly entered entries may potentially conflict
with those created by the interface. Writing
these entries to the file can be controlled with
this toggle.
Direct Text Input

Write To Input Deck
OK
Saves the current

setting and data for
the four sections
and closes the form.
Clear
Clears the current

form.
Reset
Resets the form

back to the data
values it had at the
last OK.
Cancel
Resets all four forms

back to its previous
value and closes the
form.
3.9
Select Superelements
The superelements created in the FEM menu are displayed in the form below. The
superelements for a subcase are selected by highlighting the name in the listbox. Default button
unselects all the superelements.
Select Superelements:
Available Superelements
superelement 1
superelement 2
superelement 3
superelement 4
OK
Defaults
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
3.10

The Explict MPCs created in the Element menu can be selected for a given subcase. The highlight
of selected Explicit MPCs is supportedwhen this form is displayed. The All MPCs toggle
indicates that all the Explicit MPCs already created or created later will be used for the subcase
being created. The All MPCs toggle should be turned OFF in order to select MPCs. MPXADD
SID is the ID used for identifying the selected MPCs for the subcase.
Select Explicit MPCs:
All MPCs
Available MPCs
1
2
3
4
MPCADD SID =
OK
Defaults
Cancel
3.11
Subcase Select
This form appears when the Subcase Select button is selected on the Analysis form. This form is
used to select a sequence of subcases associated with an analysis job.
Subcase Select
Subcases For Solution Sequence:
101
Default
Second-Load-Case
Pressure-Case
3-g-Pullup
Select All
Displays all the available subcases for the

current solution sequence. The current solution
sequence is displayed at the top of the form.
Unselect All
Subcases Selected:
Default
Displays all subcases that have been
associated with the current job name.
OK
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
3.12
Restart Parameters
This format of the Analysis form appears when the Action is set to Analyze and the Object is
Restart. Currently, restarts are only supported for the Linear Static (101), Nonlinear Static (106),
and Normal Modes (103) Solution Sequences. Linear and Nonlinear Static jobs can be restarted
as Linear or Nonlinear Static. Normal Modes jobs can be restarted as Frequency Response, or
Transient Response. The DBALL and the MASTER files for the initial job must be present in the
current directory when the restart job is submitted.The Restart Parameters button on the main
analysis form allows the user to enter information about where to resume the analysis. The
MSC.Patran Analysis Manager Users Manual contains more information on how to submit
restart jobs with Analysis Manager.
Analysis
Action:
Analyze
Object:
Restart
Method: Analysis Deck
Indicates the selected Analysis Code and Analysis Type,

as defined in the Preferences>Analysis (p. 321) in the
Code: MSC.Nastran
Type:
Structural
Select an Initial Job

List of names for existing analysis jobs. Select the
jobname of the analysis to restart from.
Available Restart Jobs

List of names for existing restart jobs. Select the name of
an existing restart job or enter the name for a new restart
job in the databox below.
Restart Job Name

Name to use for the restart job. An existing restart job
may be modified and/or resubmitted by making a
selection from the Available Restart Jobs listbox.
Solution Type...
Subcases...
Subcase Select...
Restart Parameters...
Analysis Manager...
Apply
Linear Static/Normal Modes

This subordinate form appears when the Restart Parameters button is selected on the Analysis
form and the solution type of the initial job is Linear Static or Normal Modes.
Set Restart Parameters
Restart Parameters:
Defines the version number from which to
restart. This is the VERSION field on the
RESTART file management statement.
Start from Version Number =

LAST
Save Old Restart Data
OK
Cancel
Requests that the restart data for the

specified version be saved. This results in
a KEEP option on the RESTART File
Management statement.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Nonlinear Static
This subordinate form appears when the Restart Parameters button is selected on the Analysis
form and the solution type is Nonlinear Static.
Set Restart Parameters
Restart Parameters:
Defines the version number to restart the

analysis from. This is the VERSION field
on the RESTART File Management
statement.
Start from Version Number =

LAST
Start from Increment Number (LOOPID) =
Defines the increment number to start

the analysis from. This is the value of the
PARAM,LOOPID Bulk Data entry.
0
Start from Subcase Number (SUBID+1) =
0
Save Old Restart Data
OK
Cancel
Defines the subcase number to start from

in the list of subcases for this job. The value
entered should be one greater than the
SUBID from the initial jobs print file (*.f06).
This is the value of the PARAM,SUBID Bulk
Data entry.
Requests that the restart data for the

specified version be saved. This
results in a KEEP option on the
RESTART File Management
statement.
3.13
Optimize
This form appears when the Analysis toggle is chosen on the main menu. When preparing for
an analysis run, select Optimize as the Action.
Analysis
Optimize
Action:
Sets up the menu for Optimization Analysis.
Object: Entire Model

Full Run
Method:
Code: MSC.Nastran
Type: Structural
Study:
Available Jobs
List of already existing jobs.
Job Name
test3
Job Description
MSC.Nastran job
created on 09-Oct-97
Optimization Parameters...
Brings up the Optimization Parameters (p. 255)menu for

Global and Optimization Analysis Parameters.

Subcases...
Subcase Select...
Brings up the Subcases (p. 256) form that creates a

subcase whose solution type can be changed at the time of
subcase creation.
Analysis Manager...
Brings up the Subcase Select Optimize (p. 258)form to
select subcases with different solution sequences.
Apply
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Optimization Parameters
This form appears when the Optimization Parameters button is selected on the
Analysis/Optimize form. It is used to define optimization parameter for the job.
Optimization Parameters
Automatic Constraints.
Use Shell Normals.
Mass Calculation:
Lumped
Tolerance Angle =
20.
999999999
1.0
None
Data Deck Echo:
Plate Rz Stiffness Factor = 0.0

Maximum Run Time =
600
Maximum Number of Design cycles (DESMAX) =

Design Data to be Printed (P2):
Objective and design variables.
Constraints.
Pproperties.
Responses.
Print Design Data (P1) every n-th cycle where n =
Print Analysis Results (NASPRT) every n-th cycle where n =
Relative Objective Convergence (CONV1) =
0.001
Absolute Objective Convergence (CONV2) =
1e-20
Relative Convergence on Design Variables (CONVDV) =
0.001
Relative Convergence on Properties (CONVPR) =
0.01
Fractional Property Change (DELP) =
0.2
Fractional Design Variable Change (DELX) =
1.0
Minimum Property Move Limit (DPMIN) =
0.01
Minimum Design Variable Move Limit (DXMIN) =
0.05
Apply
Defaults
Cancel
During any optimiza-tion design cycle, the change in the properties and design
variables are limited to maintain a good approximate model. Parameters DELP and
DELX are used to specify such a move limit. DPMIN and DXMIN are used to
provide a minimum change to avoid numerical difficulties.
These are the criteria for the objective function, design variable, and design
properties which an optimizer uses to determine whether the design
optimization process converges or not. Relaxing these criteria, in general, may
reduce the number of design cycles for an optimization job to terminate.
Parameter P2
controls what
type of design
data or
optimization
results are
printed in an f06
file. Toggle selection is
accumulative.
Parameter P1
controls how
often design data
are written.
Default (P1=0)
prints initial
results and final
results (if an
optimization task
is performed).
Subcases
This form appears when the Subcases button is selected on the Analysis/Optimize form.
Subcases
Solution Type: 101 LINEAR STATIC
Available Subcases
Default
Displays all the available subcase based on

the solution type selection.
Subcase Name
The subcase name that is being created.
Subcase Description
Subcase description which can be up
to 256 characters long.
Available Load Cases
Default
List of available loadcases.
Constraints in Current Subcase

List of the associated constraints with the selected
subcase.
Subcase Options
Displays the Subcase Parameters form. For more
information see Subcase Parameters (p. 257).
Subcase Parameters...
Output Requests...
Select Superelements...
Apply
Delete
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Subcase Parameters
This form appears when the Subcase Parameters button is selected on the Subcases form.
Subcase Parameters
Inertia Relief
Alternate Reduction
OK
Cancel
Indicates that an alternate method of performing the static

condensation is desired. The PARAM, ALTRED,YES command is
included if selected and if Database Run is also selected.
Indicates that the inertia relief flags are to be set by including the PARAM, INREL,-1
command. This flag can only be chosen if Database Run is selected and Cyclic
Symmetry is disabled. If inertia relief is selected, a node-ID for weight generation must
be selected. A PARAM, GRDPNT and a SUPORT command will be written to the input
file using the same node-ID selected for weight generation. The SUPORT card will
specify all 6 degrees of freedom.
Subcase Select Optimize

This form appears when the Subcase Select button is selected on the Analysis/Optimize form.
This form is used to select a sequence of subcases associated with an optimization analysis job.
Subcase Select
Current Job: test3
101 LINEAR STATIC
Solution Type:
Used to filter the subcases by their

solution type
Subcases Available:
Default
List of subcases based on the solution

type setting.
Select All
Unselect All
Subcases Selected:
List of the selected subcases.
101 Default
103 Default
OK
Clear
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
3.14
Interactive Analysis
The MSC.Patran Preference for MSC.Nastran has a new capability that enables the user to
perform visual interactive modal frequency response analysis. The process begins by creating a
good modal analysis solution with MSC.Nastran. The interactive modal frequency response
solution is then directed from a special set of MSC.Patran menus (wizard). The wizard assists
the user in applying the desired loads, specifying damping, selecting result entities, and defining
solution criteria for an automated fast restart in Nastran effected from the modal database
selected. MSC.Patran running as the client spawns a fast restart job to Nastran functioning as a
server. Solution results are automatically returned to the client for visualization. This procedure
suggests that there might be several benefits to using this product. The wizard provides a guide
for problem definition, minimizing confusion associated with general-purpose menu structures.
The fast restart, as the name suggests, is fast, and is executed automatically, as are the clientserver connections and the data transmission. The reduced solution space of the fast restart
minimizes the amount of result data that is calculated, stored, transmitted, and displayed. The
net result is the ability to quickly apply discrete loads to the structure and immediately visualize
the response at select grids or elements of the model. The real time solution paradigm of the
interactive scheme does not provide fringe or contour plots of the global structural response.
Assumptions. Interactive modal frequency response requires that a normal modes analysis of
the structure has been completed using Nastran, and that a .DBALL/MASTER database exists
containing the model data and the normal modes solution. Currently, the interactive paradigm
presumes the Nastran executable, the modal database, and the MSC.Patran executable are all
located in the same directory. To maintain optimal performance, licensing and security should
be local also. Given these initial conditions, the following scenarios exist for performing
interactive frequency response.
Scenario 1. If the initial normal modes analysis was modeled in MSC.Patran, then that
MSC.Patran database should be selected under File/Open when starting MSC.Patran. This
provides the user with the model from which to exercise the interactive frequency response
wizard, provided the correct flag was set to precondition the Nastran normal modes database
for this purpose. This is done in MSC.Patran by going to Analysis/Solution Type/Interactive
Modal Analysis, and activating the check box.
Scenario 2. The normal modes model may have been built and run without using MSC.Patran.
If the user intends to use the MSC integrated product to proceed with interactive frequency
response, then special care must be taken when preparing the NASTRAN input file for the
normal modes analysis. Specifically, the Nastran normal modes input file must contain the
following statement just before the CEND delimiter:
include `SSSALTERDIR:run0.V2001`
Note that both ticks are right handed and that SSSALTERDIR must be capitalized. Nastran
then creates an environment variable called SSSALTERDIR which points to where the sssalters
are located when performing a standard installation.
If the user does not have a standard Nastran installation, then he will be required to specify the
full directory path. For example, if the file run0.V2001 is located in the directory
/scr2/mike/tmp, then he must include the following statement just prior to the CEND
delimiter:
include `/scr2/mike/tmp/run0.V2001`
This include statement provides the DMAP alter required to precondition the large modal
database. This conditioning enables efficient data manipulation during the interactive frequency
response solution phase.
Under this scenario, the model data will need to be imported by starting MSC.Patran and
requesting Read Input File from the Analysis Menu. This procedure is described in greater
detail in Chapter 5 of this users guide, and constitutes reading a NASTRAN Input File for the
model data. Once the model data is placed in the MSC.Patran database, interactive frequency
response can proceed.
The Process. Scenario 1 or 2 above can be followed to provide a MSC.Patran database with a
data model suitable for performing interactive frequency response. The Analysis menu shown
below controls the interactive analysis process. Submenus for Select NASTRAN .DBALL, Create
Loading, Output Requests, Create a Field, and Define Frequencies are discussed.
Solution Type--Is currently fixed to Frequency Response (Modal Frequency Response) as the
only solution available in interactive analysis format. Subsequent versions of Nastran and
MSC.Patran may expand this capability to other solution types.
Loading Menu--The loading menu provides a spreadsheet to guide the user through load and
boundary condition application.
Miscellaneous. The Interactive Modal Frequency response solution process is staged, in the
sense that a normal mode solution is performed first to create what we refer to as the large
database (so named for obvious reasons), and then a fast restart procedure is used to develop the
frequency response. The normal modes solution is where the user specifies any weight to mass
conversion quantities (see PARAM, WTMASS) as well as a specification of the mass matrix
formulation desired (see PARAM, COUPMASS). The mass units and desired mass matrix
formulation then, are automatically accounted for in the subsequent determination of the
frequency response quantities calculated.
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Analysis Form
Analysis
Action:
Analyze
Object:
Interactive
Full Run
Method:
Code:
MSC.Nastran
Type:
Structural
Study:
Interactive Jobs
Job Name
Select Nastran .DBALL...

Create Loading...
Output Requests...
Every interactive solution will have a user assigned job name

associated with it. This provides a record of applied loads,
enforced motion boundary conditions, solution frequencies
requested, structural damping definition, and output request
entities. In a Nastran sense, each job represents a loading
condition which reflects application of a number of loads and
load types distributed on the structure. Maintaining a record of
the interactive run provides a starting point for subsequent
analyses whether they are done in the current session, or a
subsequent session. Specifically, if a user wanted to change
only a frequency dependent load function or damping
function, the interactive job storage capacity makes this a
simple procedure.
Each Interactive Analysis will have its solution specifications
stored with a job name (Interactive Name). This allows
recovery of all specifications required for performing that
particular analysis : loading, damping, solution frequencies,
and output entities. If an existing Interactive Job is selected,
those input requirements automatically populate the
interactive menus. If we want to rerun that analysis, all that is
required is to hit APPLY on the Analysis Menu. When the
calculations are finished in Nastran, the interactive system
automatically positions the user in the Interactive Results
section where XY plot requests can be made. Plot requests
are not saved in the jobs data.
View Results...
Load types include: Acoustic (Pressure),

Force, Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration.
Apply
Select Modal Results .DBALL

The following form appears when you select Select Nastran .DBALL from the Analysis form.
This form provides the pointer to the Nastran database which contains the preconditioned
normal modes solution. Some additional data is retrieved from this database for use in
MSC.Patran. Specifically, the Nastran modal constraint data is provided to MSC.Patran to
guarantee that the allowable degrees of freedom available for enforced motion are exposed in
the Loading Menu. (Application of enforced motion in modal frequency response requires that
the effected degrees of freedom were constrained in the normal modes analysis.)
Select Modal Results .DBALL
Job Filter
/oakland/users/oivory/hotline/*.DBALL
Directory
DBALL Files
/oivory/hotline/.
aaa.DBALL
/oivory/hotline/..
/oivory/hotlin/AA_sessions
Selected Results File
OK
Filter
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Loading Form
This form allows you to create loading sets. The following is the default form.
Loading Form
Select Damping Field
Create New Field/Table...
No Damping
Load Type
1
Load Var.(w)
Amplitude
Load Entities
Direction
Coord Frame
Accelerati>
2
3
4
5
6
7
Damping (w):
No Damping
Add Load
OK
Clear All
Delete Load
Defaults
Cancel
Load types include: Acoustic (Pressure),

Force, Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration.
The following shows the Loading Form filled out with a few different load conditions.
If Load Type = Acoustic, Load Entity can only reference elements and the default direction for
the load application is relative to the element normal regardless of the Coord Frame selection.
The Basic coordinate system is the default reference (COORD 0), unless, the element was defined
in a local coordinate system, in which case that Coord ID will appear in the Coord Frame
column. If the user changes the Direction from NORMAL to a specific direction vector, then the
applied pressure direction is relative to the Coord Frame referenced.
If Load Type = Force, Load Entity can only reference nodes (grid points), and a direction vector
is input to define application direction relative to the coordinate frame reference. If no
coordinate reference frame is specified, the default becomes the Basic Coordinate system (Coord
0).
If Load Type = Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration, Load Entity can only be selected from
nodes that will appear in the Load Entities list box. These nodes represent the set of all possible
nodes to which enforced motion can be applied, and is limited to nodes that were constrained
during the normal modes analysis. The Basic coordinate system is the default reference (COORD
0), unless, the node was defined in a local coordinate frame, in which case that Coord ID will
appear in the Coord Frame column.
When Load Type = Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration, and a specific node has been
selected in Load Entities, the Direction specification will indicate which directions are available
X, Y, and / or Z in the reference coordinate frame. When an enforced motion is defined for a
selected degree of freedom, it is eliminated from the available enforced motion set. Only one
enforced motion boundary condition per degree of freedom can be applied to a given node.
(Enforced motion cannot be applied to rotational degrees of freedom for interactive analysis).
Loading Form
Auto Load Selection
Element Faces to Load
Load Type
Load Var.(w)
Accelerati>
Linearly_I>
4.
Node 5, 15
Coord 0
Velocity
Constant_A>
1.
Node 115
Coord 1
Displaceme> Owens_Rand>
6.
Node 15
Coord 0
Force
1.
node 1 6
<110>
Coord 0
Acoustic 2D Owens_Rand>
10.
Element 4
Normal
N/A
Acoustic 3D
Normal
N/A
Displaceme>
Linearly_I>
Constant_A>
Linearly_I>
Amplitude
Load Entities
1.
1.
Node 5
Direction
Coord Frame
Coord 0
Damping (w):
Linearly_Increasing
Add Load
OK
Clear All
Delete Load
Defaults
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Create a Field Form

This form appears when you select the Create New Field/Table... button from the Loading
Form.
Create A Field
Load Data From Field...
Field Name:
Input Data:
Frequency
Value
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Add Row
Apply
Clear All
Delete Row
Close
Output Selection Form

This form will allow the user to select nodes and elements for output, and allow him to select the
frequencies which interest him in the analysis. The frequency selection form is the same form
that is used in standard analysis for sol 111 subcase parameters.
Output Selection
Define Frequencies...
Define Frequencies prompts a
spreadsheet for defining the desired
solution frequencies for which output will
be available. Output Selection also
provides for selecting Nodes / Grids and
Elements for which output response is
desired. Selection can be made to create
output response for complex quantities in
either Real / Imaginary or Magnitude /
Phase formats. For Interactive Analysis,
the output quantities are preset. Close the
Output Selection menu.
Grids for Output
Elements for Output
Real/Imag
Mag/Phase
OK
Cancel
CHAPTER 3
Running an Analysis
Define Frequencies Form

This form allows the user to define the frequencies of interest in the most complete way. This
form allows the users access to FREQ, FREQ1, FREQ2, FREQ3, FREQ4, FREQ5.
Define Frequencies
Linear
Type:
Incr. Type
Input Data
Start Freq.
End Freq.
0.
No Incr.
Cluster/Spread
Linear
2
3
4
5
6
7
Add Row
OK
Clear All
Delete Row
Defaults
Cancel
CHAPTER
Read Results
Overview of Reading Results

Read Output2
Attach XDB
Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities
Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities
4.1
Overview of Reading Results

The Analysis form will appear when the Analysis toggle, located on the MSC.Patran main form,
is chosen.
MSC.Patran

hp, 2
There are currently two actions that allow for importation of results. Read Output2 as the Action
on the Analysis form allows the model andor results data to be read into the MSC.Patran
database from an MSC. Nastran OUTPUT2 file. Subordinate forms of the Analysis form will
define translation parameters, which control the data to be translated, and the OUTPUT2 file
from which to translate. These forms are described on the following pages. OUTPUT2 files are
created by placing a PARAM,POST,-1 card in the MSC .Nastran bulk data.
Attach XDB as the Action on the Analysis form allows the results data from a MSC.Access
database (an .xdb file) to be accessed. In this case the results are not read directly into the
MSC.Patran database but instead remain in the MSC.Access database. Only what is termed as
meta data is read into the MSC.Patran database. Meta data consists of only the Result Case
names, their associated subcases, primary and secondary result types, global variables and the
file location of the MSC.Access database or .xdb file. The Meta data is used to translate results
on the fly when the user attempts to postprocess the model. Subordinate forms of the Analysis
form will define translation parameters which control the data to be accessed on attachment.
These forms are also described on the following pages. MSC.Access databases are created by
placing a PARAM,POST,0 card in the MSC . Nastran bulk data.
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
4.2
Read Output2
This form appears when the Analysis toggle is selected on the main menu. Read Output2, as the
selected Action, defines the type of data to be read from the analysis code results file into
MSC.Patran. The Object choices are: Result Entities, Model Data, or Both.
When the Object selected is Result Entities, the model data
must already exist in the database. No results can be read into
MSC.Patran if the associated node or element does not already
exist. Model Data only reads the model data that exists in the
results file. Both will first read the model data, then the result
entities. If Model Data or Both are selected, it is up to the user to
ensure that there will not be any ID conflicts with existing model
entities.
Defines how far the results translation will proceed. If Translate is

selected, a job file containing information for the results
translation control is created, and then submitted for translation.
If Control File is selected, the procedure will stop as soon as the
control file is generated.
Defines the job name to be used for this job. The same job name
used for the Analysis menu should be used for the Read Results
menu. This will allow MSC.Patran to load the results directly into
the load cases that were used for the analysis.
Defines the results file to be read. The form that is called up lists
all files recognized as being analysis code results files. By
default this is all files with an op2 extension on them. This can
be changed with the filter.
Defines any parameters used to control the results or model

translation from the analysis code results file.
Results File Formats. The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface supports several different
OUTPUT2 file formats. The interface, running on any platform can read a binary format
OUTPUT2 file produced by MSC Nastran running on any of these same platforms. For example,
a binary OUTPUT2 file produced by MSC .Nastran running on an IBM RS/6000 can be read by
MSC.Patran running on DEC Alpha. MSC.Patran may be able to read binary format OUTPUT2
files from other platforms if they contain 32 bit, IEEE format entities (either Big or Little Indian).
For platforms that do not produce OUTPUT2 files in these formats, MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran
can read OUTPUT2 files created with the FORM=FORMATTED option in MSC .Nastran. This
option can be selected from the Analysis/Translation Parameters form in MSC.Patran and
directs MSC . Nastran to produce an ASCII format OUTPUT2 file that can be moved between any
platforms. The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface detects this format when the OUTPUT2 file
is opened, automatically converts it to the binary format, and then reads the model and/or
results into the MSC.Patran database.
An OUTPUT2 file is created by MSC .Nastran by placing a PARAM,POST,-1 in the bulk data
portion of the input deck. The formatted or unformatted OUTPUT2 file is specified in the FMS
section using an ASSIGN OUTPUT2 = filename, UNIT=#, FORM=FORMATTED (or
UNFORMATTED). See Translation Parameters (p. 176).
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Translation Parameters (OUTPUT2). This subordinate form appears when the Translation
Parameters button is selected and Result Entities is the selected Object. When reading results
there are three Object options that may be selected: Result Entities, Model Data or Both. This form
affects import of all these objects as noted below.
MSC.Nastran
Result Entities
Defines the tolerances used during

translation. The division tolerance is used
to prevent division by zero errors. The
numerical tolerance is used when
comparing real values for equality. When
the Object is set to Model Data, only these
tolerances are available.
Tolerances
Division:
1.0E-8
Numerical:
1.0E-4
Specification of which version of

MSC.Nastran created the OUTPUT2 file to
be read. Solid Element orientation differs
between versions less than 67 and version
67 and above. Elementally oriented Solid
element results may be translated
incorrectly if the wrong version is specified.
68
Additional Results to be Imported

Rotational Nodal Results
StressStrain Invariants
Principal Directions
P-element P-order Field
Element Results Positions:
OK
Defaults
Nodal
Cancel
If an element has results at both the centroid and at

the nodes, this filter will indicate which results are to
be included in the translation.
Create a field that describes the polynomial orders

in all p-elements in the model at the end of an
adaptive cycle.
Indicates which results categories are to be

filtered out during translation. Rotational Nodal
Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and
Stress and Strain Principal Direction Results
can be skipped during translation. Items
selected will be translated. Items not selected
will be skipped. By default, Rotational Nodal
Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and
Stress and Strain Tensor Principal Directions
are ignored during translation.
4.3
Attach XDB
This form appears when the Analysis toggle is selected on the main menu and Attach XDB is the
selected Action, which defines the type of data to be read from the analysis code results file into
MSC.Patran.
Three selections under Object are possible: Results Entities,
Model Data and Both. When Results Entities is selected, it is
assumed that the model data already exists in the MSC.Patran
database. Only metadata or catalog information such as Result
Cases/Types, Global Variables, and file connection is read into
the MSC.Patran database. The results data remains in the XDB
file. The Model Data selection only imports Nodes, Elements,
and Coordinate Systems. In addition, if the model has
Superelements, separate groups are created for each
Superelement. The Both selection, imports the Model Data and
then attaches the Results Entities.
The Method can currently only be set to Local. This means that
the MSC.Access database exists locally, or via NFS, somewhere
on the machine that MSC.Patran is running on.
Defines the job name to be used for this job. The same job name
used for the Analysis menu should be used for the Read Results
menu. This will allow MSC.Patran to load the results directly into
the load cases that were used for the analysis.
Defines the results file to be read. This is the MSC.Access

database (or .xdb file). The form that is called up lists all files
recognized as being analysis code results files. By default, all
files with an xdb extension are listed on them. This can be
changed with the filter. One may attach up to 20 .xdb files
simultaneously.
Defines the parameters used to control Model and Results

Translation. This form enables you to select which
Superelements are to be imported into MSC.Patran. You can
also select a Model Design Cycle cycle/iteration when importing
an XDB file with Shape optimization results.
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Results File Formats. The same basic issues exist for MSC.Access databases as for OUTPUT2
files. For example, the MSC.Access database (xdb file) may be exchanged between computer
Systems that have binary compatibility. That is, an XDB file generated on a SUN Machine may
be used on an IBM/AIX, HPUX or SGI computers.
However, in order to exchange the XDB file on binary incompatible machines, one needs to use
the TRANS and RECEIVE utilities delivered with every installation of MSC. Nastran.
TRANS converts an XDB file generated by MSC.Nastran to an equivalent character, i.e. ASCII,
file which can be transported to another computer across the network via ftp or rcp. RECEIVE
converts the character file back into the XDB format for postprocessing.
For more information on TRANS and RECEIVE utilities, please consult the Configuration and
Operations Guide for V70 of MSC.Nastran.
A MSC.Access XDB database is created by MSC .Nastran by placing a PARAM,POST,0 in the
bulk data portion of the input deck. See Translation Parameters (p. 176).
In this release of the product, it is assumed that the Geometry, loads and results ouput all reside
in the same physical XDB file. That is, "split" XDB databases are not supported.
Translation Parameters (XDB). This subordinate form appears when the Translation
Parameters button is selected and Result Entities is the selected Object.
MSC.Nastran
Both
Defines the tolerances used during translation.

The division tolerance is used to prevent division
by zero errors. The numerical tolerance is used
when comparing real values for equality.
Tolerances
Division:
1.0E-8
Numerical:
1.0E-4
This option creates Groups based on Element

Properties found in the XDB. For example, if XDB
contains CQUAD4 elements with the PSHELL ID of
4536 then MSC.Patran will create a group named
PSHELL 4536 containing the CQUAD4 elements
and the nodes connecting the elements.
Model Import Options

Create Groups By PIDs
Additional Results to be Accessed
Indicates which results categories are to be filtered

out during translation. Rotational Results, Stress
and Strain Invariants, and Stress and Strain
Principal Direction Results can be skipped during
translation. Items selected will be translated. Items
not selected will be skipped. By default, Rotational
Nodal Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and
Stress and Strain Tensor Principal Directions are
ignored during translation.
Rotational Nodal Results

Stress/Strain Invariants
Principal Directions
Nodal
Element Results Positions:

Model Design Cycle
Select which Model Design Cycle to use for the

optimized shape you are importing. The default is
to import the model based on the last design
iteration. This form will only appear if the XDB file
contains results of an Optimization run i.e.,
SOL200.
Design Iteration
0
1
2
Superelement Filter
With the Superelement filter you can select any

given Superelement to be imported into the
MSC.Patran database. The default is to import All
Superelements. This form will only appear if the
specified XDB file contains Superelements.
Superelement ID(s)
0
10
20
Superelement Prefix:
OK
Superelement
Defaults
Cancel
Superelement Prefix controls the group names

created for each Superelement. For example if you
specify "SE" as a prefix, the group name created in
MSC.Patran for Superelement 10 will be "SE 10".
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
4.4
Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities

The following table indicates all the possible results quantities that can be loaded into the
MSC.Patran database during results translation from MSC .Nastran. The Primary and Secondary
Labels are items selected from the postprocessing menus. The Type indicates whether the results
are Scalar, Vector, or Tensor, and determines which postprocessing techniques are available to
view the results quantity. Data Block indicates which MSC .Nastran OUTPUT2 data block the
data comes from. The Description gives a brief discussion about the results quantity, such as if
it is only for certain element types, and what Output Request selection will generate this data
block. For design optimization, all of the listed results can be loaded as a function of design cycle.
Results.
Primary Label
Bar Forces
Bar Strains
Bar Stresses
Grid Point
Stresses
Secondary Label
Type
DataBlocks
Description
Rotational
Vector
OEF1
Bar moments
Translational
Vector
OEF1
Bar forces
Warping Torque
Scalar
OEF1
Warping torque
Axial Safety Margin
Scalar
OSTR1
Axial safety margin
Compression Safety
Margin
Scalar
OSTR1
Safety margin in compression
Maximum Axial
Scalar
OSTR1
Maximum axial strain
Minimum Axial
Scalar
OSTR1
Minimum axial strain
Tension Safety Margin
Scalar
OSTR1
Safety margin in tension
Torsional Safety Margin
Scalar
OSTR1
Safety margin in torsion
Axial Safety Margin
Scalar
OES1
Axial safety margin
Compression Safety
Margin
Scalar
OES1
Safety margin in compression
Maximum Axial
Scalar
OES1
Maximum axial stress
Minimum Axial
Scalar
OES1
Minimum axial stress
Scalar
OES1
Safety margin in tension
Torsional Safety Margin
Scalar
OES1
Safety margin in torsion
Stress Tensor
Tensor
OGS1
Stress tensor
Zero Shear Angle
Scalar
OGS1
Zero shear angle
Major Principal
Scalar
OGS1
Major principal
Minor Principal
Scalar
OGS1
Minor principal
Maximum Shear
Scalar
OGS1
Maximum shear
von Mises
Scalar
OGS1
von mises
Primary Label
Gap Results
Secondary Label
Type
DataBlocks
Description
Displacement
Vector
OEF1 or
OES1
Gap element displacement
Force
Vector
OEF1 or
OES1
Gap element force
Slip
Vector
OEF1 or
OES1
Gap element slip
Creep Strain
Scalar
OESNL1
Creep strain
Plastic Strain
Scalar
OESNL1
Plastic strain
Strain Tensor
Tensor
OESNL1
Strain tensor
Nonlinear
Stresses
Equivalent Stress
Scalar
OESNL1
Equivalent stress
Stress Tensor
Tensor
OESNL1
Stress tensor
Principal Strain
Direction
1st Principal x cosine
Scalar
OSTR1
1st Principal y cosine
Scalar
OSTR1
1st Principal z cosine
Scalar
OSTR1
2nd Principal x cosine
Scalar
OSTR1
2nd Principal y cosine
Scalar
OSTR1
2nd Principal z cosine
Scalar
OSTR1
3rd Principal x cosine
Scalar
OSTR1
3rd Principal y cosine
Scalar
OSTR1
3rd Principal z cosine
Scalar
OSTR1
Zero Shear Angle
Scalar
OSTR1
Zero shear angle
Scalar
OES1
Scalar
OES1
Scalar
OES1
Scalar
OES1
Scalar
OES1
Scalar
OES1
Scalar
OES1
Scalar
OES1
Scalar
OES1
Zero Shear Angle
Scalar
OES1
Zero shear angle
Nonlinear Strains
Principal Stress
Direction
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label
Shear Panel
Forces
Shear Panel
Strains
Shear Panel
Stresses
Shell Forces
Strain Curvatures
Strain Energy
Secondary Label
Type
DataBlocks
Description
Force12
Scalar
OEF1
Shear force from nodes 1 to 2
Force14
Scalar
OEF1
Force21
Scalar
OEF1
Force23
Scalar
OEF1
Force32
Scalar
OEF1
Force34
Scalar
OEF1
Force41
Scalar
OEF1
Force43
Scalar
OEF1
Kick
Scalar
OEF1
Kick forces
Rotational
Vector
OEF1
Moments at nodes
Shear
Scalar
OEF1
Shear force in panel
Translational
Vector
OEF1
Forces at nodes
Average Shear
Scalar
OSTR1
Average shear strain in panel
Maximum Shear
Scalar
OSTR1
Maximum shear strain in panel
Safety Margin
Scalar
OSTR1
Shear safety margin of panel
Average Shear
Scalar
OES1
Average shear stress in panel
Maximum Shear
Scalar
OES1
Maximum shear stress in panel
Safety Margin
Scalar
OES1
Shear safety margin of panel
Force Resultant
Tensor
OEF1
Force resultants and moment

resultants
Moment Resultant
Tensor
OEF1
Moment stress resultants
Strain Tensor
Tensor
OSTR1
Strain curvatures of a plate
1st Principal
Scalar
OSTR1
Curvature of strain 1st

principal
2nd Principal
Scalar
OSTR1
Curvature of strain 2nd

principal
Maximum Shear
Scalar
OSTR1
Curvature of maximum shear

strain
von Mises
Scalar
OSTR1
Curvature of von Mises strain
Zero Shear Angle
Scalar
OSTR1
Curvature of zero shear angle
Energy
Scalar
ONRGY1
Elements total strain energy
Energy Density
Scalar
ONRGY1
Elements strain energy density
Percent of Total
Scalar
ONRGY1
Elements percentage of total

strain density
Primary Label
Strain Invariants
Secondary Label
Type
DataBlocks
Description
1st Principal
Scalar
OSTR1
Strain 1st principal
2nd Principal
Scalar
OSTR1
Strain 2nd principal
3rd Principal
Scalar
OSTR1
Strain 3rd principal
Maximum Shear
Scalar
OSTR1
Maximum shear strain
Mean Pressure
Scalar
OSTR1
Mean strain pressure
Octahedral Shear
Scalar
OSTR1
Octahedral shear strain
von Mises
Scalar
OSTR1
von Mises equivalent strain
Strain Tensor
NONE
Tensor
OSTR1
Strain tensor
Stress Invariants
1st Principal
Scalar
OES1
Stress 1st Principal
2nd Principal
Scalar
OES1
Stress 2nd Principal
3rd Principal
Scalar
OES1
Strain 3rd Principal
Maximum Shear
Scalar
OES1
Maximum shear stress
Mean Pressure
Scalar
OES1
Mean stress principal
Octahedral Shear
Scalar
OES1
Octahedral shear stress
von Mises
Scalar
OES1
von Mises equivalent stress
Stress Tensor
NONE
Tensor
OES1
Stress tensor
Accelerations
Rotational
Vector
OUGV1
Nodal angular accelerations
Translational
Vector
OUGV1
Nodal translational
accelerations
Rotational
Vector
OPG1
Nodal equivalent applied

moments
Translational
Vector
OPG1

forces
Rotational
Vector
OQG1
Nodal moments of single-point

constraints
Translational
Vector
OQG1
Nodal forces of single-point

constraint
Rotational
Vector
OUGV1
Nodal rotational displacements
Translational
Vector
OUGV1
Nodal translational
displacements
Rotational
Vector
OPHIG
Nodal rotational eigenvectors
Translational
Vector
OPHIG
Nodal translational
eigenvectors
Rotational
Vector
OPNL1
Nodal nonlinear applied

moments
Applied Loads
Constraint Forces
Displacements
Eigenvectors
Nonlinear
Applied Loads
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label
Secondary Label
Type
DataBlocks
Description
Translational
Vector
OPNL1
Nodal nonlinear applied forces
Rotational
Vector
OUGV1
Nodal angular velocity
Translational
Vector
OUGV1
Nodal translational velocity
Error
Estimate
Scalar
ERROR
Elemental error in adaptive

analysis
Grid Point Forces
Elements
Vector
OGPFB1*
Internal nodal force

contribution by element
Applied Loads
Vector
OGPFB1*

forces
Constraint Forces
Vector
OGPFB1*
Nodal equivalent constraint

forces
Total
Vector
OGPFB1*
Total nodal equivalent forces

due to internal loads, applied
loads and constraint forces.
Elements
Vector
OGPFB1*
Internal nodal moment

contribution by element
Applied Loads
Vector
OGPFB1*

moments
Constraint Forces
Vector
OGPFB1*
Nodal equivalent constraint

moments
Total
Vector
OGPFB1*
Total nodal equivalent

moments due to internal loads,
applied loads and constraint
forces.
None
Vector
GEOMIN
In a shape optimization run,

this
is the new shape displayed as a
deformation of the original
shape.
Velocities
Grid Point
Moments
Shape Change
Primary Label
Active
Constraints
Secondary Label
Type
DataBlocks
Description
Element Stress
Scalar
R1TABRG
Element stress
Element Strain
Scalar
R1TABRG
Element strain
Element Force
Scalar
R1TABRG
Element force
Element Ply Failure
Scalar
R1TABRG
Element ply failure
Translational
Displacement
Vector
R1TABRG
Nodal translational
displacement
Rotational Displacement
Vector
R1TABRG
Nodal rotational displacement
Translational Velocity
Vector
R1TABRG
Nodal translational velocity
Rotational Velocity
Vector
R1TABRG
Nodal rotational velocity
Translational
Acceleration
Vector
R1TABRG
Nodal translational
acceleration
Rotational Acceleration
Vector
R1TABRG
Nodal rotational acceleration
Translational SPC
Vector
R1TABRG
Nodal translational SPC force
Rotational SPC
Vector
R1TABRG
Nodal rotational SPC force
Global Variables. In addition to standard results quantities, a number of Global Variables can be
created. This table outlines Global Variables that may be created. Global Variables are results
quantities where one value is representative of the entire model.
Labels
Type
DataBlocks
Description
Critical Load Factor
Oxxx
Value of buckling load for the given buckling mode.
Time
Oxxx
Time value of the time step.
Frequency
Oxxx
Frequency value of the frequency step or for the

normal mode.
Damping Ratio
Oxxx
Damping ratio value of a complex eigenvalue

analysis.
Eigenvalue
Oxxx
Eigenvalue for normal modes or complex eigenvalue

analysis.
Percent of Load
Oxxx
Percent of load value for a nonlinear static analysis.
Adaptive Cycle
Oxxx
Cycle number in p-adaptive analysis.
Design Cycle
Oxxx
Cycle number in an optimization run (SOL 200).
Design Variable
DESTAB
HISADD
Design Variable for optimization (Label from

DESTAB, value from HISADD).
Maximum
Constraint Value
HISADD
Maximum constraint value for optimization.
Objective Function
HISADD
Objective function for optimization.
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Coordinate Systems. In some cases, the elemental stresses and strains are transformed from
one coordinate frame to another when imported into the MSC.Patran database. The following
describes the coordinate systems for these element results after they are imported into the
MSC.Patran database. The coordinate system names referred to are described in the MSC.Patran
or the MSC .Nastran documentation.
CTRIA3
Results are in the MSC .Nastran system which coincides with the MSC.Patran IJK
system. At the users request during postprocessing, these results can be
transformed by MSC.Patran to alternate coordinate systems. If the user selects a
component of a stress or strain tensor to be displayed, by default, the Results
application transforms the tensor to a projected global system (Projected Global
System).
CQUAD4
Results are in the MSC .Nastran bisector coordinate system but may be
transformed by MSC.Patran to alternate coordinate systems (e.g., global) during
postprocessing. If the user selects a component of a stress or strain tensor to be
displayed, by default, the Results application transforms the tensor to a projected
global system (Projected Global System). Import of results when this element is
used in a hyperelastic analysis is not currently supported.
CHEXA,
CPENTA,
CTETRA
The user can request that MSC .Nastran compute element results in either a local
element or alternate coordinate system via the PSOLID entry. If the element
results are in the local element system, these are converted to the MSC.Patran IJK
system on import. If the results are in a system other than local element, they are
imported in this system. These results may be transformed to alternate systems
during postprocessing.
CQUAD8,
CTRI6
The elemental coordinate system, used by MSC . Nastran for results, is described
in the MSC . Nastran documentation. These results are imported into the
MSC.Patran database as-is. These results can be postprocessed in MSC.Patran
using the As Is options, but they cannot be transformed to alternate coordinate
systems.
Projected Global System. The projected system is defined as follows. First, the normal to the
shell surface is calculated. This varies for curved elements and is constant for flat elements. If the
angle between the normal and the global x-axis is greater than .01 radians, the global x-axis is
projected onto the shell surface as the local x-axis. If the angle is less than .01 radians, either the
global y-axis or the z-axis (whichever makes the largest angle with the normal) is defined to be
the local x-axis. The local y-axis is perpendicular to the plane defined by the normal and the local
x-axis.
XY Plots. For results from MSC . Nastran design optimization solution 200 runs, three XY Plots
are generated, but not posted, when the Read OUTPUT2 option is selected:
1. Objective Function vs. Design Cycle.
2. Maximum Constraint Value vs. Design Cycle.
3. Design Variable vs. Design Cycle.
These plots can be viewed under the XY Plot option in MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 7:
XY Plotting. When they are initially posted, you will have to expand their windows to view
them properly.
Model Data. The following table outlines all the data that will be created in the MSC.Patran
database when reading model data from an MSC .Nastran OUTPUT2 file and the location in the
OUTPUT2 file from where it is derived. This is the only data extracted from the OUTPUT2 file.
This data should be sufficient for evaluating results values.
Item
Block
Description
Nodes
GEOM1
Node ID
Nodal Coordinates
Reference Coordinate Frame
Coordinate Frames
GEOM1
Coordinate Frame ID
Transformation Matrix
Origin
Can be Rectangular, Cylindrical, or Spherical
Elements
GEOM2
Element ID
Topology (e.g., Quad/4 or Hex20)
Nodal Connectivity
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
4.5
Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities

The following tables list the currently supported quantities from the MSC.Access database (xdb
file).To get further information on the MSC.Access, i.e. XDB, objects supported in MSC.Patran,
please use the ddlprt and ddlqry utilities delivered with every installation of MSC . Nastran.
ddlprt is MSC.Access' on-line documentation.
ddlqry is MSC.Access Data Definition Language (DDL) browser.
See Configuration and Operations Guide for MSC.Nastran V70.
Nodal Results.
Primary Label
Displacements
Eigenvectors
Velocities
Accelerations
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Translational
VECTOR
DISPR
Rotational
VECTOR
DISPR
Translational
VECTOR
DISPRI
Rotational
VECTOR
DISPRI
Translational
VECTOR
DISPMP
Rotational
VECTOR
DISPMP
Translational
VECTOR
DISPR
Rotational
VECTOR
DISPR
Translational
VECTOR
DISPRI
Rotational
VECTOR
DISPRI
Translational
VECTOR
DISPMP
Rotational
VECTOR
DISPMP
Translational
VECTOR
VELOR
Rotational
VECTOR
VELOR
Translational
VECTOR
VELORI
Rotational
VECTOR
VELORI
Translational
VECTOR
VELOMP
Rotational
VECTOR
VELOMP
Translational
VECTOR
ACCER
Rotational
VECTOR
ACCER
Translational
VECTOR
ACCERI
Rotational
VECTOR
ACCERI
Translational
VECTOR
ACCEMP
Rotational
VECTOR
ACCEMP
Primary Label
Constraint Forces
Applied Loads
Grid Point Stresses
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Translational
VECTOR
SPCFR
Rotational
VECTOR
SPCFR
Translational
VECTOR
SPCFRI
Rotational
VECTOR
SPCFRI
Translational
VECTOR
SPCFMP
Rotational
VECTOR
SPCFMP
Translational
VECTOR
LOADR
Rotational
VECTOR
LOADR
Translational
VECTOR
LOADRI
Rotational
VECTOR
LOADRI
Translational
VECTOR
LOADMP
Rotational
VECTOR
LOADMP
Stress Tensor
TENSOR
SGSVR
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
SGSVR
Major Principal
SCALAR
SGSVR
Minor Principal
SCALAR
SGSVR
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
SGSVR
Von Mises
SCALAR
SGSVR
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label
Grid Point Stresses
Grid Point Strains
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Stress Tensor
TENSOR
SGVVR
Mean Pressure
SCALAR
SGVVR
Octahedral Shear
SCALAR
SGVVR
Major Principal
SCALAR
SGVVR
Intermediate Principal
SCALAR
SGVVR
Minor Principal
SCALAR
SGSVR
Major Prin x cosine
SCALAR
SGSVR
Intermed Prin x cosine
SCALAR
SGSVR
Minor Prin x cosine
SCALAR
SGSVR
Major Prin y cosine
SCALAR
SGSVR
Intermed Prin y cosine
SCALAR
SGSVR
Minor Prin y cosine
SCALAR
SGSVR
Major Prin z cosine
SCALAR
SGSVR
Intermed Prin z cosine
SCALAR
SGSVR
Minor Prin z cosine
SCALAR
SGSVR
Strain Tensor
TENSOR
EGSVR
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
EGSVR
Major Principal
SCALAR
EGSVR
Minor Principal
SCALAR
EGSVR
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
EGSVR
Von Mises
SCALAR
EGSVR
Primary Label
Grid Point Strains
GPS discontinunities
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Strain Tensor
TENSOR
EGVVR
Mean Pressure
SCALAR
EGVVR
Octahedral Shear
SCALAR
EGVVR
Major Principal
SCALAR
EGVVR
SCALAR
EGVVR
Minor Principal
SCALAR
EGSVR
Major Prin x cosine
SCALAR
EGSVR
SCALAR
EGSVR
Minor Prin x cosine
SCALAR
EGSVR
Major Prin y cosine
SCALAR
EGSVR
Intermed Prin y cosine
SCALAR
EGSVR
Minor Prin y cosine
SCALAR
EGSVR
Major Prin z cosine
SCALAR
EGSVR
SCALAR
EGSVR
Minor Prin z cosine
SCALAR
EGSVR
Stress Tensor
TENSOR
SGSDTR
Major Principal
SCALAR
SGSDTR
Minor Principal
SCALAR
SGSDTR
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
SGSDTR
Von Mises
SCALAR
SGSDTR
Error Estimate
SCALAR
SGSDTR
Stresss Tensor
TENSOR
SGVDTR
Mean Pressure
SCALAR
SGVDTR
Octahedral Shear
SCALAR
SGVDTR
Major Principal
SCALAR
SGVDTR
SCALAR
SGVDTR
Minor Principal
SCALAR
SGVDTR
Error Estimate Direct
SCALAR
SGVDTR
Error Estimate
Principal
SCALAR
SGVDTR
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label
Elem Stress
discontinunities
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Stress Tensor
TENSOR
DQD4VR,
DQD8VR,
DQDRVR,
DTR6VR, DTRRVR
Major Principal
SCALAR
DQD4VR,
DQD8VR,
DQDRVR,
DTR6VR, DTRRVR
Minor Principal
SCALAR
DQD4VR,
DQD8VR,
DQDRVR,
DTR6VR, DTRRVR
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
DQD4VR,
DQD8VR,
DQDRVR,
DTR6VR, DTRRVR
Von Mises
SCALAR
DQD4VR,
DQD8VR,
DQDRVR,
DTR6VR, DTRRVR
Error Estimate
SCALAR
DQD4VR,
DQD8VR,
DQDRVR,
DTR6VR, DTRRVR
Stresss Tensor
TENSOR
DHEXVR,
DPENVR, DTETVR
Mean Pressure
SCALAR
DHEXVR,
DPENVR, DTETVR
Octahedral Shear
SCALAR
DHEXVR,
DPENVR, DTETVR
Major Principal
SCALAR
DHEXVR,
DPENVR, DTETVR
SCALAR
DHEXVR,
DPENVR, DTETVR
Minor Principal
SCALAR
DHEXVR,
DPENVR, DTETVR
Error Estimate Direct
SCALAR
DHEXVR,
DPENVR, DTETVR
Error Estimate
Principal
SCALAR
DHEXVR,
DPENVR, DTETVR
Primary Label
MPC Constraint Forces
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Translational
VECTOR
MPCFR, MPCFRI,
MPCFMP
Rotational
VECTOR
MPCFR, MPCFRI,
MPCFMP
Applied Loads
VECTOR
GPFV
Constraint Forces
VECTOR
GPFV
MPC Forces
VECTOR
GPFV
Elements
VECTOR
GPFV
Total
VECTOR
GPFV
Applied Loads
VECTOR
GPFV
Constraint Forces
VECTOR
GPFV
MPC Forces
VECTOR
GPFV
Elements
VECTOR
GPFV
Total
VECTOR
GPFV
Bushing Forces
Translational,
Rotational
VECTOR
FBSHR, FBSHRI,
FBSHMP
Bushing Stresses
Translational,
Rotational
VECTOR
SBSHR, SBSHRI,
SBSHMP
Bushing Strains
Translational,
Rotational
VECTOR
EBSHR, EBSHRI,
EBSHMP
Bushing 1-D Results
Axial Stress,
Axial Strain,
Axial Force,
Axial Displacement
SCALAR
SBS1R, SBS1RI,
SBS1MP
Nonlinear Bushing Force
Axial Stress,
Axial Strain,
Axial Force,
Axial Displacement
SCALAR
NBS1R, NBS1RI,
NBS1MP
Temperature
SCALAR
THERR
Enthalpies
SCALAR
ENTHR
Rates of Enthalpy Change
SCALAR
ENRCR
Constraint Heats
SCALAR
HTFFR
Applied Loads
SCALAR
HTFLR
Grid Point Forces
Grid Point Moments
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label
Boundary Heat Flux
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Applied Loads
SCALAR
QHBDY
Free Convection
SCALAR
QHBDY
Forced Convection
SCALAR
QHBDY
Radiation
SCALAR
QHBDY
Total
SCALAR
QHBDY
Heat Fluxes
VECTOR
QBARR,
QBEMR,QCONR,
QHEXR,QPENR,
QQD4R, QQD8R,
QRODR, QTETR,
QTUBR, QTX6R
Temperature Gradients
VECTOR
QBARR, QBEMR,
QCONR,
QHEXR,QPENR,
QQD4R, QQD8R,
QRODR, QTETR,
QTUBR, QTX6R
Elemental Results.
Primary Label
Bar Forces
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Translational
VECTOR
FBEMR
Rotational
VECTOR
FBEMR
Warping Torque
SCALAR
FBEMR
Translational
VECTOR
FBEMRI
Rotational
VECTOR
FBEMRI
Warping Torque
SCALAR
FBEMRI
Translational
VECTOR
FBEMMP
Rotational
VECTOR
FBEMMP
Warping Torque
SCALAR
FBEMMP
Translational
VECTOR
FTUBR
Rotational
VECTOR
FTUBR
Translational
VECTOR
FTUBRI
Rotational
VECTOR
FTUBRI
Translational
VECTOR
FTUBMP
Rotational
VECTOR
FTUBMP
Translational
VECTOR
FCONR
Rotational
VECTOR
FCONR
Translational
VECTOR
FCONRI
Rotational
VECTOR
FCONRI
Translational
VECTOR
FCONMP
Rotational
VECTOR
FCONMP
Translational
VECTORs
FELSR
FELSRI
FELSMP
FDMPR
FDMPRI
FDMPMP
Rotational
VECTOR
FBARR
Translational
VECTOR
FBARR
Rotational
VECTOR
FBARRI
Translational
VECTOR
FBARRI
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label
Bar Forces (continued
Shear Panel Forces
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Rotational
VECTOR
FBARMP
Translational
VECTOR
FBARMP
Translational
VECTOR
FBRXR
Rotational
VECTOR
FBRXR
Force41
SCALAR
FSHRR
Force21
SCALAR
FSHRR
Force12
SCALAR
FSHRR
Force32
SCALAR
FSHRR
Force23
SCALAR
FSHRR
Force43
SCALAR
FSHRR
Force34
SCALAR
FSHRR
Force14
SCALAR
FSHRR
Kick
SCALAR
FSHRR
Shear
SCALAR
FSHRR
Force41
SCALAR
FSHRRI
Force21
SCALAR
FSHRRI
Force12
SCALAR
FSHRRI
Force32
SCALAR
FSHRRI
Force23
SCALAR
FSHRRI
Force43
SCALAR
FSHRRI
Force34
SCALAR
FSHRRI
Force14
SCALAR
FSHRRI
Kick
SCALAR
FSHRRI
Shear
SCALAR
FSHRRI
Force41
SCALAR
FSHRMP
Force21
SCALAR
FSHRMP
Force12
SCALAR
FSHRMP
Force32
SCALAR
FSHRMP
Force23
SCALAR
FSHRMP
Force43
SCALAR
FSHRMP
Force34
SCALAR
FSHRMP
Force14
SCALAR
FSHRMP
Primary Label
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Shear Panel Forces

(continued)
Kick
SCALAR
FSHRMP
Shear
SCALAR
FSHRMP
Shell Forces
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FQD4R
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FQD4R
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FQD4RI
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FQD4RI
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FQD4MP
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FQD4MP
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FQD8R
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FQD8R
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FQD8RI
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FQD8RI
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FQD8MP
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FQD8MP
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FTRRR
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FTRRR
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FTRRRI
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FTRRRI
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FTRRMP
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FTRRMP
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FTR3R
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FTR3R
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FTR3RI
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FTR3RI
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FTR3MP
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FTR3MP
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FTR6R
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FTR6R
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FTR6RI
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FTR6RI
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FTR6MP
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FTR6MP
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label
Shell Forces (continued)
Gap Results
Stress Tensor
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FQDRR
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FQDRR
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FQDRRI
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FQDRRI
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FQDRMP
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FQDRMP
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FQD4XR
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FQD4XR
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FQD4XRI
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FQD4XRI
Force Resultant
TENSOR
FQD4XMP
Moment Resultant
TENSOR
FQD4XMP
Force
VECTOR
FGAPR
Displacement
VECTOR
FGAPR
Slip
VECTOR
FGAPR
Force
VECTOR
NGAPR
Displacement
VECTOR
NGAPR
Slip
VECTOR
NGAPR
NONE
TENSOR
SRODR
TENSOR
SRODRI
TENSOR
SRODMP
TENSOR
SBEMR
TENSOR
SBEMRI
TENSOR
SBEMMP
TENSOR
STUBR
TENSOR
STUBRI
TENSOR
STUBMP
TENSOR
SCONR
TENSOR
SCONRI
TENSOR
SCONMP
NONE
NONE
NONE
Primary Label
Stress Tensor (continued)
Secondary Label
NONE
Type
Objects
TENSOR
SELSR
TENSOR
SELSRI
TENSOR
SELSMP
TENSOR
SQD4R
TENSOR
SQD4RI
TENSOR
SQD4MP
TENSOR
SBARR
TENSOR
SBARRI
TENSOR
SBARMP
TENSOR
STETR
TENSOR
STETRI
TENSOR
STETMP
NONE
TENSOR
STX6R
NONE
TENSOR
SQD8R
TENSOR
SQD8RI
TENSOR
SQD8MP
TENSOR
SHEXR
TENSOR
SHEXRI
TENSOR
SHEXMP
TENSOR
SPENR
TENSOR
SPENRI
TENSOR
SPENMP
TENSOR
STRRR
TENSOR
STRRRI
TENSOR
STRRMP
TENSOR
STR6R
TENSOR
STR6RI
TENSOR
STR6MP
TENSOR
STR3R
TENSOR
STR3RI
TENSOR
STR3MP
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label
Stress Tensor (continued)
Bar Stresses
Bar Strains
Secondary Label
NONE
Type
Objects
TENSOR
SQDRR
TENSOR
SQDRRI
TENSOR
SQDRMP
NONE
TENSOR
TQD4R
NONE
TENSOR
TQD8R
NONE
TENSOR
TTR3R
NONE
TENSOR
TTR6R
NONE
TENSOR
SBRXR
NONE
TENSOR
SQD4XR
TENSOR
SQD4XRI
TENSOR
SQD4XMP
NONE
TENSOR
SBRXR
Maximum Axial
SCALAR
SBEMR
Minimum Axial
SCALAR
SBEMR
Maximum Axial
SCALAR
SBARR
Minimum Axial
SCALAR
SBARR
SCALAR
SBARR
Maximum Axial
SCALAR
SBRXR
Minimum Axial
SCALAR
SBRXR
Maximum Axial
SCALAR
SBRXR
Minimum Axial
SCALAR
SBRXR
Maximum Axial
SCALAR
EBEMR
Minimum Axial
SCALAR
EBEMR
Maximum Axial
SCALAR
EBARR
Minimum Axial
SCALAR
EBARR
SCALAR
EBARR
Compressive Safety
Margin
SCALAR
EBARR
Maximum Axial
SCALAR
EBRXR
Minimum Axial
SCALAR
EBRXR
Maximum Axial
SCALAR
EBRXR
Minimum Axial
SCALAR
EBRXR
Primary Label
Strain Tensor
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ERODR
ERODRI
ERODMP
EBEMR
EBEMRI
EBEMMP
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ETUBR
ETUBRI
ETUBMP
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ECONR
ECONRI
ECONMP
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
EELSR
EELSRI
EELSMP
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
EQD4R
EQD4RI
EQD4MP
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
EBARRI
EBARR
EBARMP
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ETETR
ETETRI
ETETMP
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
EQD8R
EQD8RI
EQD8MP
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
EHEXR
EHEXRI
EHEXMP
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
EPENR
EPENRI
EPENMP
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ETRRR
ETRRRI
ETRRMP
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ETR6R
ETR6RI
ETR6MP
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ETR3R
ETR3RI
ETR3MP
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label
Strain Tensor (continued)
Shear Panel Stresses
Shear Panel Strains
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
EQDRR
EQDRRI
EQDRMP
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
GQD4R
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
GQD8R
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
GTR3R
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
GTR6R
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
EBRXR
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
ENG_TENSOR
EQD4XR
EQD4XRI
EQD4XMP
NONE
ENG_TENSOR
EBRXR
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
SSHRR
Average Shear
SCALAR
SSHRR
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
SSHRRI
Average Shear
SCALAR
SSHRRI
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
SSHRMP
Average Shear
SCALAR
SSHRMP
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
SSHRR
Average Shear
SCALAR
SSHRR
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
SSHRRI
Average Shear
SCALAR
SSHRRI
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
SSHRMP
Average Shear
SCALAR
SSHRMP
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
ESHRR
Average Shear
SCALAR
ESHRR
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
ESHRRI
Average Shear
SCALAR
ESHRRI
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
ESHRMP
Average Shear
SCALAR
ESHRMP
Primary Label
Principal Stress Direction
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
SQD4R
Major Prin x cosine
SCALAR
STETR
Minor Prin x cosine
SCALAR
STETR
SCALAR
STETR
Major Prin y cosine
SCALAR
STETR
Minor Prin y cosine
SCALAR
STETR
Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR
STETR
Major Prin z cosine
SCALAR
STETR
Minor Prin z cosine
SCALAR
STETR
SCALAR
STETR
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
SQD8R
Major Prin x cosine
SCALAR
SHEXR
Minor Prin x cosine
SCALAR
SHEXR
SCALAR
SHEXR
Major Prin y cosine
SCALAR
SHEXR
Minor Prin y cosine
SCALAR
SHEXR
SHEXR
Major Prin z cosine
SCALAR
SHEXR
Minor Prin z cosine
SCALAR
SHEXR
SCALAR
SHEXR
Major Prin x cosine
SCALAR
SPENR
Minor Prin x cosine
SCALAR
SPENR
SCALAR
SPENR
Major Prin y cosine
SCALAR
SPENR
Minor Prin y cosine
SCALAR
SPENR
SPENR
Major Prin z cosine
SCALAR
SPENR
Minor Prin z cosine
SCALAR
SPENR
SCALAR
SPENR
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
STRRR
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
STR6R
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
STR3R
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label
Principal Stress Direction
(continued)
Stress Invariants
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
SQDRR
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
TQD4R
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
TQD8R
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
TTR3R
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
TTR6R
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
SQD4XR
Major Principal
SCALAR
SQD4R
Minor Principal
SCALAR
SQD4R
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
SQD4R
Major Principal
SCALAR
STETR
Mean Pressure
SCALAR
STETR
Minor Principal
SCALAR
STETR
SCALAR
STETR
Octahedral Shear
SCALAR
STETR
Von Mises
SCALAR
STETR
Major Principal
SCALAR
STX6R
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
STX6R
Octahedral Shear
SCALAR
STX6R
Von Mises
SCALAR
STX6R
Major Principal
SCALAR
SQD8R
Minor Principal
SCALAR
SQD8R
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
SQD8R
Von Mises
SCALAR
SQD8R
Major Principal
SCALAR
SHEXR
Mean Pressure
SCALAR
SHEXR
Minor Principal
SCALAR
SHEXR
SCALAR
SHEXR
Octahedral Shear
SCALAR
SHEXR
Von Mises
SCALAR
SHEXR
Major Principal
SCALAR
SPENR
Mean Pressure
SCALAR
SPENR
Minor Principal
SCALAR
SPENR
Primary Label
Stress Invariants
(continued)
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
SCALAR
SPENR
Octahedral Shear
SCALAR
SPENR
Von Mises
SCALAR
SPENR
Major Principal
SCALAR
STRRR
Minor Principal
SCALAR
STRRR
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
STRRR
Von Mises
SCALAR
STRRR
Major Principal
SCALAR
STR6R
Minor Principal
SCALAR
STR6R
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
STR6R
Von Mises
SCALAR
STR6R
Major Principal
SCALAR
STR3R
Minor Principal
SCALAR
STR3R
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
STR3R
Von Mises
SCALAR
STR3R
Major Principal
SCALAR
SQDRR
Minor Principal
SCALAR
SQDRR
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
SQDRR
Von Mises
SCALAR
SQDRR
Major Principal
SCALAR
TQD4R
Minor Principal
SCALAR
TQD4R
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
TQD4R
Major Principal
SCALAR
TQD8R
Minor Principal
SCALAR
TQD8R
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
TQD8R
Major Principal
SCALAR
TTR3R
Minor Principal
SCALAR
TTR3R
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
TTR3R
Major Principal
SCALAR
TTR6R
Minor Principal
SCALAR
TTR6R
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
TTR6R
Major Principal
SCALAR
SQD4XR
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label
Stress Invariants
(continued)
Principal Strain Direction
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Minor Principal
SCALAR
SQD4XR
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
SQD4XR
Von Mises
SCALAR
SQD4XR
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
EQD4R
Major Prin x cosine
SCALAR
ETETR
Minor Prin x cosine
SCALAR
ETETR
SCALAR
ETETR
Major Prin y cosine
SCALAR
ETETR
Minor Prin y cosine
SCALAR
ETETR
ETETR
Major Prin z cosine
SCALAR
ETETR
Minor Prin z cosine
SCALAR
ETETR
SCALAR
ETETR
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
EQD8R
Major Prin x cosine
SCALAR
EHEXR
Minor Prin x cosine
SCALAR
EHEXR
SCALAR
EHEXR
Major Prin y cosine
SCALAR
EHEXR
Minor Prin y cosine
SCALAR
EHEXR
EHEXR
Major Prin z cosine
SCALAR
EHEXR
Minor Prin z cosine
SCALAR
EHEXR
SCALAR
EHEXR
Major Prin x cosine
SCALAR
EPENR
Minor Prin x cosine
SCALAR
EPENR
SCALAR
EPENR
Major Prin y cosine
SCALAR
EPENR
Minor Prin y cosine
SCALAR
EPENR
EPENR
Major Prin z cosine
SCALAR
EPENR
Minor Prin z cosine
SCALAR
EPENR
SCALAR
EPENR
Primary Label
Principal Strain Direction
(continued)
Strain Invariants
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
ETRRR
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
ETR6R
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
ETR3R
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
EQDRR
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
GQD4R
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
GQD8R
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
GTR3R
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
GTR6R
Zero Shear Angle
SCALAR
EQD4XR
Major Principal
SCALAR
EQD4R
Minor Principal
SCALAR
EQD4R
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
EQD4R
Major Principal
SCALAR
ETETR
Mean Pressure
SCALAR
ETETR
Minor Principal
SCALAR
ETETR
SCALAR
ETETR
Octahedral Shear
SCALAR
ETETR
Von Mises
SCALAR
ETETR
Major Principal
SCALAR
EQD8R
Minor Principal
SCALAR
EQD8R
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
EQD8R
Von Mises
SCALAR
EQD8R
Major Principal
SCALAR
EHEXR
Mean Pressure
SCALAR
EHEXR
Minor Principal
SCALAR
EHEXR
SCALAR
EHEXR
Octahedral Shear
SCALAR
EHEXR
Von Mises
SCALAR
EHEXR
Major Principal
SCALAR
EPENR
Mean Pressure
SCALAR
EPENR
Minor Principal
SCALAR
EPENR
SCALAR
EPENR
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label
Strain Invariants
(continued)
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Octahedral Shear
SCALAR
EPENR
Von Mises
SCALAR
EPENR
Major Principal
SCALAR
ETRRR
Minor Principal
SCALAR
ETRRR
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
ETRRR
Von Mises
SCALAR
ETRRR
Major Principal
SCALAR
ETR6R
Minor Principal
SCALAR
ETR6R
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
ETR6R
Von Mises
SCALAR
ETR6R
Major Principal
SCALAR
ETR3R
Minor Principal
SCALAR
ETR3R
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
ETR3R
Von Mises
SCALAR
ETR3R
Major Principal
SCALAR
EQDRR
Minor Principal
SCALAR
EQDRR
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
EQDRR
Von Mises
SCALAR
EQDRR
Major Principal
SCALAR
GQD4R
Minor Principal
SCALAR
GQD4R
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
GQD4R
Major Principal
SCALAR
GQD8R
Minor Principal
SCALAR
GQD8R
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
GQD8R
Major Principal
SCALAR
GTR3R
Minor Principal
SCALAR
GTR3R
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
GTR3R
Major Principal
SCALAR
GTR6R
Minor Principal
SCALAR
GTR6R
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
GTR6R
Major Principal
SCALAR
EQD4XR
Minor Principal
SCALAR
EQD4XR
Primary Label
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Strain Invariants
(continued)
Maximum Shear
SCALAR
EQD4XR
Von Mises
SCALAR
EQD4XR
Nonlinear Stresses
Stress Tensor
TENSOR
NTETR
Equivalent Stress
SCALAR
NTETR
Stress Tensor
TENSOR
NTUBR
Equivalent Stress
SCALAR
NTUBR
Stress Tensor
TENSOR
NTR3R
Equivalent Stress
SCALAR
NTR3R
Stress Tensor
TENSOR
NRODR
Equivalent Stress
SCALAR
NRODR
Stress Tensor
TENSOR
NQD4R
Equivalent Stress
SCALAR
NQD4R
Stress Tensor
TENSOR
NPENR
Equivalent Stress
SCALAR
NPENR
Stress Tensor
TENSOR
NCONR
Equivalent Stress
SCALAR
NCONR
Stress Tensor
TENSOR
NHEXR
Equivalent Stress
SCALAR
NHEXR
Stress Tensor
TENSOR
NBEMR
Equivalent Stress
SCALAR
NBEMR
Stress Tensor
TENSOR
NBEMR
Equivalent Stress
SCALAR
NBEMR
Stress Tensor
TENSOR
NBEMR
Equivalent Stress
SCALAR
NBEMR
Stress Tensor
TENSOR
NBEMR
Equivalent Stress
SCALAR
NBEMR
Strain Tensor
ENG_TENSOR
NTETR
Plastic Strain
SCALAR
NTETR
Creep Strain
SCALAR
NTETR
Strain Tensor
ENG_TENSOR
NTUBR
Plastic Strain
SCALAR
NTUBR
Creep Strain
SCALAR
NTUBR
Nonlinear Strains
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label
Nonlinear Strains
(continued)
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Strain Tensor
ENG_TENSOR
NTR3R
Plastic Strain
SCALAR
NTR3R
Creep Strain
SCALAR
NTR3R
Strain Tensor
ENG_TENSOR
NRODR
Plastic Strain
SCALAR
NRODR
Creep Strain
SCALAR
NRODR
Strain Tensor
ENG_TENSOR
NQD4R
Plastic Strain
SCALAR
NQD4R
Creep Strain
SCALAR
NQD4R
Strain Tensor
ENG_TENSOR
NPENR
Plastic Strain
SCALAR
NPENR
Creep Strain
SCALAR
NPENR
Strain Tensor
ENG_TENSOR
NCONR
Plastic Strain
SCALAR
NCONR
Creep Strain
SCALAR
NCONR
Strain Tensor
ENG_TENSOR
NHEXR
Plastic Strain
SCALAR
NHEXR
Creep Strain
SCALAR
NHEXR
Strain Tensor
ENG_TENSOR
NBEMR
Plastic Strain
SCALAR
NBEMR
Creep Strain
SCALAR
NBEMR
Strain Tensor
ENG_TENSOR
NBEMR
Plastic Strain
SCALAR
NBEMR
Creep Strain
SCALAR
NBEMR
Strain Tensor
ENG_TENSOR
NBEMR
Plastic Strain
SCALAR
NBEMR
Creep Strain
SCALAR
NBEMR
Strain Tensor
ENG_TENSOR
NBEMR
Plastic Strain
SCALAR
NBEMR
Creep Strain
SCALAR
NBEMR
Primary Label
Strain Energy
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Energy
SCALAR
URODR
Percent of Total
SCALAR
URODR
Energy Density
SCALAR
URODR
Energy
SCALAR
UBEMR
Percent of Total
SCALAR
UBEMR
Energy Density
SCALAR
UBEMR
Energy
SCALAR
UTUBR
Percent of Total
SCALAR
UTUBR
Energy Density
SCALAR
UTUBR
Energy
SCALAR
USHRR
Percent of Total
SCALAR
USHRR
Energy Density
SCALAR
USHRR
Energy
SCALAR
UCONR
Percent of Total
SCALAR
UCONR
Energy Density
SCALAR
UCONR
Energy
SCALAR
UELSR
Percent of Total
SCALAR
UELSR
Energy Density
SCALAR
UELSR
Energy
SCALAR
UDMPR
Percent of Total
SCALAR
UDMPR
Energy Density
SCALAR
UDMPR
Energy
SCALAR
UQD4R
Percent of Total
SCALAR
UQD4R
Energy Density
SCALAR
UQD4R
Energy
SCALAR
UBARR
Percent of Total
SCALAR
UBARR
Energy Density
SCALAR
UBARR
Energy
SCALAR
UGAPR
Percent of Total
SCALAR
UGAPR
Energy Density
SCALAR
UGAPR
Energy
SCALAR
UTETR
Percent of Total
SCALAR
UTETR
CHAPTER 4
Read Results
Primary Label
Strain Energy
(continued)
Cauchy Stresses
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Energy Density
SCALAR
UTETR
Energy
SCALAR
UTX6R
Percent of Total
SCALAR
UTX6R
Energy Density
SCALAR
UTX6R
Energy
SCALAR
UQD8R
Percent of Total
SCALAR
UQD8R
Energy Density
SCALAR
UQD8R
Energy
SCALAR
UHEXR
Percent of Total
SCALAR
UHEXR
Energy Density
SCALAR
UHEXR
Energy
SCALAR
UPENR
Percent of Total
SCALAR
UPENR
Energy Density
SCALAR
UPENR
Energy
SCALAR
UTRRR
Percent of Total
SCALAR
UTRRR
Energy Density
SCALAR
UTRRR
Energy
SCALAR
UTR3R
Percent of Total
SCALAR
UTR3R
Energy Density
SCALAR
UTR3R
Energy
SCALAR
UTR6R
Percent of Total
SCALAR
UTR6R
Energy Density
SCALAR
UTR6R
Energy
SCALAR
UQDRR
Percent of Total
SCALAR
UQDRR
Energy Density
SCALAR
UQDRR
TENSOR
HHEXR,
HPENR,
HQD4R,
HQDXR.
HQUDR,
HTETR,
HTR3R,
HTR6R,
HTRXR
Primary Label
Secondary Label
Type
Objects
Logarithmic Strains
TENSOR
HHEXR,
HPENR,
HQD4R,
HQDXR.
HQUDR,
HTETR,
HTR3R,
HTR6R,
HTRXR
Pressure
TENSOR
HHEXR,
HPENR,
HQD4R,
HQDXR.
HQUDR,
HTETR,
HTR3R,
HTR6R,
HTRXR
Volumetric Strains
TENSOR
HHEXR,
HPENR,
HQD4R,
HQDXR.
HQUDR,
HTETR,
HTR3R,
HTR6R,
HTRXR
CHAPTER
Read Input File
Review of Read Input File Form

Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File
Conflict Resolution
5.1
Review of Read Input File Form

The Analysis form will appear when the Analysis toggle, located on the MSC.Patran main menu,
is chosen.
MSC.Patran

hp, 2
Read Input File as the selected Action on the Analysis form allows much of the model data from
a NASTRAN input file to be translated into the MSC.Patran database. A subordinate File
Selection form allows the user to specify the NASTRAN input file to translate. This form is
described on the following pages.
CHAPTER 5
Read Input File
Read Input File Form

This form appears when the Analysis toggle is selected on the main menu. Read Input File, as
the selected Action, specifies that model data is to be translated from the specified NASTRAN
input file into the MSC.Patran database.
Analysis
Action:
Read Input File
Object:
Model Data
Method:
Translate
Code:
Type:
MSC.Nastran
Structural

Available Jobs
List of already existing jobs.
Job Name
simple
Job Description
Name assigned to current translation job. This job

name will be used as the base file name for the
message file.
MSC.NASTRAN job
created on 30-Jan-93
at 16:05:33
Entity Selection...
Activates a subordinate Entity Selection form which

allows the user to specify the specific card types to be
read. Also defines ID offset values to be used during
import.
Select Input File...

Activates a subordinate File Select form which
allows the user to specify the NASTRAN input file to
be translated.
Apply
Entity Selection Form

This subordinate form appears when the Entity Selection button is selected on the Analysis form
and Read Input File is the selected Action. It allows the user to specify which MSC Nastran
entity types to import.
Entity Selection
Entity Packets
Nodes
Elements
Material Properties
Element Properties
Coordinate Frames
Load Sets
Subcases
MPC Data
Highlighted entity types will be imported.
Select None
Select All
Select All FEM
Select All LBC
Activates the form to define ID offsets.

Define Offsets...
Reset
OK
Cancel
CHAPTER 5
Read Input File
The following table shows the relation between the entity types listed above and the actual
MSC Nastran card types effected. If an entity type is filtered out, it is treated as if those cards did
not exist in the original input file.
Entity Type
MSC.Nastran Cards
Nodes
GRID, GRDSET, SPOINT
Elements
BAROR, BEAMOR, CBAR, CBEAM, CBEND, CDAMP1, CDAMP2,

CDAMP3, CDAMP4, CELAS1, CELAS2, CELAS3, CELAS4, CGAP,
CHEXA, CMASS1, CMASS2, CMASS3, CMASS4, CONM1, CONM2,
CONROD, CPENTA, CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CQUADR, CROD,
CSHEAR, CTETRA, CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CTRIAR, CTRIAX6, CTUBE,
CVISC, PLOTEL
Material
Properties
MAT1, MAT2, MAT3, MAT8, MAT9
Element
Properties
PBAR, PBCOMP, PBEAM, PBEND, PCOMP, PDAMP, PELAS, PGAP,

PMASS, PROD, PSHEAR, PSHELL, PSOLID, PTUBE, PVISC
Coordinate
Frames
CORD1C, CORD1R, CORD1S, CORD2C, CORD2R, CORD2S
Load Sets
FORCE, GRAV,MOMENT, PLOAD1, PLOAD2, PLOAD4, PLOADX1,

RFORCE, TEMP, TEMPP1, TEMPRB, SPC, SPC1, SPCD
Subcases
LOAD, SPCADD, Case Control Section
MPC Data
MPC, RBAR, RBE1, RBE2, RBE3, RROD, RSPLINE, RTRPLT
It should be noted that since the GRID card is controlled with the Nodes filter, the grid.ps load
set with the permanent single point constraint data will also be controlled by the Nodes filter.
Define Offsets Form

This subordinate form appears when the Define Offsets button is selected on the Entity Selection
form. It allows the user to specify the ID offsets used when reading a NASTRAN input file.
If selected, the value in the Maximum column will
be used as the offset for the selected rows.
Minimum and Maximum IDs

currently found in the MSC.Patran
database.
Entity Label Offset Definition

Input Offset Value
Automatic Offset
Define Label Offsets for Selected Entities:
Existing ID Range in Db
Entity
Minimum
Maximum
Nodes
200
Elements
200
Material Properties
Element Properties
Coordinate Frames
New ID
All offset data boxes

can be selected at
once by selecting
this column header.
Offset
ID offset value to be
used during import.
The new ID value will
be the ID found in the
NASTRAN input file
plus this offset value.
Distributed Load Set IDs

Node Force Load Set IDs
Node Displacement Set IDs
Bar element Init Displacement
Reset
OK
Cancel
All references made in the input file will also be offset. If a node references a particular CID as
its analysis frame, then the reference will be offset as well. If the coordinate frame is defined in
the same input file, the proper references should be maintained. The preference will be properly
maintained. If the coordinate frame existed in the file prior to the import, then it needs to be the
offset CID. If a coordinate frame with that CID is not found in the database, an error message
will be issued.
To determine which offset effects a particular MSC Nastran card type, refer to the table in the
previous section.
For MSC.Patran entities identified by integer IDs (nodes, elements, coordinate frames, and
MPCs), the offset value is simply added to the MSC Nastran ID to generate the MSC.Patran ID.
For MSC.Patran entities identified by text names (materials, element properties, load sets, and
load cases), the offset value is first added to the MSCNastran ID. The new integer value is then
used to generate the MSC.Patran name per the naming conventions described in later sections.
CHAPTER 5
Read Input File
Selection of Input File

This subordinate form appears when the Select Input File button is selected on the Analysis form
and Read Input File is the selected Action. It allows the user to specify which NASTRAN input
file to translate.
Select File
Filter
/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/*.bdf
Files
Directories
/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/.
ids.bdf
/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/..
ids_1.bdf
/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/clip
north.bdf
Selected Input File

/bahamas/users/sprack/pf/main/north.bdf
OK
Filter
Cancel
Summary Data Form

This form appears after the import of the NASTRAN input file has completed. It displays the
number of entities imported correctly, imported with warnings, or not imported due to errors.
These figures reflect the number of MSC.Patran entities created. In some cases, there is not a oneto-one relation between the original MSC .Nastran entities and the generated MSC.Patran
entities. For example, when material orientations on several CQUAD4s are defined using
references to varying MCIDs while still referencing the same PID, MSC.Patran needs to create a
unique property set for each different MCID reference.
When the OK button is selected, the newly imported data will be committed to the MSC.Patran
database, and can not be undone. If there is any question as to whether or not this import was
desired, review the graphics data prior to selecting OK on this form. If the import was not
correct, select the undo button on the main menu bar before selecting OK on this form.
NASTRAN Input File Import Summary

Imported
Imported with Warning
Nodes
Elements
Coordinate Frames
Materials
Element Properties
Load Sets
Load Cases
MPCs
Reject Cards...
OK
Not Imported
CHAPTER 5
Read Input File
Reject Card Form

During import of the NASTRAN input file, some cards types might not be understood by
MSC.Patran. Those cards are brought into MSC.Patran in the direct text input data boxes.
Selecting the Reject Cards button on the Summary Data form will bring up this Reject Card
Form. You can review these cards here.
Direct Text Import

Bulk Data Section
$
$CBEAM
215
MPCADD
100
213
101
214
0.
0.
1.
102
File Management Section
Case Control Section
Executive Control Section
Bulk Data Section

OK
Only card types not supported by MSC.Patran are sent to the reject card blocks. (This includes
comments.) Cards which are otherwise recognized, but can not be imported due to syntax or
invalid data errors are not sent to the reject blocks. The rejected cards will have no characters in
front of the command name. Commands preceeded by the character $> are used by the
MSC/AMS product to allow processing of comment lines.
5.2
Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File

The following sections describe which specific MSC .Nastran card types can currently be read
into MSC.Patran.
The MSC .Nastran cards described in this document are the only cards read when importing a
NASTRAN input file into MSC.Patran. All non-supported cards will be sent to the appropriate
Direct Text Input data box for this job. When errors occur during the import of a supported card
type, the card being processed may or may not be imported, depending on the severity of the
problem encountered. An error message will be presented regardless of whether or not the
offending card is actually imported.
Any references from supported cards to cards that were not imported (either due to not being a
supported card type or due to serious import errors) will still be attempted. If this reference is
required in MSC.Patran for the card currently being processed, it too will fail to import. For
example, if there is a serious error on a GRID card which causes it to not imported, then all
elements attached to that GRID will also fail to import.
Partial Decks. This MSC.Patran function can read incomplete MSC. Nastran decks (except
where explicitly noted). However, if the BEGIN BULK command is missing, the program can get
confused when trying to determine if a particular card belongs to the case control or bulk data.
If you experience any difficulties importing a file that does not have a BEGIN BULK command,
add one to the top of the file. This should avoid any such confusion.
CHAPTER 5
Read Input File
Coordinate Systems
The following coordinate system definitions can be read into MSC.Patran.
Command
Comments
CORD1C
CORD1R
CORD1S
References to the GRIDs on these cards are lost. The locations of the
referenced GRIDs are extracted, and those locations are used to create
the MSC.Patran definition.
CORD2C
CORD2R
CORD2S
References to RIDs are lost. The specified locations are converted to

global cartesian for use in the MSC.Patran definitions.
The original B and C points are not retained. Their values are
recomputed when a new NASTRAN input file is created. The definition
will be equivalent, but not identical.
Referential Integrity. Coordinate systems and GRIDs which are referenced as part of a CORD
definition must be in the same input file. If these are not found in the input file, the definition will
be rejected.
References to coordinate frames other than for new coordinate frame definitions can be resolved
with coordinate frames previously found in the MSC.Patran database.
Chaining. Due to limitations in the MSC.Patran definitions of coordinate systems, chained
definitions (definitions based on other coordinate systems or grids) are modified during import.
The resulting definitions are equivalent in global space, but are based on global cartesian
coordinates rather than GRID references or coordinate locations in other systems. This change is
carried through when a new NASTRAN input file is created. All coordinate systems will be
created using CORD2 type definitions, and they will all reference global cartesian coordinates.
These definitions will be different from, but equivalent to, the original definitions.
Grids and SPOINTs

The MSC .Nastran GRID card is read fully, except the SEID field. The CD and CP references are
both maintained. The PS data is used to create a constraint set. The details of the created load set
are defined in the load set import section.
GRDSET data is merged into the GRID data during import. The data will be retained, but will
appear directly on the GRID card when a new NASTRAN input file is generated.
SPOINTs. SPOINTs are treated as GRIDs at the global origin. They are assumed to have their
GRID CD and CP fields set to the basic system, and their PS field is set to permanently constrain
degrees-of-freedom 2 through 6.
Referential Integrity. Coordinate frames referenced in the CP field must exist in the same input
file. Coordinate frames referenced on the CD field can exist in either the same input file, or the
MSC.Patran database prior to the import.
CHAPTER 5
Read Input File
Elements and Element Properties

The following MSC .Nastran elements and element properties can be read into MSC.Patran.
Element
CBAR
Property
Property Set
Name
PBAR
pbar.<pid>
PBARL
pbarl.<pid>
Comments
Orientation and offset vectors are re-defined in global
cartesian during import.
(See BAROR comments below.)
CBARAO
New property sets are created for each occurrence of a

CBAR card referenced by a CBARAO card
CBEAM

(See BEAMOR comments below.)
PBEAM
pbeam.<pid>
PBEAML
pbeaml.<pid>
PBCOMP
pbcomp.<pid>
The MSC .Nastran documentation describes how the

section data is used to create a complete set of lumped
areas. The data imported into MSC.Patran is fully
expanded, and therefore, is different from the data in
the original input file. This definition is, however,
fully equivalent to the original.
The SO field is not currently supported. A YES is
provided automatically when a new NASTRAN
input file is created.
Only the lumped areas definition is understood, If a
uniform cross section is defined here, it will be
converted to a lumped area definition, but no lumped
areas will be defined.
MSC.Patran only understands the GEOM = 1
orientation data. If other definitions are found, a
vector will be computed to convert the definition to
the GEOM = 1 format. If a GRID was referenced for
GEOM other than 1, that reference will be lost. For the
same reasons, the THETAB and RB data will also be
lost since that data is not used for GEOM = 1
definitions.
CBEND
PBEND
pbend_g.<pid>
If standard cross section properties are found on the

PBEND card
pbend_p.<pid>
If the alternate format of the PBEND is used to define

a pipe cross section.
Element
CBUSH
Property
PBUSH
Property Set
Name
pbush.<pid>
pbush_g.<pid>
CDAMP1
pbusht_1D.<pid>
PDAMP
pdamp.<pid>
For dampers connecting 2 GRIDs.
pdamp_g.<pid>
For grounded dampers attached to a single GRID.
cdamp2
For dampers connecting 2 GRIDs.
cdamp2_g
For grounded dampers attached to a single GRID.
PDAMP
Treated identical to the CDAMP1 and CDAMP2

elements with the degree-of-freedom fields set to 1
(UX).
CDAMP4
CELAS1
PELAS
CELAS2
CELAS3
The grounded form of the PBUSH
PBUSHT
CDAMP2
CDAMP3
Comments
pelas.<pid>
For springs connecting 2 GRIDs.
pelas_g.<pid>
For grounded springs attached to a single GRID.
celas2
For springs connecting 2 GRIDs.
celas2_g
For grounded springs attached to a single GRID.
PELAS
Treated identical to the CELAS1 and CELAS2

(UX).
CELAS4

CGAP
PGAP
pgap.<pid>
For non-adaptive definitions on the PGAP card.
pgap_a.<pid>
For adaptive definitions on the PGAP card.
CHBDYG
CHBDYP
PHBDY
CHEXA
PSOLID
psolid.<pid>
CMASS1
PMASS
pmass.<pid>
For masses connecting 2 GRIDs.
pmass_g.<pid>
For masses attached to a single GRID.
cmass2
For masses connecting 2 GRIDs.
cmass2_g
For masses attached to a single GRID.
CMASS2
CMASS3
Note: The BDYOR command that may contain default

values for CHBDY elements is not currently
supported.
PMASS
Treated identical to the CMASS1 and CMASS2

(UX).
CMASS4
CONM1
conm1
CONM2
conm2
CONROD
conrod
CHAPTER 5
Read Input File
Element
Property
Property Set
Name
Comments
CPENTA
PSOLID
psolid.<pid>
CQUAD4
PSHELL
pshell.<pid>
(See PSHELL comments below.)
PCOMP
pcomp.<pid>
A new material named pcomp.<pid> will be created

and referenced.
The SB and FT fields are currently not read.
PSHELL
pshell.<pid>
PCOMP
pcomp.<pid>

and referenced.
PSHELL
pshellr.<pid>
PCOMP
pcompr.<pid>

and referenced.
CROD
PROD
prod.<pid>
CSHEAR
PSHEAR
pshear.<pid>
CTETRA
PSOLID
psolid.<pid>
CTRIA3
PSHELL
pshell.<pid>
PCOMP
pcomp.<pid>

and referenced.
PSHELL
pshell.<pid>
PCOMP
pcomp.<pid>

and referenced.
PSHELL
pshellr.<pid>
PCOMP
pcompr.<pid>

and referenced.
CQUAD8
CQUADR
CTRIA6
CTRIAR
ctriax6
CTRIAX6
CTUBE
PTUBE
ptube.<pid>
CVISC
PVISC
pvisc.<pid>
PLOTEL
Tapered tubes are converted to an equivalent constant

section definition.
Creates the connectivity only. These elements are not

assigned to any property set region.
PLOTEL cards will not be written when a new input
file is created.
Higher order elements (CQUAD8, CTRIA6, CTRIAX6, CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA) will
generate linear elements in MSC.Patran if none of the mid-edge nodes are specified.
PSHELL Properties. PSHELL properties can be imported as any one of five MSC.Patran
property types. The MID1, MID2, MID3, 12I/T3, and TS/T property fields are used to determine
which one to choose. If MID2 is -1 and MID3 is 0, then a Plane Strain property set is used. If MID2
and MID3 are both 0, then a Membrane property set is chosen. If MID1 and MID3 are 0, then a
Bending property set is used. If MID1, MID2, and MID3 are all the same, and the MSC .Nastran
defaults are used for 12I/T3 and TS/T, then a Homogeneous property set is used. If all else fails,
then an Equivalent Section property set is chosen.
BAROR and BEAMOR Definitions. The BAROR and BEAMOR data is merged onto the CBAR
and CBEAM cards using the proper MSC .Nastran conventions. The data is treated as if it had
originally been defined on the CBAR and CBEAM cards. When a new NASTRAN input file is
created, the data will remain with the CBAR and CBEAM cards. No BAROR or BEAMOR cards
are generated.
Fields. If a field is required to store varying data, the field will have the same name as the
property set, with the name of the specific property word appended to it. For example, if
property set pshell.101 has a varying thickness, the field will be named
pshell.101.Thickness.
Referential Integrity. Nodes and coordinate frames referenced on elements or element
properties must exist, but they do not need to be in the input file. They could also have been
defined in the MSC.Patran database prior to the import.
If a material is referenced, but can not be found, a new material with no properties will be
created. A message will be issued indicating the creation of this material.
If an element property set is referenced, but can not be found, a new property set with no
properties will be created. A message will be issued indicating the creation of this property set.
Set Name Extensions. In some cases, the data found on the element can not be defined in
MSC.Patran in a single property set. In those cases, multiple property sets will be created to
define the distinct definitions. The table below defines extensions to the Property Set Names
shown in the previous table. If the values on the specified field changes, a new property set with
the indicated extension will be created.
CHAPTER 5
Read Input File
If all elements which reference a single PID can be stored in a single property set, then no
extension will be added to the Property Set Name.
Element
Field
Extension
CBAR
PA
PB
.pa<PA>
.pb<PB>
CBEAM
SA
SB
PA
PB
.sa<SA>
.sb<SB>
.pa<PA>
.pb<PB>
CDAMP1, CDAMP2,
CELAS1, CELAS2,
CMASS1, CMASS2
C1
C2
.ca<C1>
.cb<C2>
CDAMP3, CDAMP4,
CELAS3, CELAS4,
CMASS3, CMASS4
C1
C2
.ca1
.cb1
CGAP, CONM1, CONM2
CID
.c<CID>
CONROD, CTRIAX6
MID
.m<MID>
CQUAD4, CQUAD8,
CQUADR, CTRIA3,
CTRIA6, CTRIAR
MCID
.c<MCID>
Comments
These are automatically treated as

component 1 (X translation).
Materials
The following MSC .Nastran material definitions can be read into MSC.Patran.
Material Type
Material Name
Comments
CREEP
MAT1
mat1.<mid>
The MCSID field is not currently

supported.
If the G field is blank in the input file, the
MSC .Nastran default value will be filled
in during import.
mat2.<mid>
The MCSID field is not currently

supported.
MATT1
MAT2
MATT2
MAT3
MATT3
mat3.<mid>
Material Type
Material Name
Comments
MAT4
MATT4
MAT5
MATT5
MAT8
mat8.<mid>
MAT9
mat9.<mid>
MATT9
MPCs
The following MSC . Nastran MPC and rigid element definitions can be read into MSC.Patran.
Card Type
MPC Type
MPC
Explicit
RBAR
RBAR
RBE1
RBE1
RBE2
RBE2
Comments
Unique MPC IDs will be assigned to these entities.
Since MSC.Patran uses a slightly different basis MPC
equation, the equation coefficients (Ai) will probably
be scaled by a constant multiplier during import. The
resulting equation will be equivalent, but not
necessarily identical to the original definition in the
NASTRAN input file.
Fixed
RBE3
RBE3
RROD
RROD
RSPLINE
RSPLINE
RSSCON
RSSCON
RTRPLT
RTRPLT
MPCs in MSC.Patran are treated as elements and are not associated to load cases. As a result, all
SUBCASE related data is lost. The MPCs are simply imported into the model and are no longer
associated to a specific load case.
MPCs can reference SPOINTs instead of GRIDs. If this is detected, the corresponding component
field will be set to 1 (UX) to be consistent with the import of SPOINTs.
The MPCADD command is not read since the MPCs are simply imported and no associated to
a load case. The SID references on the MPC card are also lost for the same reason. New MPC IDs
are assigned to these elements during import.
CHAPTER 5
Read Input File
Load Sets
The following MSC .Nastran Loads and Boundary Condition definitions can be read into
MSC.Patran.
Card Type
LBC Set Name
FORCE
force.<sid>
GRAV
grav.<sid>
MOMENT
moment.<sid>
PLOAD1
pload1.<sid>
PLOAD2
pload2.<sid>
PLOAD4
pload4.<sid>
PLOADX1
ploadx1.<sid>
CONV
conv.<pid>
Comments
Only PLOAD1s applied to the entire length of an

element can be read. If a load is applied only to a
portion of an element, the load will be ignored, and
a message will be presented indicating the
problem.
Only pressure loads normal to the surface can be

imported. If a surface traction is detected, it will be
ignored, and a message will be presented
indicating the problem.
PCONV
CONVM
convm.<pid>
PCONVM
QBDYi
qbdyi.<pid>
QVECT
qvect.<pid>
QVOL
qvol.<pid>
RADBC
radbc.<pid>
RADCAV
radcav.<pid>
Note: ELEAMB field is not supported by

MSC.Patran. The ambient element is added to the
application region.
RFORCE
rforce.<sid>
If the G point is not at the origin of the referenced

CID, a new CID will be created and referenced.
The METHOD field is not read. It is automatically
set to 1 when writing a new file.
SLOAD
sload.<pid>
TEMP
temp.<sid>
RADM
RADMT
Card Type
LBC Set Name
Comments
TEMPP1
tempp1.<sid>
Only the average temperature and effective linear

gradient data fields are used. The specified
temperatures at the Z1 and Z2 locations are
ignored.
TEMPRB
temprb.<sid>
Only the average temperature and effective linear

gradient data fields are used. The specified
temperatures at the stress recovery locations are
ignored.
GRID
grid.ps
SPC
spc.<sid>
SPCADD
SPC1
spc1.<sid>
SPCD
spcd.<sid>
The required SPC or SPC1 entries for the same

Degree-of-Freedom are removed from the load case
when a SPCD is found. They will automatically be
re-generated when a new input file is created.
VIEW
VIEW3D
Fields. If a field is required to store varying data, the field will have the same name as the load
set, with the name of the specific data word appended to it. For example, if load set force.101
has a varying force magnitude, the field will be named force.101.Force.
Load cases are created in MSC.Patran from the SUBCASE definitions in the NASTRAN input
file. Load sets not referenced by a SUBCASE definition are created as load sets in MSC.Patran,
but are not associated to a load case. Load sets defined above the first SUBCASE command, plus
any permanent single point constraint sets from the GRID cards, are associated to all load cases
created during this import. If there is no case control data, then load sets will be created, but they
will not be assigned to any load cases.
The SPCADD and LOAD cards are used in creating load cases in MSC.Patran, but the SID of
these cards is lost. The SIDs on the individual SPCx, FORCE, MOMENT, GRAV, PLOADx,
RFORCE, and TEMPx cards are used in creating the names of the load sets.
The name for the created load cases is derived from the subtitle of the SUBCASE. This is done
for consistency with the forward PAT3NAS translation.
A job is created during the import. The name of the created job is the basename of the file being
read.
MSC .Nastran allows load sets to be referenced in multiple places with different scale factors.
This is not possible in MSC.Patran. Therefore, in some cases, multiple copies of the same load set
need to be created with the only difference being the scale factor. The name of these load sets are
modified to include the subcase ID to create unique names.
CHAPTER 5
Read Input File
TABLES
The following table types are supported during import of a NASTRAN input file. Note that
some forms of the table commands are converted to an equivalent version supported by Patran.
Card Type
Field Name
Comments
TABLED1
Field.<tid>
TABLED2
Field.<tid>
Converted to an equivalent TABLED1 when read

into MSC.Patran by NIFIMP.
TABLED3
Field.<tid>
Converted to an equivalent TABLED1 when read

TABLEM1
Field.<tid>
TABLEM2
Field.<tid>
Converted to an equivalent TABLEM1 when read

TABLEM3
Field.<tid>
Converted to an equivalent TABLEM1 when read

5.3
Conflict Resolution
If an entity can not be imported into MSC.Patran because another entity already exists with that
ID or name, then the conflict resolution logic is used. There are 2 different approaches taken,
depending on whether the entity is identified by an ID or by a name.
Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by IDs

If a new definition conflicts with a definition already in the MSC.Patran database, you will be
asked if you want the ID of the new definition offset. If you select YES, a new ID will be chosen.
If you select YES FOR ALL, a new ID will be chosen for this definition, as well as for any others
found to be in conflict. In this case, then all references to the ID in the original MSC.Patran
database will still reference the old ID, but references to the ID from within the input file will be
altered to reference the new ID.
If you do not want the CID to be offset, then you will be asked if you want the new definition to
overwrite the existing definition. If this is done, then all references to this ID from both the
original MSC.Patran database and the input file will be referencing the same ID. The definition
for that ID will be either the old or the new definition, depending on how this second question
is answered.
Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by Names

The user is not asked what to do in cases where the conflicting entities are identified by names.
The name for the new entity will be modified by appending an extension to the name. The new
name will be <old name>.r<n>. The value of n is chosen to make the new name unique.
No merging of data or application regions is done. The old definition is left unchanged.
CHAPTER
Delete
Review of Delete Form

Deleting an MSC.Nastran Job
6.1
Review of Delete Form

The Analysis form will appear when the Analysis toggle, located on the MSC.Patran main form,
is chosen and the selected Action is Delete.
MSC.Patran

hp, 2
The Delete option under Action allows the user to delete jobs that have been created for the
MSC.Nastran preference.
Analysis
Action:
Delete
Object:
Job
Code:
MSC.Nastran
Type:
Structural
Delete Jobs
CHAPTER 6
Delete
6.2
Deleting an MSC.Nastran Job

This format of the Analysis form appears when the Action is set to Delete. The user may delete
job definitions that were created for the MSC.Nastran preference with this form.
Analysis
Action:
Delete
Object:
Job
Code:
MSC.Nastran
Type:
Structural

Existing Jobs
List of already existing jobs. Select the jobs

that are to be deleted.
Deletes the jobs selected in the Existing Jobs

listbox.
Apply
CHAPTER
Files
Files
7.1
Files
The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface uses or creates several files.The following table outlines
each file and its uses. In the file name definition, jobname will be replaced with the jobname
assigned by the user.
File Name
Description
*.db
This is the MSC.Patran database. During an analyze pass, model

data is read from this database and, during a Read Results pass,
model and/or results data is written into it. This file typically
resides in the current directory.
jobname.jbr
These are small files used to pass certain information between

MSC.Patran and the independent translation programs during
translation. There should never be a need to directly alter these files.
These files typically reside in the current directory.
jobname.bdf
This is the NASTRAN input file created by the interface. This file
typically resides in the current directory.
msc_v#_sol#.alt
These are a series of MSC.Nastran alters that are read during

forward translation. These alters instruct MSC.Nastran to write
information to the OUTPUT2 file that the results translation will be
looking for. The forward translator searches the MSC.Patran file
path for these files, but they typically reside in the
<installation_directory>/alters directory. If these files do not meet
specific needs, edit them accordingly. However, the naming
conversion of msc_v# <version #>_sol#<solution #>.alt must be
preserved. Either place the edited file back into the
<installation_directory>/alters directory or in any directory on the
MSC.Patran file path, which takes precedence over the
<installation_directory>/alters directory. If these files are not used,
remove them from the MSC.Patran file path, rename them, or delete
them altogether.
jobname.op2
This is the MSC.Nastran OUTPUT2 file, which is read by the Read

Results pass. This file typically resides in the current directory and
contains both model and results data. It is created by placing a
PARAM,POST,-1 in the input deck.
jobname.xdb
This is the MSC.Nastran XDB file or MSC.Access database, which is

attached by the Read Results pass. This file typically resides in the
current directory and contains results data. It is created by placing a
PARAM, POST,0 in the input deck.
jobname.flat
This file may be generated during a Read Results pass. If the results
translation cannot write data directly into the specified MSC.Patran
database it will create this jobname flat file. This file typically resides
in the current directory.
CHAPTER 7
Files
File Name
Description
jobname.msg.xx
These message files contain any diagnostic output from the

translation, either forward or reverse. This file typically resides in
the current directory.
MscNastranExecute
This is a UNIX script file, which is called on to submit MSC.Nastran

after translation is complete. This file might need customizing with
site specific data, such as, host machine name and MSC.Nastran
executable commands. This file contains many comments and
should be easy to edit. MSC.Patran searches its file path to find this
file, but it typically resides in the <installation_directory> bin/exe
directory. Either use the general copy in
<installation_directory>/bin/exe, or place a local copy in a
directory on the file path, which takes precedence over the
<installation_directory>/bin/exe directory.
CHAPTER
Errors/Warnings
Errors/Warnings
8.1
Errors/Warnings
There are many error or warning messages that may be generated by the MSC.Patran
MSC.Nastran Interface. The following table outlines some of these.
Message
Description
Unable to open a new message file " ".

Translation messages will be written to
standard output.
If the translation tries to open a message file and

cannot, it will write messages to Standard Output.
On most systems, the translator automatically
writes messages to standard output and never
tries to create a separate message file.
Unable to open the specified OUTPUT2

file " ".
The OUTPUT2 file was not found. Check the

OUTPUT2 file specification in the translation
control file.
The specified OUTPUT2 file " " is not

in standard binary format and cannot
be translated.
The OUTPUT2 file is not in standard binary

format. Check the OUTPUT2 file specification in
the translation control file.
Group " " does not exist in the

database. Model data will not be
translated.
The name of a nonexistent group was specified in

the translator control file. No model data will be
translated from the OUTPUT2 file.
Needed file specification missing! The

full name of the job file must be
specified as the first command-line
argument to this program.
The translation control file must be specified as the

first on-line argument to the translator.
Unable to open the specified database

" ". Writing the OUTPUT2
information to the PCL command file
" ".
If the translator cannot communicate directly to

the specified database. It will write the results
and/or model data to a PCL session file.
Unable to open either the specified

database " ", or a PCL command file,
" ".
The naspat3 translator is unable to open any

output file. Check file specification and directory
protection.
Unable to open the NASTRAN input

file " ".
The translator was unable to open a file to where

the input file information will be written.
Unable to open the specified database,

" ".
The forward MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran translator

was unable to open the specified MSC.Patran
database.
Alter file of the name " " could not be

found. No OUPUT2 alter will be
written to the NASTRAN input file.
The OUTPUT2 DMAP alter file, for this type of

analysis, could not be found. Correct the search
path to include the necessary directory if you want
the alter files to be written to the input file.
No property regions are defined in the

database. No elements or element
properties can be translated.
Elements referenced by an element property

region in the MSC.Patran database will not get
translated by the forward MSC.Patran
MSC.Nastran translator. If no element regions are
defined, no elements will be translated.
CHAPTER
Preference Configuration and

Implementation
Software Components in MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran
MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Components
Configuring the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Execute File
A.1
Software Components in MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran

The MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran product includes the following items:
A PCL function contained in p3patran.plb that will add MSC.Nastran specific

definitions to any MSC.Patran database (not already containing such definitions) at
any time.
A PCL library called mscnastran.plb and contained in the <installation_directory>

directory. This library is used by the analysis forms to produce forms for analysis code
specific translation parameter, solution parameter, etc.
A script file called MscNastranExecute, contained in the

<installation_directory>/bin/exe directory. This script controls the operation of the
interface and the submission of MSC.Nastran analyses. This script can be run
independent of MSC.Patran but typically run from within MSC.Patran, transparent to
the user.
Several MSC.Nastran alter files are included. These files are used when creating the
NASTRAN input file. They ask MSC.Nastran to produce the results file required by the
NASPAT3 results translator. These files can be found in the
<installation_directory>/alter directory. They must follow the naming convention
msc_v<version_number>_sol<solution_number>.alt. For example, msc_v67_sol3.alt.
If these files do not meet the users needs, they should be modified. Alter files specific
to LMS CADA-X are also included. These files are identical to the standard alter files
except for an additional .lms extension, e.g., msc_v67_sol3.alt.lms. These files are
usually needed only when the user requires support for older solution sequences.
This MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Interface Manual is included as part of the product. An

on-line version is also provided to allow the direct access to this information from
within MSC.Patran.
CHAPTER A
Preference Configuration and Implementation
A.2
MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Components

The diagrams shown below indicate how the functions, scripts, programs, and files that
constitute the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran interface affect the MSC.Patran environment. Site
customization, in some cases, is indicated.
Figure A-1 shows the process of running an analysis. The mscnastran.plb library defines the
Translation Parameter, Solution Type, Solution Parameter, and Output Request forms called by
the Analysis form. When the Apply button is pushed on the Analyze form, the interface process
is initiated. The interface reads data from the database and creates the NASTRAN input file.
Status messages from the interface are recorded in the MSC.Patran session file. A series of
MSC.Nastran alter files is provided. They may be used during the creation of the input file
depending upon the selected solution type and solution parameters. These alter files are mostly
used in support of older solution sequences. If the interface successfully produces a NASTRAN
input file, and the user requests it, the MscNastranExecute script will then start MSC.Nastran.
MSC. Pa tr a n
Analysis
mscnastran.plb
p3patran.plb
Analyze
MscNastranExecute
MSC. Pat ra n
Database
Alter Library
jobname.bdf
MSC.Nastran
Figure A-1 Forward Translation
Figure A-2 shows the process of reading information from an MSC.Nastran OUTPUT2 file.
When the Apply button is selected on the Read Output2 form, a <jobname>.jbr file is created and
the results translation is started. The results interface process reads the data from the
MSC.Nastran OUTPUT2 file and stores the results in the MSC.Patran database. Status messages
from the interface are recorded in the MSC.Patran session file.
p3patran.plb
MSC. P at ra n
Analysis
mscnastran.plb
Read
Output2
jobname.jbr
MSC. Pat ra n
database
MSC.Nastran
jobname.OP2
Figure A-2 OUTPUT2 File Translation
CHAPTER A
Preference Configuration and Implementation
Figure A-3 shows the process of translating information from a NASTRAN input file into a
MSC.Patran database. The behavior of the main Analysis/Read Input File form and the
subordinate file select form is dictated by the mscnastran.plb PCL library. The Apply button on
the main form activates the input file reader program, which reads the specified NASTRAN
input file.
MSC. Pa t ra n
p3patran.plb
Analysis
Read
Input File
mscnastran.plb
MSC.Nastran Input
File Reader
MSC. Pat ra n
database
NASTRAN
Input File
input_file_name.error.*
Figure A-3 NASTRAN Input File Translation
A.3
Configuring the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Execute File

During the installation of the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran analysis preference, the mscsetup utility
creates a default site_setup file in the installation directory. This file sets environment variables
relating to MSC.Patran. To custom configure this site_setup file consult Environment
Variables (p. 94) in the MSC.Patran Installation and Operations Guide.
MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide

I N D E X
MSC.Patran
MSC.Nastran
Preference
Guide
Volume 1:
Structural
Analysis
A
alternate reduction, 183, 257
ALTERS, 344
Alters, 176
ALTRED, 183, 257
analysis coordinate frames, 17
analysis form, 173
analysis job definition, 175
analysis job submittal, 175
analysis preferences, 6
analyze, 172
AUTOSPC, 183
B
buckling, 194
bulk data, 9
bulk data file, 312
C
case control, 8
CBAR, 77
CBEAM, 80, 88, 90
CBEND, 84, 86
CDAMP1, 73, 102
CELAS1, 72, 101
CGAP, 104
CHEXA, 140
CMASS1, 69, 106
complex Eigenvalue, 198
CONM1, 67
CONM2, 70
coordinate frames, 15, 284
analysis, 17
reference, 17
coordinates, 177
COUPMASS, 184, 190
CPENTA, 140
CQUAD4, 111, 113, 114, 116, 117, 118, 120,
122, 125, 128, 131, 132, 135, 136
CQUAD8, 111, 116, 118, 125, 131, 135

CQUADR, 127
creep, 52, 53
CROD, 98, 99
CSHEAR, 139
CTETRA, 140
CTRIA3, 111, 114, 116, 118, 122, 125, 128, 131,
135
CTRIA6, 111, 116, 118, 125, 131, 135
CTRIAR, 113, 117, 120, 127, 132, 136
CTRIAX6, 130
CTUBE, 100
CVISC, 103
CYAX, 32
cyclic symmetry, 21, 32, 183, 194, 203, 257
CYJOIN, 32
CYSYM, 32
D
degrees-of-freedom, 22
DISPLACEMENT, 235
displacements, 155, 158
distributed load, 155
dynamic reduction, 188, 193
DYNRED, 193
E
ECHO, 184
EIGB, 196
EIGC, 201
Eigenvalue extraction, 188, 194
buckling, 196
complex, 201
real, 191
EIGR, 191
EIGRL, 196
elastoplastic, 46, 47, 48, 49
element properties, 63
INDEX
elements, 284
2d solid, 131, 132
axisymmetric solid, 130
coupled point mass, 67
curved general section, 84
curved pipe, 86
gap, 104
general section beam, 77
general section rod, 98, 99
general section(cbeam), 93
grounded scalar damper, 73
grounded scalar mass, 69
grounded scalar spring, 72
lumped area beam, 88
lumped point mass, 70
p-formulation, 11, 141
P-Formulation bending panel, 128
P-Formulation Equivalent Section plate,
122
P-Formulation general section beam, 80
P-Formulation homogeneous plate, 114
P-Formulation Membrane, 137
P-Formulation Plane Strain Solid, 133
pipe section, 100
plotel, 107
revised bending panel, 127
revised equivalent section plate, 120
revised homogeneous plate, 113
revised laminate plate, 117
revised membrane, 136
revised plane strain solid, 132
scalar damping, 102
scalar mass, 106
scalar spring, 101
shear panel, 139
solid, 140
standard bending panel, 125
standard equivalent section plate, 118
standard homogeneous plate, 111
standard laminate plate, 116
standard membrane, 135
standard plane strain solid, 131
tapered beam, 90
viscous damper, 103
ELSDCON, 235
errors, 342
ESE, 235
executive control, 8
F
failure, 55, 56, 57
criteria, 50, 51
FEEDGE, 11
FEFACE, 12
files, 338
finite elements, 16, 18
FMS, 8
follower forces, 186
FORCE, 159, 235
force, 155, 159
formats, 177
frequency response, 203
G
GEOM1, 284
GEOM2, 284
GMBC, 12
GPFORCE, 235
GRAV, 163
GRDPNT, 185, 190
I
INCLUDE files, 177
inertia relief, 183, 257
inertial load, 163
initial conditions, 155, 164
initial load, 155
initial velocity, 155
input file, 312
INREL, 183, 257
iterations
static nonlinear, 216
K
K6ROT, 184
L
large displacements, 186
LGDISP, 187
linear static, 183
linear surf-vol, 19
linear transient, 206
load cases, 167
loads and boundary conditions, 153
INDEX
M
MAT1, 50, 51
MAT3, 58
MAT8, 54, 55, 56, 57
materials, 36
2D anisotropic, 39, 59
2D orthotropic, 39, 54
3D anisotropic, 40, 60
3D orthotropic, 39, 58
composite, 41, 61
isotropic, 38, 42
MATS1, 43, 46, 47, 48, 49
MATT1, 50
MAXLINES, 184
model data, 273
MOMENT, 159
MPC, 19, 23, 33
MSC.Access, 176, 270
MSC.Nastran version, 177, 273
multi-point constraints, 19
N
NLLOAD, 235
NLPARM, 216
nodes, 17, 177, 284
nonlinear elastic, 43
nonlinear statics, 186
nonlinear transient, 209
normal nodes, 188
numbering options, 178
O
OEF1, 277, 278
OESNL1, 278
OLOAD, 235
ONRGY1, 279
OPG1, 280
OPHIG, 280
OPNL1, 280
optimize, 254
optimization parameters, 255
subcase create, 256
subcase parameters, 257
subcase select optimize, 258
OSTR1, 277, 278
OUGV1, 280
output requests, 231
OUTPUT2, 176, 270, 271
OUTRCV, 13
P
PARAM, SNORM, 184, 190, 199, 204, 207
PBAR, 77
PBCOMP, 88
PBEAM, 80, 90
PBEND, 84, 86
PCOMP, 51, 56, 57, 61, 116, 117
PDAMP, 73, 102
PELAS, 72, 101
PGAP, 104
PLOAD4, 159
PLOADX1, 159
PMASS, 69, 106
POINT, 11
preferences, 6
pressure, 155, 159
PROD, 98
properties, 63
PSHEAR, 139
PSHELL, 111, 113, 118, 120, 125, 127, 131,
132, 135, 136
PSOLID, 140
PTUBE, 100
PVISC, 103
R
RBAR, 20, 25
RBE1, 20, 26
RBE2, 20, 24, 27
RBE3, 20, 28
read input file, 312
reference coordinate frames, 17
results, 270, 271, 274
supported entities, 277, 285
RFORCE, 163
RROD, 21, 29
RSPLINE, 21, 30
RSSCON, 19
RTRPLT, 21, 31
S
sliding surface, 21, 33
INDEX
solution parameters, 183

SOL 109, 206
SOL 112, 206
SOL 27, 206
SOL 31, 206
solution sequences
SOL 1, 180, 183
SOL 101, 180, 183
SOL 103, 180
SOL 105, 180, 194
SOL 106, 180, 186
SOL 107, 198
SOL 108, 180, 203
SOL 109, 180
SOL 110, 180, 198
SOL 111, 180, 203
SOL 112, 180
SOL 114, 180, 183
SOL 115, 180
SOL 118, 180, 203
SOL 129, 180, 209
SOL 147, 180
SOL 26, 180, 203
SOL 27, 180
SOL 28, 180, 198
SOL 29, 180, 198
SOL 3, 180
SOL 30, 180, 203
SOL 37, 180
SOL 47, 180, 183
SOL 48, 180
SOL 5, 180, 194
SOL 66, 180, 186
SOL 77, 180, 194
SOL 99, 180, 209
solution types, 180
SPC1, 158
SPCD, 158
SPCFORCES, 235
static data, 156
STRAIN, 235
STRESS, 235
structural damping, 199, 208, 210
supported entities, 8
T
TEMP, 161
temperature, 155, 161
TEMPP1, 162
TEMPRB, 161
TIC, 164
TIME, 184
time dependent, 157
tolerances, 176, 273, 276
translation parameters, 176, 273, 276
TSTEPNL, 219
V
VECTOR, 235
VU mesh, 13
W
warnings, 342
WTMASS, 184, 190
X
XDB, 176, 270, 274

MSC - Patran MSC - Nastran Preference Guide. Struct

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MSC - Patran MSC - Nastran Preference Guide. Struct

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

C O N T E N T S

MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide

MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide, Volume 1: Structural

MSC.Nastran Product Information, 3

Introduction to Building a Model, 6

Currently Supported MSC.Nastran Input Options, 8

Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran

Lumped Area Beam (CBEAM/PBCOMP), 88

Beam Modeling, 146

Loads and Boundary Conditions, 153

Load Cases, 167

Defining Contact Regions, 168

Review of the Analysis Form, 172

Translation Parameters, 176

Solution Types, 180

Direct Text Input, 182

Solution Parameters, 183

Subcase Parameters, 214

Output Requests, 231

Select Superelements, 248

Select Explicit MPCs..., 249

Subcase Select, 250

Restart Parameters, 251

Interactive Analysis, 259

Analysis Form, 261

Overview of Reading Results, 270

Read Output2, 271

Attach XDB, 274

Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities, 277

Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities, 285

Review of Read Input File Form, 312

Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File, 320

Conflict Resolution, 332

Review of Delete Form, 334

Deleting an MSC.Nastran Job, 335

Software Components in MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran, 344

MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Components, 345

Configuring the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Execute File, 348

MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide, 349

MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide, Volume 1: Structural Analysis

MSC.Nastran Product Information

MSC/PATRAN MSC/NASTRAN Preference Guide, Volume 1: Structural Analysis

Introduction to Building a Model

Introduction to Building a Model

$# Session file patran.ses.01 started recording at 25

To use the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Application

The only currently supported Analysis Type for

Indicates the file suffixes used in creating file

Currently Supported MSC.Nastran Input Options

An ASSIGN command is used to assign a particular name (job name + user

Supported MSC.Nastran Executive Control Commands

183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206, 209

183, 186, 188, 194, 198, 203, 206, 209

Supported MSC.Nastran Case Control Commands

183, 194, 203, 206

183, 188, 194, 201, 203,

183, 194, 203, 206

183, 188, 194, 201, 203,

183, 188, 194, 201, 203,

183, 188, 194, 201, 203,

183, 186, 188, 194, 198,

Supported MSC.Nastran Bulk Data Entries

12, 141, 180, 186